psychology of death and dying

eureka

DeSpelder-Lynne-Anne--Strickland-Albert-Lee-The-Last-Dance-Encountering-Death-and-Dying-McGraw-Hill-Education-2015.pdf

Home >Nursing homework help >psychology of death and dying

The Last Dance

des35465_fm_i-xxviii.indd ides35465_fm_i-xxviii.indd i 03/02/14 5:08 PM03/02/14 5:08 PM

Final PDF to printer

This page intentionally left blank

The Last Dance tenth edition

Encountering Death and Dying

L Y N N E A N N D e S P E L D E R Cabrillo College

A L B E R T L E E S T R I C K L A N D

des35465_fm_i-xxviii.indd iiides35465_fm_i-xxviii.indd iii 03/02/14 5:09 PM03/02/14 5:09 PM

Final PDF to printer

THE LAST DANCE: ENCOUNTERING DEATH AND DYING, TENTH EDITION

publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a database

or retrieval system, without the prior written consent of McGraw-Hill Education, including, but not

limited to, in any network or other electronic storage or transmission, or broadcast for distance

learning.

Some ancillaries, including electronic and print components, may not be available to customers

outside the United States.

This book is printed on acid-free paper.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 DOC/DOC 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 4

ISBN: 978-0-07-803546 -3

MHID: 0-07-803546 -5

Senior Vice President, Products & Markets: Kurt L. Strand Vice President, General Manager, Products & Markets: Michael Ryan Vice President, Content Production & Technology Services: Kimberly Meriwether David Senior Brand Manager: Maureen E. Prado Roberts Managing Development Editor: Penina Braffman Marketing Specialist: Alexandra Schultz Director, Content Production: Terri Schiesl Lead Content Project Manager: Jane Mohr Buyer: Nichole Birkenholz Cover Designer: Studio Montage, St. Louis, MO. Cover Images: Edvard Munch, The Dance of Life, 1889–1900. Oil on canvas. 49¼” 3 74¾”. National

Gallery, Oslo. Media Project Manager: Jennifer Bartell Compositor: Laserwords Private Limited Typeface: 10/12 New Baskerville Printer: R. R. Donnelley

All credits appearing on page or at the end of the book are considered to be an extension of the

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data DeSpelder, Lynne Ann, 1944-

The last dance : encountering death and dying / Lynne Ann DeSpelder, Cabrillo College, Albert

Lee Strickland.—Tenth edition.

pages cm

ISBN 978-0-07-803546 -3 (alk. paper)

1. Death—Psychological aspects—Textbooks. 2. Death--Social aspects—Textbooks. I. Strickland,

Albert Lee. II. Title.

BF789.D4D53 2014

155.9’37—dc23 2013041273

The Internet addresses listed in the text were accurate at the time of publication. The inclusion of a

website does not indicate an endorsement by the authors or McGraw-Hill Education, and McGraw-

Hill Education does not guarantee the accuracy of the information presented at these sites.

www.mhhe.com

des35465_fm_i-xxviii.indd ivdes35465_fm_i-xxviii.indd iv 2/17/14 7:37 PM2/17/14 7:37 PM

Final PDF to printer

In memory of

Coleen DeSpelder

who lived with lightness

through the shadows of terminal illness

April 2, 1954—May 17, 2001

and to our parents

Bruce Erwin DeSpelder

and

Dorothy Roediger DeSpelder

Luther Leander Strickland

and

Bertha Wittenburg Strickland

des35465_fm_i-xxviii.indd vdes35465_fm_i-xxviii.indd v 03/02/14 5:09 PM03/02/14 5:09 PM

Final PDF to printer

This page intentionally left blank

vii

Brief Contents

Preface xxi Prologue, by David Gordon 1

CHAPTER 1: Attitudes Toward Death: A Climate of Change 5

CHAPTER 2: Learning About Death: Socialization 49

CHAPTER 3: Perspectives on Death: Historical and Cultural 89

CHAPTER 4: Death Systems: Mortality and Society 139

CHAPTER 5: Health Care: Patients, Staff, and Institutions 175

CHAPTER 6: End-of-Life Issues and Decisions 213

CHAPTER 7: Facing Death: Living with Life-Threatening Illness 259

CHAPTER 8: Last Rites: Funerals and Body Disposition 295

CHAPTER 9: Survivors: Understanding the Experience of Loss 341

CHAPTER 10: Death in the Lives of Children and Adolescents 385

CHAPTER 11: Death in the Lives of Adults 417

CHAPTER 12: Suicide 447

CHAPTER 13: Risks, Perils, and Traumatic Death 489

CHAPTER 14: Beyond Death / After Life 531

CHAPTER 15: The Path Ahead: Personal and Social Choices 569

Epilogue, by David Gordon 599 Notes 601 Credits and Sources 671 Name Index 677 Subject Index 693

des35465_fm_i-xxviii.indd viides35465_fm_i-xxviii.indd vii 2/21/14 5:57 PM2/21/14 5:57 PM

Final PDF to printer

This page intentionally left blank

Contents

Preface xxi Prologue, by David Gordon 1

C H A P T E R 1

Attitudes Toward Death: A Climate of Change 5

Expressions of Attitudes Toward Death 6 Mass Media 6

In the News 6

Entertaining Death 8

Language 10

Music 12

Literature 15

Visual Arts 18

Humor 23

Living with Awareness of Death 25 Contemplating Mortality 26

Dimensions of Thanatology 26

Death Anxiety and Fear of Death 27

Terror Management 29

Studying Death and Dying 31 The Rise of Death Education 31

Pioneers in Death Studies 32

Factors Affecting Familiarity with Death 34 Life Expectancy and Mortality Rates 35

Causes of Death 37

Geographic Mobility and Intergenerational Contact 38

Life-Extending Technologies 40

The Internet and the Digital Age 42

Examining Assumptions 43 Death in a Cosmopolitan Society 44

Exploring Your Own Losses and Attitudes 46

Further Readings 597

has focused on more than just death; it has dealt with living, like a class on

philosophy.” Another student expressed the value of her death explorations

as having “expanded my faith in the resilience of the human spirit.” After

describing how several individuals faced the prospect of dying, Sandra Bert-

man concluded that a common thread was the sense of “connectedness,

affi nity with all mankind: past, present, alive, dead.” 71

The study of death and dying includes components of information and

data, of course, and it also embraces a wisdom arising out of the human

encounter with death. This wisdom involves “a different kind of knowing, an

integrative approach that refuses to look aside from the real human situation

of uncertainty and ultimate death.” 72 To be sure, death education does per-

tain to practical aspects of the individual and psychosocial encounter with

death. But it offers more than that. Awareness of death and dying brings an

added dimension to the experience of living. It brings us into the present and

serves as a reminder of the precious precariousness of life and the value of

compassion through the ordinary as well as extraordinary circumstances of

human experience.

Further Readings Cecilia Lan-wan Chan and others. In Celebration of Life: A Self-Help Journey on Preparing

a Good Death and Living with Loss and Bereavement. Hong Kong: Centre on Behav- ioral Health, University of Hong Kong, 2009.

Allan Kellehear. Compassionate Cities: Public Health and End-of-Life Care. New York: Routledge, 2005.

David K. Meagher and David E. Balk, eds. Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed. New York: Routledge, 2013.

Edwin S. Shneidman. A Commonsense Book of Death: Refl ections at Ninety of a Lifelong Thanatologist. Lanham, Md.: Rowman & Littlefi eld, 2008.

Mark C. Taylor. Field Notes from Elsewhere: Refl ections on Dying and Living. New York: Columbia University Press, 2009.

Barry Vincent. Philosophical Thinking About Death and Dying. Belmont, Calif.: Thomson Wadsworth, 2007.

Additional resources for this chapter can be found at www.mhhe.com/despelder10e

des35465_ch15_568-598.indd 597des35465_ch15_568-598.indd 597 1/28/14 3:53 PM1/28/14 3:53 PM

Final PDF to printer

This page intentionally left blank

599

It’s late. I wonder what Death will look like. A drooling ogre? Perhaps an unblinking skull, the Grim Reaper? A veiled mistress with beckoning arms? The standard forms. Or maybe Death will be a polished young man in a three-piece suit, all smiles and sin- cerity and confi dence. What a disappointment that would be. No, I prefer the scythe— no ambiguity, no surrender . . . no dickering. What’s that? . . . I hear him. He’s here.

“May I come in?” I nod. It’s the young man who left me two days ago to knock on the doors of his

neighbors’ homes. “Well . . . ?” My breath is shorter than I thought. He smiles, looks down at his hands, then at me. “Well, I did as you said. It didn’t

take long before I realized that I wasn’t going to fi nd a household that hadn’t been touched by death.”

“How many did you go to?” He covers his mouth with his hand a moment, trying to hide his pride, I guess.

“All of them.” “All?” “Every house. . . . I’m very stubborn.” We both smile. My wheezing is worse, and he notices. He shows his concern, and

I can see that he understands what is happening. “You’re dying, aren’t you, old man?” I close my eyes in answer. When I open them again, he is at my side. “Is there someone I should get for you? Your family?” “Gone.” “Some friend?”

E P I L O G U E

des35465_epi_599-600.indd 599des35465_epi_599-600.indd 599 03/02/14 3:43 PM03/02/14 3:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

600 e p i l o g u e

“Gone. All gone . . . except for you.” The young man nods, then pulls his chair over next to my own. He takes my hand. I rest a moment. “There is something you must do for me,” I wheeze. “When I’m dead, burn this house and everything in it, including me.”

“Leave nothing behind?” “This is only a fi lthy old shack. I’m leaving behind the only thing that anyone

really can leave behind . . . the difference I’ve made in the lives of the people I’ve met.” I squeeze his hand as best I can. He squeezes back. “Oh . . . and this.” I try to lift the book in my lap—my book. He sees me struggling and picks it up for me. “You take this. It’s yours.” His eyes widen.

“But I don’t deserve—” “There isn’t time for that now!” He nods and lays the book on his lap. Good, that’s

done. Moments pass. It gets quieter. . . . I must close my eyes. I witness again the glory of ten thousand mornings, ten thousand afternoons, ten thousand nights . . . then they, too, fade. All that’s left is the sound of our breathing and the wind. Time slows. Time changes. Where is the scythe? The young man’s hand leaves mine, and I hear his footsteps recede . . . stop . . . return. He sits down, and I feel his hand on mine. He opens my fi ngers and lays something cool and light in my palm, all lace and limbs . . . the ballerina.

Now I can go.

David Gordon

des35465_epi_599-600.indd 600des35465_epi_599-600.indd 600 03/02/14 3:43 PM03/02/14 3:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

601

10. Robert Fulton and Greg Owen, “Death and Soci-

ety in Twentieth Century America,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 18, no. 4 (1987–1988): 379–395. See also Dan Nimmo and James E. Combs, Nightly Horrors: Crisis Coverage by Television Network News (Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1985).

11. National Safety Council, 2009. Estimates based on

data from National Center for Health Statistics and

U.S. Census Bureau.

12. J. Sean McCleneghan, “‘Reality Violence’ on TV

News: It Began with Vietnam,” The Social Science Journal 39 (2002): 593–598.

13. McCleneghan, “‘Reality Violence,’” p. 595. The

man referred to was Daniel V. Jones.

14. Allan Kellehear, Compassionate Cities: Public Health and End-of-Life Care (New York: Routledge, 2005), p. 105.

15. Kellehear, Compassionate Cities, p. 106.

16. George Gerbner, “Death in Prime Time: Notes on

the Symbolic Functions of Dying in the Mass Media,”

Annals of the American Academy of Political and Social Science 447 ( January 1980): 64–70.

17. Transcript, “The Mean World Syndrome: Media

Violence & the Cultivation of Fear,” featuring George

Gerbner and Michael Morgan, Media Education Foun-

dation, 2010; www.mediaed.org .

18. Jacque Lynn Foltyn, “Dead Sexy: Post-Disaster/

Terrorism Voyeurism and the Corpse, Pop Culture’s

New Porn Star” (paper presented at the Centre for

Death and Society, Bath, U.K., 2006).

C H A P T E R 1 1. See Philip A. Mellor and Chris Shilling, “Moder-

nity, Self-Identity and the Sequestration of Death,”

Sociology: The Journal of the British Sociological Association 27, no. 3 (1993): 411–431; and Tony Walter, “Modern

Death: Taboo or Not Taboo?” Sociology 25 (May 1991): 293–310.

2. Regis Martin, The Last Things: Death, Judgment, Heaven, Hell (San Francisco: Ignatius Press, 1998), p. 64.

3. Sami Pihlström, “Death—Mine or the Other’s? On

the Possibility of Philosophical Thanatology,” Mortality 6, no. 3 (2001): 265–286; quote, pp. 266, 280.

4. Steve Jobs, “You’ve Got to Find What You Love,”

Stanford Report, June 14, 2005.

5. David Friend, Watching the World Change: The Stories Behind the Images of 9/11 (New York: Farrar, Straus, and Giroux, 2006), p. 32.

6. See Lynne Ann DeSpelder, “September 11, 2001

and the Internet,” Mortality 8, no. 1 (2003): 88–89.

7. Robert Kastenbaum, Death, Society, and Human Experience (St. Louis: Mosby, 1977), p. 93.

8. Marilyn Johnson, The Dead Beat: Lost Souls, Lucky Stiffs, and the Perverse Pleasures of Obituaries (New York: HarperCollins, 2006), pp. 91, 106, 117, 223.

9. Jack Lule, “News Strategies and the Death of

Huey Newton,” in The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and Dying, ed. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland, 33–40 (Mountain View, Calif.: Mayfi eld,

1995).

N O T E S

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 601des35465_notes_601-670.indd 601 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

602 n o t e s

34. De Martino is discussed in James S. Amelang,

“Mourning Becomes Eclectic: Ritual Lament and the

Problem of Continuity,” Past & Present, no. 187 (2005): 3–31.

35. Gail Holst-Warhaft, The Cue for Passion: Grief and Its Political Uses (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 2000), p. 200. About this lament, see also Loring

M. Danforth, The Death Ritual of Rural Greece (Prince- ton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1982), p. 143.

36. See Amy Clarkson, “Dying in the Opera,” Pallimed, http://arts.pallimed.org/2009/10/dying-in-opera

.html .

37. Bruce L. Plopper and M. Ernest Ness, “Death as

Portrayed to Adolescents Through Top 40 Rock and

Roll Music,” Adolescence 28, no. 112 (Winter 1993): 793–807.

38. David Margolick, Strange Fruit: Billie Holiday, Café Society, and an Early Cry for Civil Rights (Philadelphia: Running Press, 2000), p. 17.

39. Glenn Watkins, Proof Through the Night: Music and the Great War (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2001), pp. 257–259.

40. Graeme Thomson, I Shot a Man in Reno: A History of Death by Murder, Suicide, Fire, Flood, Drugs, Disaster, Disease, and General Misadventure as Related in Popular Song (New York: Continuum, 2008), p. 59.

41. Elijah Wald, Narcocorrido: A Journey into the Music of Drugs, Guns, and Guerrillas (New York: HarperCollins, 2002).

42. Edward Hirsch, How to Read a Poem (San Diego: Harvest, 1999), p. 271.

43. Charles Reagan Wilson, “Digging Up Bones:

Death in Country Music,” in You Wrote My Life: Lyrical Themes in Country Music, ed. Melton A. McLaurin and Richard A. Peterson, 113–129 (Philadelphia: Gordon

and Breach, 1992), p. 115.

44. Wilson, “Digging Up Bones,” p. 126.

45. George S. Kanahele, ed., Hawaiian Music and Musi- cians (Honolulu: University Press of Hawaii, 1979), pp. 53, 56.

46. Marguerite K. Ashford, Bishop Museum, Hono-

lulu, personal communication.

47. See Albert Lee Strickland, “The Healing Power of

Music in Bereavement,” The Forum: Association for Death Education and Counseling 29, no. 2 (2003): 4–5.

48. See Richard A. Pacholski, “Death Themes in

Music: Resources and Research Opportunities for

Death Educators,” Death Studies 10, no. 3 (1986): 239–263.

19. Frederic B. Tate, “Impoverishment of Death Sym-

bolism: The Negative Consequences,” Death Studies 13, no. 3 (1989): 305–317.

20. Dolf Zillmann, “The Psychology of the Appeal of

Portrayals of Violence,” in Why We Watch: The Attrac- tions of Violent Entertainment, ed. J. H. Goldstein, 179–211 (New York: Oxford University Press, 1998).

21. Colin McGinn, The Power of Movies: How Screen and Mind Interact (New York: Pantheon, 2005), p. 14. See also Lynn Schofi eld Clark, From Angels to Aliens: Teenag- ers, the Media, and the Supernatural (New York: Oxford University Press, 2003), p. 13; and Fran McInerny,

“Cinematic Visions of Dying,” in The Study of Dying: From Autonomy to Transformation, ed. Allan Kellehear, 211–232 (New York: Cambridge University Press,

2009).

22. Hannelore Wass, “A Perspective on the Current

State of Death Education,” Death Studies 28, no. 4 (2004): 289–308.

23. Bill Bryson, The Mother Tongue: English and How It Got That Way (New York: Perennial, 2001), p. 189.

24. Marsha McGee, “Faith, Fantasy, and Flowers: A

Content Analysis of the American Sympathy Card,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 11, no. 1 (1980–1981): 27, 29.

25. Lorraine Hedtke and John Winslade, “The Use of

the Subjunctive in Re-Membering Conversations With

Those Who Are Grieving,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 50, no. 3 (2004): 197–215.

26. Alynn Day Harvey, “Evidence of a Tense Shift in

Personal Experience Narratives,” Empirical Studies of the Arts 4, no. 2 (1986): 151–162.

27. Lera Boroditsky, “Linguistic Relativity,” in Ency- clopedia of Cognitive Science, ed. Lynn Nadel (London: Macmillan, 2003), pp. 917–921; esp. 920.

28. Joy S. Berger, Music of the Soul: Composing Life Out of Loss (New York: Routledge, 2006), p. 3.

29. Ted Gioia, Healing Songs (Durham: Duke Univer- sity Press, 2006), pp. 24, 32.

30. Robert McDowell, Poetry as Spiritual Practice (New York: Free Press, 2008), p. 216.

31. G. Chew and T. J. Mathiesen, “Thrēnos,” The New Grove Dictionary of Music Online; www.grovemusic.com .

32. Donovan J. Ochs, Consolatory Rhetoric: Grief, Symbol, and Ritual in the Greco-Roman Era (Columbia, S.C.: Uni- versity of South Carolina Press, 1993), p. 50.

33. See Michael Herzfeld, “In Defi ance of Destiny: The

Management of Time and Gender at a Cretan Funeral,”

American Ethnologist 20, no. 2 (1993): 241–255.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 602des35465_notes_601-670.indd 602 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 1 603

63. Suse Lowenstein, quoted in Ann F. de Jong Hodg-

son, “Interviews and Issues: Dark Elegy,” Illness, Crises and Loss 4, nos. 3–4 (1995): 18–38; quote, p. 21. The sculpture is located in Livingston, New Jersey.

64. Fritz Eichenberg, Dance of Death: A Graphic Com- mentary on the Danse Macabre Through the Centuries (New York: Abbeville, 1983).

65. See Martha V. Pike and Janice Gray Armstrong,

A Time to Mourn: Expressions of Grief in Nineteenth Cen- tury America (Stony Brook, N.Y.: The Museums at Stony Brook, 1980); and Anita Schorsch, Mourning Becomes America: Mourning Art in the New Nation (Philadelphia: Main Street Press, 1976).

66. Cindy Ruskin, The Quilt: Stories from the Names Project (New York: Pocket Books, 1988).

67. Robert E. Goss and Dennis Klass, Dead But Not Lost: Grief Narratives in Religious Traditions (Walnut Creek, Calif.: AltaMira, 2005), p. 276.

68. Maxine Borowsky Junge, “Mourning, Memory and

Life Itself: The AIDS Quilt and the Vietnam Veterans’

Memorial Wall,” Arts in Psychotherapy 26, no. 3 (1999): 195–203. See also Michael Franklin, “AIDS Iconogra-

phy and Cultural Transformation: Visual and Artistic

Responses to the AIDS Crisis,” The Arts in Psychotherapy 20, no. 4 (1993): 299–316. For a minority view regard-

ing the Quilt, see Daniel Harris, “Making Kitsch from

AIDS,” Harper’s Magazine ( July 1994), pp. 55–60.

69. See Jose Cardenas, “Sympathy Crafted by Hand,”

The Los Angeles Times, May 4, 2004; and Michael M. Phil- lips, “Quilters’ Busy Hands Can’t Quite Keep Up with

Deaths in Iraq,” The Wall Street Journal, August 30, 2005.

70. Quoted in Cardenas, “Sympathy Crafted by

Hand.”

71. Holst-Warhaft, The Cue for Passion, p. 189.

72. Andrew Whitmarsh, “‘We Will Remember Them’:

Memory and Commemoration in War Museums,”

Journal of Conservation and Museum Studies, Issue 7 (November 2001): 1–15; quote pp. 1, 11.

73. See John Breen, “The Dead and the Living in the

Land of Peace: Sociology of the Yasukuni Shrine,”

Mortality 9, no. 1 (2004): 77–82; John Breen, “Yasukuni Shrine: Ritual and Memory,” Japan Focus 293 (2005); John Breen, ed., Yasukuni, the War Dead, and the Struggle for Japan’s Past (New York: Columbia University Press, 2008); Andrew M. McGreevy, “Arlington National

Cemetery and Yasukuni Jinja: History, Memory, and

the Sacred,” Japan Focus 293 (2005); and Daiki Shi- buichi, “The Yasukuni Shrine Dispute and the Politics

of Identity in Japan: Why All the Fuss?” Asian Survey 45, no. 2 (March/April 2005): 197–215.

49. For a survey, see Robert F. Weir, ed., Death in Litera- ture (New York: Columbia University Press, 1980).

50. Ted Bowman, “Using Literary Resources in

Bereavement Work: Evoking Words for Grief,” The Forum: Association for Death Education and Counseling 29, no. 2 (2003): 8–9.

51. Jahan Ramazani, Poetry of Mourning: The Modern Elegy from Hardy to Heaney (Chicago: University of Chi- cago Press, 1994), pp. 1, 361.

52. Albert Lee Strickland, “Elegy,” in The A-Z of Death & Dying: Social, Medical, and Cultural Aspects, ed. Michael John Brennan (Santa Barbara, Calif.:

ABC-Clio/Greenwood, 2014).

53. Robert McDowell, Poetry as Spiritual Practice (New York: Free Press, 2008), p. 216.

54. William M. Lamers, Jr., “The Little Sounds of

Grief: Poetry and Grief ” (paper presented at the 21st

International Death, Grief, and Bereavement

Conference, University of Wisconsin, LaCrosse,

May 28, 2003).

55. Hirsch, How to Read a Poem, p. 80.

56. See Terrence Des Pres, The Survivor: An Anatomy of Life in the Death Camps (New York: Oxford University Press, 1976); Lawrence L. Langer,

Versions of Survival: The Holocaust and the Human Spirit (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1982)

and Holocaust Testimonies: The Ruins of Memory (New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1991); Lawrence

L. Langer, ed., Art from the Ashes: A Holocaust Anthol- ogy (New York: Oxford University Press, 1995); and Alvin H. Rosenfeld, A Double Dying: Refl ections on Holocaust Literature (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1980).

57. Lawrence Langer, The Age of Atrocity: Death in Mod- ern Literature (Boston: Beacon Press, 1978).

58. Frederick J. Hoffman, The Mortal No: Death and the Modern Imagination (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton Univer- sity Press, 1964).

59. William Ruehlmann, Saint with a Gun: The Unlaw- ful American Private Eye (New York: New York University Press, 1984), p. 9.

60. Elizabeth D. Samet, “Teaching Poetry to Soldiers

in a Post-Heroic Age,” Armed Forces & Society 29, no. 1 (2002): 109–127.

61. See Richard A. Pacholski, “Death Themes in the

Visual Arts: Resources and Research Opportunities for

Death Educators,” Death Studies 10, no. 1 (1986): 59–74.

62. Kirk Varnedoe, “Dreams of a Summer Night,”

Portfolio (November–December 1982), p. 93.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 603des35465_notes_601-670.indd 603 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

604 n o t e s

87. Ester R. Shapiro, “Culture and Socialization in

Assessment and Intervention,” in Handbook of Thanatol- ogy, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk, 193–207 (New York: Routledge, 2013), p. 197.

88. Norman Wirzba, Food and Faith: A Theology of Eat- ing (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2011), pp. 1, 2.

89. Tom Arcaro and Ted Cox, “Human Existence as

a Waltz of Eros and Thanatos,” Humanity & Society 12, no. 1 (1988): 75–94.

90. Francesco Campione, Manifesto della Tanatologia [Manifesto of Thanatology] (Bologna: Cooperativa

Libraria Universitaria Editrice Bologna, 2005).

91. International Work Group on Death, Dying, and

Bereavement, “Existential Questions and Their Moral

Implications,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 43, no. 1: 1–6; quote p. 1.

92. Robert Kastenbaum, “Reconstructing Death in

Postmodern Society,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, 7–18; quote p. 8.

93. Robert Kastenbaum, “Death Writ Large,” Death Studies 28, no. 4 (2004): 375–392; quote p. 390.

94. Herman Feifel, “The Thanatological Movement:

Respice, Adspice, Prospice,” Loss, Grief, and Care 6, no. 1 (1992): 5–16, esp. pp. 11–12.

95. Calvin Conzelus Moore and John B. William-

son, “The Universal Fear of Death and the Cultural

Response,” in Handbook of Death and Dying, ed. Clifton D. Bryant (Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage, 2003), pp. 3–13.

96. Bert Hayslip, Jr., “Death Denial: Hiding and Cam-

oufl aging Death,” in Handbook of Death and Dying, ed. Bryant, 34–42; quote p. 35.

97. Hayslip, “Death Denial,” p. 35.

98. Lindsay Prior, “Actuarial Visions of Death: Life,

Death, Chance in the Modern World,” in The Changing Face of Death: Historical Accounts of Death and Disposal, ed. Peter C. Jupp and Glennys Howarth, 177–193 (New

York: St. Martin’s, 1997), p. 189.

99. Thomas McGuane. The Longest Silence: A Life in Fishing. New York: Knopf, 1999, p. x.

100. Avery Weisman, The Realization of Death (New York: Jason Aronson, 1974), p. 5.

101. Talcott Parsons, “Death in American Society: A

Brief Working Paper,” American Behavioral Scientist 6, no. 9 (1963): 61–65.

102. See Robert A. Neimeyer and David Van Brunt,

“Death Anxiety,” in Dying: Facing the Facts, 3rd ed., ed. Hannelore Wass and Robert A. Neimeyer, 49–88

(Washington, D.C.: Taylor & Francis, 1995).

74. Carla Sofka, “History and Healing: Museums as

Healing Spaces,” The International Journal of the Inclu- sive Museum, Volume 2 (Champaign, Ill.: Common Ground, 2009).

75. International Work Group on Death, Dying, and

Bereavement, “The Arts and Humanities in Health

Care and Education,” Death Studies 24, no. 5 (2000): 365–375; quote p. 366.

76. Sandra L. Bertman, “Volts of Connection: The

Arts as Shock Therapy,” Grief Matters: The Australian Journal of Grief and Bereavement 3, no. 3 (2000): 51–53; see also, by Bertman, Facing Death: Images, Insights, and Interventions (Philadelphia: Taylor & Francis, 1991).

77. See James A. Thorson, “Did You Ever See a Hearse

Go By? Some Thoughts on Gallows Humor,” Journal of American Culture 16, no. 2 (1993): 17–24; quote p. 18.

78. David Lester, “Refl ections on Jokes and Cartoons

About Suicide,” Death Studies 36 (2012): 664–674, p. 668.

79. Neil J. Elgee, “Laughing at Death,” The Psychoana- lytic Review 90, no. 4 (2003): 475–497; quote p. 495.

80. Mary N. Hall, “Laughing as We Go” (paper pre-

sented at the annual meeting of the Forum for Death

Education and Counseling, Philadelphia, April 1985);

see also Mary N. Hall and Paula T. Rappe, “Humor

and Critical Incident Stress,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, 289–294.

81. John C. Meyer, “Humor as a Double-Edged Sword:

Four Functions of Humor in Communication,” Com- munication Theory 10, no. 3 (2000): 310–331; example from p. 321.

82. Thorson, “Did You Ever See a Hearse Go By,” p. 18.

83. Linda D. Henman, “Humor as a Coping Mecha-

nism: Lessons from POWs,” Humor: International Journal of Humor Research 14, no. 1 (2001): 83–94; quote p. 86.

84. Linda Francis, Kathleen Monahan, and Candyce

Berger, “A Laughing Matter? The Uses of Humor in

Medical Institutions,” Motivation and Emotion 23, no. 2 (1999): 155–174. See also Fabio Sala, Edward Krupat,

and Debra Roter, “Satisfaction and the Use of Humor

by Physicians and Patients,” Psychology and Health 17, no. 3 (2002): 269–280.

85. Vera M. Robinson, Humor and the Health Professions: The Therapeutic Use of Humor in Health Care, 2nd ed. (Thorofare, N.J.: Slack, 1991), pp. 50, 53.

86. Jamie L. Goldenberg, Tom Pyszczynski, Shannon

K. McCoy, Jeff Greenberg, and Sheldon Solomon,

“Death, Sex, Love, and Neuroticism: Why is Sex Such a

Problem?” Journal of Personality and Social Psychology 77, no. 6 (1999): 1173–1187; quote p. 1175.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 604des35465_notes_601-670.indd 604 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 1 605

in Advances in Experimental Social Psychology 24, ed. M. P. Zanna (New York: Academic Press): 93–159.

114. Sheldon Solomon, Jeff Greenberg, and Tom

Pyszczynski, “Pride and Prejudice: Fear of Death and

Social Behavior,” Current Directions in Psychological Sci- ence 9, no. 6 (2000): 200–204; quote p. 201.

115. Sam Keen, “The Heroics of Everyday Life: A

Theorist of Death Confronts His Own End,” Psychology Today, April 1974. See also Daniel Liechty, “The Denial of Death Revisited,” Death Studies 23, no. 8 (1999): 757– 760; and “Reaction to Mortality: An Interdisciplinary

Organizing Principle for the Human Sciences,” Zygon: Journal of Religion and Science 33, no. 1 (1998): 45–58. See also Jeffrey Kauffmann, Awareness of Mortality (Amityville, N.Y.: Baywood, 1995).

116. Tom Pyszczynski, Jeff Greenberg, and Sheldon

Solomon, “Why Do We Need What We Need? A Ter-

ror Management Perspective on the Roots of Human

Social Motivation,” Psychological Inquiry 8, no. 1 (1997): 1–20.

117. Jeff Greenberg, Sheldon Solomon, and Tom

Pyszczynski, “Terror Management Theory of Self-

Esteem and Cultural Worldviews: Empirical Assess-

ments and Conceptual Refi nements,” Advances in Experimental Social Psychology 29 (1997): 61–139; quote p. 100.

118. Robert Kastenbaum, “Should We Manage

Terror—If We Could?” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 59, no. 4 (2009): 271–304; esp. pp. 287, 288.

119. Robert Kastenbaum, “Sad to Say: Is It Time

for Sorrow Management Theory?,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 62, no. 4 (2010–2011): 305–327; quote p. 323.

120. Robert C. Solomon, “Death Fetishism, Morbid

Solipsism,” in Death and Philosophy, ed. Jeff Malpas and Robert C. Solomon, 152–176 (New York: Routledge,

1998); quote pp. 174–175.

121. F. David Martin, “Facing Death at 80: Memory

and the Holy,” Soundings: An Interdisciplinary Journal 83, no. 2 (Summmer 2000): 301–330.

122. Patrick Vernon Dean, “Is Death Education a

‘Nasty Little Secret’? A Call to Break the Alleged

Silence,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strick- land, pp. 323–326.

123. Vanderlyn R. Pine, “A Socio-Historical Portrait

of Death Education,” Death Education 1, no. 1 (1977): 57–84; see also Pine, “The Age of Maturity for Death

Education: A Socio-Historical Portrait of the Era

1976 –1985,” Death Studies 10, no. 3 (1986): 209–231; and Dan Leviton, “The Scope of Death Education,”

Death Education 1, no. 1 (1977): 41–56.

103. Robert A. Neimeyer, Richard P. Moser, and

Joachim Wittkowski, “Assessing Attitudes Toward

Dying and Death: Psychometric Considerations,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 47, no. 1 (2003): 45–76; quote pp. 46 –47. See also Robert A. Neimeyer,

Death Anxiety Handbook: Research, Instrumentation, and Application (Washington, D.C.: Taylor & Francis, 1993).

104. J. A. Beshai and Mohamed A. Naboulsi, “Exis-

tential Perspectives on Death Anxiety,” Psychological Reports 95 (2004): 507–513; quote p. 511.

105. Robert A. Neimeyer, “Death Anxiety Research:

The State of the Art” (paper presented at the annual

meeting of the Association for Death Education and

Counseling, Duluth, Minnesota, April 1991). See also

Neimeyer, “Death Anxiety,” in Encyclopedia of Death and the Human Experience, ed. Clifton D. Bryant and Dennis L. Peck, 296 –299 (Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage, 2009).

106. Robert A. Neimeyer, Joachim Wittkowski, and

Richard P. Moser, “Psychological Research on Death

Attitudes: An Overview and Evaluation,” Death Studies 28 (2004): 309–339; quote p. 331.

107. Robert Kastenbaum, “Theory, Research, and

Application: Some Critical Issues for Thanatology,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 18, no. 4 (1987–1988): 397–410.

108. Herman Feifel, “Psychology and Death: Meaning-

ful Rediscovery,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 19–28.

109. Brian L. Burke, Andy Martens, and Erik H. Faucher,

“Two Decades of Terror Management Theory: a

Meta-Analysis of Mortality Salience Research,” Personality & Social Psychology Review 14, no. 2 (2010): 155–195. Study shows MS hypothesis of TMT provides moderate to large

effects.

110. Maxine Sheets-Johnstone, “Size, Power, Death:

Constituents in the Making of Human Morality,” Jour- nal of Consciousness Studies 9, no. 2 (2002): 49–67.

111. Lillian M. Range, “Historical and Contemporary

Perspectives on Traumatic Death,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, p. 293.

112. Tom Pyszczynski, Jeff Greenberg, and Sheldon

Solomon, “Proximal and Distal Defense: A New Per-

spective on Unconscious Motivation,” Current Directions in Psychological Science 9, no. 5 (2000): 156 –160.

113. Sheldon Solomon, Jeff Greenberg, and Tom

Pyszczynski, “Tales from the Crypt: On the Role of

Death in Life,” Zygon: Journal of Religion and Science 33, no. 1 (1998): 9–43; quote, p. 13. See also Sheldon Solo-

mon, Jeff Greenberg, and Tom Pyszczynski, “A Terror

Management Theory of Social Behavior: The Psycho-

logical Functions of Esteem and Cultural Worldview,”

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 605des35465_notes_601-670.indd 605 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

606 n o t e s

135. The fi rst of these was Encyclopedia of Death, ed. Robert Kastenbaum and Beatrice Kastenbaum (Phoe-

nix: Oryx Press, 1989); see also Encyclopedia of Death and Dying, ed. Glennys Howarth and Oliver Leaman (Lon- don and New York: Routledge, 2001); Macmillan Encyclo- pedia of Death and Dying, ed. Robert Kastenbaum (New York: Macmillan, 2003); Handbook of Death and Dying, ed. Clifton D. Bryant (Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage,

2003); Dana K. Cassell, Robert C. Salinas, and Peter A.

S. Winn, The Encyclopedia of Death and Dying (New York: Facts on File, 2005); and Encyclopedia of Death and the Human Experience, ed. Clifton D. Bryant and Dennis L. Peck (Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage, 2009).

136. See entry “United States,” by Lynne Ann

DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland, in Encyclopedia of Death and Dying, ed. Howarth and Leaman, pp. 460–463.

137. Luciana Mascarenhas Fonseca and Ines Testoni,

“The Emergence of Thanatology and Current Practice in

Death Education,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 64, no. 2 (2011–2012): 157–169; quote p. 163. Italics added.

138. Hannelore Wass, “Visions in Death Education,”

in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 327–334.

139. See, for example, James K. Crissman, Death and Dying in Central Appalachia: Changing Attitudes and Practices (Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1994); and James

J. Farrell, Inventing the American Way of Death, 1830–1920 (Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1980).

140. U.S. Census Bureau, “Expectation of Life at Birth,”

Historical Statistics of the United States, Colonial Times to 1970 (Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Offi ce), p. 55; and Arialdi M. Miniño, “Death in the United

States, 2011,” NCHS Data Brief, no. 115 (Hyattsville, Md.: National Center for Health Statistics, 2013), p. 1.

141. “Nation Digest,” The Washington Post, August 20, 2009.

142. Miniño, “Death in the United States, 2011,”

pp. 1–2.

143. Rachel Ehrenberg, “Modern Living Vastly

Extends Life,” Science News (November 17, 2012), p. 10.

144. Miniño, “Death in the United States, 2011,” p. 4.

145. “Deaths and Death Rates,” Historical Statistics of the United States, p. 59; and Miniño, “Death in the United States, 2011,” p. 1.

146. Vincent DiGirolamo, “Newsboy Funerals: Tales

of Sorrow and Solidarity in Urban America,” Journal of Social History 36, no. 1 (2002): 5–20; esp. p. 7.

147. Jennie Benford, “Victorian Mourning at the Frick,”

The Forum: Newsletter of the Association for Death Education and Counseling 22, no. 1 ( January–February 1996): 7–8.

124. Darrell Crase, “Death Education: Its Diversity

and Multidisciplinary Focus,” Death Studies 13, no. 1 (1989): 25–29.

125. Thomas Attig, “Person-Centered Death Educa-

tion,” Death Studies 16, no. 4 (1992): 357–370.

126. Gorer’s essay was originally published in the

journal Encounter in 1955; it was later reprinted in his 1965 book, Death, Grief, and Mourning in Contemporary Britain. For an account of the essay’s infl uence, see Ian Andrews, “Pornography of Death,” in Encyclopedia of Death and Dying, ed. Glennys Howarth and Oliver Leaman, 361–362 (New York: Routledge, 2001).

127. Lindsay Prior, The Social Organization of Death (London: Macmillan, 1989), esp. pp. 4–12. See also

Neil Small, “Theories of Grief: A Critical Review,” in

Grief, Mourning, and Death Ritual, ed. Jenny Hockey, Jeanne Katz, and Neil Small, 19–48 (Buckingham:

Open University Press, 2001); esp. pp. 21–24.

128. The symposium was titled “The Concept of

Death and Its Relation to Behavior.”

129. Herman Feifel, “Psychology and Death: Meaning-

ful Rediscovery,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 19–28.

130. Kenneth J. Doka, E. Neil Hefl in-Wells, Terry L.

Martin, Lula M. Redmon, and Sherry R. Schacter,

“The Organization of Thanatology,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 63, no. 2 (2011): 113–124; esp. p. 115.

131. Robert Kastenbaum, “Omega: Pre-History of a

Journal,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 48, no. 1 (2003): 69–84.

132. The Foundation of Thanatology, through its sym-

posia and publication, served an important role early in

the development of the fi eld. See also Darrell Crase and

Dan Leviton, “Forum for Death Education and Coun-

seling: Its History, Impact, and Future,” Death Studies 11, no. 5 (1987): 345–359; Kenneth J. Doka, et. al.,

“The Organization of Thanatology,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 63, no. 2 (2011): 113–124; John E. Fryer, “The Goose,” Illness, Crisis, and Loss ( January 2003): 65–69; and Judith M. Stillion, “Association for

Death Education and Counseling: An Organization

for Our Times and for Our Future,” Death Studies 13, no. 2 (1989): 191–201.

133. See Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strick-

land, “The Life of a Death Textbook and Its Authors,”

The Forum: Newsletter of the Association for Death Education and Counseling 30 (First Quarter, 2004): 8–9.

134. Sarah Brabant, DeAnn Kalich, and Brooke O.

Breaux, “The Psychology Today ‘You and Death’ Question- naire Revisited,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 58, no. 3 (2008–2009): 193–211; quote from pp. 210–211.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 606des35465_notes_601-670.indd 606 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 1 607

2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, p. 431. See also Mar-

garet S. Stroebe, Karolijne Van Der Houwen, and

Henk Schut, “Bereavement Support, Intervention, and

Research on the Internet: A Critical Review,” in

Handbook of Bereavement Research and Practice: Advances in Theory and Intervention, ed. Margaret S. Stroebe, Robert O. Hansson, Henk Schut, and Wolfgang

Stroebe (Washington, D.C.: American Psychological

Association, 2008), pp. 551–574.

162. Jocelyn M. DeGroot, “Maintaining Relational

Continuity with the Deceased on Facebook,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 65, no. 3 (2012): 195–212.

163. Robert A. Neimeyer, quoted in “Attachment at

a Distance: Grief Therapy in the Virtual World,” in

Dying, Death, and Grief in an Online Universe, 103–118; quote p. 115.

164. Leanne Italie, “Crisis Hotlines Turning to Text to

Reach Teens,” AP Online (March 29, 2013).

165. Raina M. Merchant, Stacy Elmer, and Nicole

Lurie, “Integrating Social Media into Emergency-

Preparedness Efforts,” New England Journal of Medicine 365, no. 4 ( July 28, 2011): 289–291.

166. Sofka, Cupit, and Gilbert, Dying, Death, and Grief in an Online Universe, p. 4.

167. Robert E. Kavanaugh, Facing Death (Los Angeles: Nash, 1972).

168. David E. Stannard, The Puritan Way of Death: A Study in Religion, Culture, and Social Change (New York: Oxford University Press, 1977).

169. Information from exhibit brochure and stories in

The Los Angeles Times by Diane Haithman, January 22, 2005, and Tonya Alanez, January 24, 2005.

170. Paul Duro and others, “Postmodernism,” in Key Ideas in Human Thought, ed. Kenneth McLeish, 584– 585 (New York: Facts on File, 1993). See also William

Simon, C. Allen Haney, and Russell Buenteo, “The

Postmodernization of Death and Dying,” Symbolic Inter- action 16, no. 4 (1993): 411–426.

171. Chris Schilling and Philip A. Mellor, The Sociologi- cal Imagination: Elementary Forms of Social and Moral Life (Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage, 2001), p. 195.

172. Schilling and Mellor, The Sociological Imagination, p. 191.

173. Stuart Sim, ed., The Routledge Companion to Post- modernism, 2nd ed. (New York: Routledge, 2005), p. vii.

174. Masa Higo, “Surviving Death Anxieties in Liq-

uid Modern Times: Examining Zygmunt Bauman’s

Cultural Theory of Death and Dying,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 65, no. 3 (2012): 221–238; esp. 228, 232.

148. U.S. Census Bureau, “Deaths and Death Rates

by Leading Causes of Death,” Statistical Abstract of the United States, 2009, 128th ed. (Washington, D.C.: Gov- ernment Printing Offi ce, 2008), p. 86. See also Donna

L. Hoyert, “75 Years of Mortality in the United States,

1935–2010,” NCHS Data Brief, no. 88 (March 2012).

149. John Allen Paulos, A Mathematician Reads the Newspaper (New York: Basic, 1995), p. 139.

150. S. Jay Olshansky and A. Brian Ault, “The Fourth

Stage of the Epidemiologic Transition: The Age of

Delayed Degenerative Diseases,” Milbank Quarterly 64, no. 3 (1986): 355–391.

151. “Annual Estimates of the Population by Age,” His- torical Statistics of the United States, p. 10; and U.S. Census Bureau, “Resident Population by Age,” Statistical Abstract of the United States: 2012, 131st ed. (Washington, D.C., 2011); http://www.census.gov/compendia/statab/ .

152. Charlotte A. Schoenborn and Kathleen M.

Heyman, “Health Characteristics of Adults Aged 55

Years and Over: United States: 2004–2007,” National Health Statistics Reports, no. 16 ( July 8, 2009): 1–32; esp. p. 1.

153. “Resident Population by Age: 1900 to 1997,”

Statistical Abstract of the United States: 1999, p. 869; and Donna L. Hoyert and Jiaquan Xu, “Deaths: Prelimi-

nary Data for 2011,” National Vital Statistics Reports 61, no. 6 (Hyattsville, Md.: National Center for Health

Statistics, 2012), p. 8.

154. Burden S. Lundgren and Clare A. Houseman,

“Banishing Death: The Disappearance of the Appre-

ciation of Mortality,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 61, no. 3 (2010): 223–249; esp. p. 241.

155. Lundgren and Houseman, “Banishing Death,”

pp. 241, 245.

156. Chris Shilling, The Body and Social Theory, 2nd ed. (Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage, 2003), p. 167.

157. Shilling, Body and Social Theory, p. 165.

158. Anne M. Smith and Corinne Cavuoti, “Thanatol-

ogy in the Digital Age,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, p. 429.

159. Tony Walter et al., “Does the Internet Change

How We Die and Mourn? Overview and Analysis,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 64, no. 4 (2011–2012): 275–302; quote p. 276.

160. Paraphrased from Carla J. Sofka, Illene Noppe

Cupit, and Kathleen R. Gilbert, eds., Dying, Death, and Grief in an Online Universe (New York: Springer, 2012), p. 262.

161. Anne M. Smith and Corinne Cavuoti, “Thanatol-

ogy in the Digital Age,” in Handbook of Thanatology,

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 607des35465_notes_601-670.indd 607 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

608 n o t e s

2. Mark W. Speece, “Very Young Children’s Experi-

ences with and Reactions to Death” (master’s thesis,

Wayne State University, 1983).

3. Mark W. Speece and Sandor B. Brent, “The Devel-

opment of Children’s Understanding of Death,”

in Handbook of Childhood Death and Bereavement, ed. Charles A. Corr and Donna M. Corr, 29–50 (New York:

Springer, 1996).

4. Brenda L. Kenyon, “Current Research in Children’s

Conceptions of Death: A Critical Review,” Omega: Jour- nal of Death and Dying 43, no. 1 (2001): 63–91; Mark W. Speece and Sandor B. Brent, “Children’s Understand-

ing of Death: A Review of Three Components of a

Death Concept,” Child Development 55, no. 5 (October 1984): 1671–1686; and Speece and Brent, “The Acqui-

sition of a Mature Understanding of Three Compo-

nents of the Concept of Death,” Death Studies 16, no. 3 (1992): 211–229.

5. See Sandor B. Brent and Mark W. Speece, “‘Adult’

Conceptualization of Irreversibility: Implications for

the Development of the Concept of Death,” Death Stud- ies 17, no. 3 (1993): 203–224.

6. Virginia Slaughter and Maya Griffi ths, “Death

Understanding and Fear of Death in Young Children,”

Clinical Child Psychology and Psychiatry 12, no. 4 (2007): 525–535; esp. p. 526.

7. Virginia Slaughter, “Young Children’s Understand-

ing of Death,” Australian Psychologist 40, no. 3 (2005): 179–186; and Virginia Slaughter and Michelle Lyons,

“Learning about Life and Death in Early Childhood,”

Cognitive Psychology 46, no. 1 (2003): 1–30. See also Susan Carey, Conceptual Change in Childhood (Cam- bridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1985); and, also by Carey,

“On the Origin of Causal Understanding,” in Causal Cognition: A Multidisciplinary Debate, ed. D. Sperber, D. Premack, and A. Premack (New York: Oxford

University Press, 1995).

8. Slaughter and Griffi ths, “Death Understanding and

Fear of Death in Young Children,” pp. 526 –527.

9. Slaughter and Griffi ths, “Death Understanding and

Fear of Death in Young Children,” p. 533.

10. Kenyon, “Current Research in Children’s Concep-

tions of Death,” p. 87.

11. Eric B. Shiraev and David A. Levy, Cross-Cultural Psychology: Critical Thinking and Contemporary Applica- tions, 5th ed. (Boston: Pearson, 2013), p. 19.

12. Kang Lee, “Scientifi c Reasoning: Introduction,” in

Childhood Cognitive Development: The Essential Readings, ed. Lee, 265–266 (Oxford: Blackwell, 2000).

13. Ross D. Parke, Peter A. Ornstein, John J. Rieser,

and Carolyn Zahn-Waxler, “The Past as Prologue: An

175. Ulrich Beck, “The Cosmopolitan Society and Its

Enemies,” Theory, Culture & Society 19, nos. 1–2 (2002): 17–44; quote from p. 17.

176. Anthony Giddens, Runaway World: How Global- ization Is Reshaping Our Lives (New York: Routledge, 2000), p. 23.

177. Daniel Levy and Natan Sznaider, “Memory

Unbound: The Holocaust and the Formation of

Cosmopolitan Memory,” European Journal of Social Theory 51, no. 1 (2002): 87–106.

178. Marina Sozzi, “The Myth of Natural Death”

(paper presented at the meeting of the International

Association of Thanatology and Suicidology, Bologna,

Italy, June 2005).

179. Robert Kastenbaum, “Should We Manage

Terror,” p. 295.

180. Daniel Callahan, “Frustrated Mastery: The

Cultural Context of Death in America—Caring for

Patients at the End of Life,” Western Journal of Medicine 163, no. 3 (1995): 226 –230.

181. “What is Death Café”? http://www.deathcafe

.com/p/what-is-death-cafe.html .

182. Glennys Howarth, Death and Dying: A Sociological Introduction (Malden, Mass.: Polity, 2006), p. 1.

183. Andrew S. Ziner, Department of Sociology, Uni-

versity of North Dakota, personal communication,

May 1994.

184. See Nancy J. Moules, “Postmodernism and the

Sacred: Reclaiming Connection in Our Greater-than-

Human Worlds,” Journal of Marital and Family Therapy 26, no. 2 (2000): 229–240.

185. “The Bright Side of Death: Awareness of

Mortality Can Result in Positive Behaviors,”

http://www.sciencedaily.com/releases/2012/04/

120430164359.htm .

186. Yoshida Kenkō, quoted by Donald Keene, “Kenkō:

Essays in Idleness ( Tsurezureguswa),” in Approaches to the Asian Classics, edited by Wm. Theodore de Bary and Irene Bloom (New York: Columbia University Press,

1990), p. 314.

C H A P T E R 2

1. Sandor B. Brent, “Puns, Metaphors, and Misunder-

standings in a Two-Year-Old’s Conception of Death,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 8, no. 4 (1977–1978): 285–293. The son, now an adult, has no recollection of

this experience. Dr. Brent, a psychologist, believes that

this indicates a successfully managed event. (Personal

communication.)

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 608des35465_notes_601-670.indd 608 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 2 609

29. Robert Kastenbaum, On Our Way: The Final Passage Through Life and Death (Berkeley: University of Califor- nia Press, 2004), p. 367.

30. Slaughter and Griffi ths, “Death Understanding

and Fear of Death in Young Children,” p. 526.

31. Gerald P. Koocher, “Childhood, Death, and

Cognitive Development,” Developmental Psychology 9, no. 3 (1973): 369–375; “Talking with Children About

Death,” American Journal of Orthopsychiatry 44, no. 3 (April 1974): 404–411; and “Conversations with Chil-

dren About Death,” Journal of Clinical Child Psychology (Summer 1974): 19–21.

32. Helen L. Swain, “Childhood Views of Death,”

Death Education 2, no. 4 (1979): 341–358.

33. Quoted in Claudia Kalb and Aku Ammah-Tagoe,

“Generation 9/11: Children Who Watched the Tragedy

Unfold Are Now On the Brink of Adulthood,” News- week, September 8, 2009.

34. See Mary Alice Varga and Robin Paletti, “Life

Span Issues and Dying,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk,

25–31 (New York: Routledge, 2013), p. 28; and David

E. Balk, “Adolescent Development: The Backstory to

Adolescent Encounters with Death and Bereavement,”

in Adolescent Encounters with Death, Bereavement, and Cop- ing, ed. David E. Balk and Charles A. Corr, 3–20 (New York: Springer, 2009), esp. pp. 4–5.

35. Ken Doka, Counseling Individuals with Life-Threaten- ing Illness (New York: Springer, 2009), p. 118.

36. Jay, Defi ning Decade, pp. 107–108.

37. Mary Dixon-Woods, Bridget Young, and David

Heney, Rethinking Experiences of Childhood Cancer: A Multidisciplinary Approach to Chronic Childhood Illness (Berksnire: Open University Press, 2005), p. 17.

38. Lynn Schofi eld Clark, From Angels to Aliens: Teenagers, the Media, and the Supernatural (New York: Oxford University Press, 2003), p. 11.

39. Jay, Defi ning Decade, p. 1407.

40. Mary Alice Varga and Robin Paletti, “Life Span

Issues and Dying,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk, 25–31 (New

York: Routledge, 2013); quote p. 28.

41. Miller, Theories of Developmental Psychology, p. 155.

42. Illene Cupit Noppe and Lloyd D. Noppe, “Adoles-

cent Experiences with Death: Letting Go of Immortal-

ity,” Journal of Mental Health Counseling 26, no. 2 (2004): 146 –167; quote p. 154.

43. Lloyd D. Noppe and Illene C. Noppe, “Dialectical

Themes in Adolescent Conceptions of Death,” Journal of Adolescent Research 6, no. 1 (1991): 28–42.

Overview of a Century of Developmental Psychology,”

in A Century of Developmental Psychology, ed. Parke et al. (Washington, D.C.: American Psychological Associa-

tion, 1994), p. 12.

14. Paul Schilder and David Wechsler, “The Attitudes

of Children Toward Death,” Journal of Genetic Psychology 45 (1934): 406 –451.

15. Sylvia Anthony, The Discovery of Death in Childhood and After (New York: Basic Books, 1972), revised edi- tion of The Child’s Discovery of Death: A Study in Child Psychology (London: Kegan Paul, 1940).

16. Maria H. Nagy, “The Child’s Theories Concerning

Death,” Journal of Genetic Psychology 73 (1948): 3–27.

17. Slaughter, “Young Children’s Understanding of

Death.”

18. Susan A. Gelman and John E. Opfer, “Develop-

ment of the Animate-Inanimate Distinction,” in Black- well Handbook of Childhood Cognitive Development, ed. Usha Goswami, 151–166 (Oxford: Blackwell, 2004).

19. Jesse M. Bering, Carlos Hernández Blasi, and

David F. Bjorklund, “The Development of ‘Afterlife’

Beliefs in Religiously and Secularly Schooled Chil-

dren,” British Journal of Developmental Psychology 23 (2005): 587–607; quote p. 589.

20. Jesse M. Bering and David F. Bjorklund, “The

Natural Emergence of Reasoning about the Afterlife

as a Development Regularity,” Developmental Psychology 40, no. 2 (2004): 217–233.

21. Erik Erikson, Childhood and Society (New York: Norton, 1950).

22. Jean Piaget, The Child and Reality: Problems of Genetic Psychology, trans. Arnold Rosin (New York: Grossman, 1973), and The Child’s Conception of the World (London: Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1929).

23. Robert Zucker, The Journey Through Grief and Loss: Helping Yourself and Your Child When Grief Is Shared (New York: St. Martin’s, 2009), p. 37.

24. Bruce Bower, “Toddler Worldview Shifts at Age 2,”

Science News (August 16, 2008), p. 12.

25. Patricia Miller, Theories of Developmental Psychology, 4th ed. (New York: Worth, 2002), p. 42.

26. Meg Jay, The Defi ning Decade: Why Your Twenties Matter—And How to Make the Most of Them Now (New York: Twelve, 2012), p. 139.

27. From a conversation with Jean Piaget in Richard I.

Evans, The Making of Psychology: Discussions with Creative Contributors (New York: Knopf, 1976), p. 46.

28. Miller, Theories of Developmental Psychology, p. 153.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 609des35465_notes_601-670.indd 609 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

610 n o t e s

59. Richard A. Settersten, Jr., “Socialization and the

Life Course: New Frontiers in Theory and Research,”

in New Frontiers in Socialization, ed. Richard A. Setter- sten, Jr., and Timothy J. Owens, 13–40 (Amsterdam:

JAI, 2002), p. 15.

60. Settersten, “Socialization and the Life Course,” p. 20.

61. Walter R. Heinz, “Self-Socialization and Post-

Traditional Society,” in New Frontiers in Socialization, ed. Settersten and Owens, 41–64; p. 44.

62. Hannelore Wass, “Death Education for Children,”

in Dying, Death, and Bereavement: A Challenge for Living , 2nd ed., ed. Inge Corless, Barbara B. Germino, and

Mary A. Pittman, 25–41 (New York: Springer, 2003);

quote p. 27.

63. Norman Goodman, Introduction to Sociology (New York: HarperCollins, 1992), pp. 84–85.

64. Settersten, “Socialization and the Life Course,”

p. 34.

65. Mark A. Mesler, “Negotiating Life for the Dying:

Hospice and the Strategy of Tactical Socialization,”

Death Studies 19, no. 3 (1995): 235–255.

66. Kathleen R. Gilbert and Colleen I. Murray, “The

Family, Larger Systems, and Death Education,” in

Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk, 367–377 (New York:

Routledge, 2013), p. 367.

67. Settersten, “Socialization and the Life Course,” p. 30.

68. Iona Opie and Peter Opie, The Lore and Language of Schoolchildren (Oxford: Clarendon, 1959), p. 1.

69. Iona Opie and Peter Opie, Children’s Games in Street and Playground (Oxford: Clarendon, 1969), pp. 62, 75.

70. Meredith Cox, Erin Garrett, and James A. Gra-

ham, “Death in Disney Films: Implications for Chil-

dren’s Understanding of Death,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 50, no. 4 (2004–2005): 267–280.

71. Martha Wolfenstein and Gilbert Kliman, eds., Chil- dren and the Death of a President: Multi-Disciplinary Studies (Garden City, N.Y.: Anchor Press/Doubleday, 1965),

esp. pp. 217–239.

72. See Maria Tatar, ed., The Annotated Classic Fairy Tales (New York: Norton, 2002).

73. Terri Windling, “On Tolkien and Fairy-Tales,” in

Meditations on Middle-Earth, ed. Karen Haber (New York: St. Martin’s, 2001), pp. 215–229; quote p. 227.

74. Elizabeth P. Lamers, “Children, Death, and Fairy

Tales,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 31, no. 2 (1995): 151–167. See also Joan Acocella, “Once Upon a

Time: The Lure of the Fairy Tale,” The New Yorker ( July 23, 2012): 73–78.

44. Richard A. Settersten, Jr., and Barbara Ray,

“What’s Going On With Young People Today? The

Long and Twisting Path to Adulthood,” Future of Children 20, no. 1 (2010): 19–36; quote p. 36.

45. Jeffrey Jensen Arnett, “Emerging Adulthood: A

Theory of Development from the Late Teens Through

the Twenties,” American Psychologist 55, no. 5 (2000): 469–480; quote p. 475. See also Jeffrey Jensen Arnett

et al., Debating Emerging Adulthood: Stage or Process? (New York: Oxford University Press, 2011).

46. Yoko Yamada, “Models of Life-Span Development

Psychology: A Construction of the Generative Life

Model Including the Concept of Death,” Kyoto University Research Studies in Education 47 (2002): 39–62; esp. p. 46.

47. Kenneth J. Doka, Counseling Individuals with Life- Threatening Illness (New York: Springer, 2009), p. 120.

48. Charles W. Brice, “Mourning Throughout the

Life Cycle,” American Journal of Psychoanalysis 42, no. 4 (1982): 320–321.

49. Patricia H. Miller, Theories of Developmental Psychol- ogy, 4th ed. (New York: Worth, 2002), p. 156.

50. Doka, Counseling Individuals with Life-Threatening Illness, p. 120.

51. Michele A. Paludi, ed., Human Development in Mul- ticultural Contexts (Upper Saddle River, N.J.: Prentice- Hall, 2002), p. 190.

52. Miller, Theories of Developmental Psychology, p. 156.

53. Doka, Counseling Individuals with Life-Threatening Illness, p. 121.

54. Miller, Theories of Developmental Psychology, p. 156.

55. M. Brewster Smith, “The Case of Brew,” Journal of Personality 73, no. 5 (2005): 1111–1140; quote p. 1136.

56. Erik H. Erikson, The Life Cycle Completed: A Review (New York: Norton, 1982), p. 67. See also Paul B. Baltes

and Ursula M. Staudinger, “Wisdom: A Metaheuristic

(Pragmatic) to Orchestrate Mind and Virtue Toward

Excellence,” American Psychologist 55, no. 1 (2000): 122–136; and Christina RŌcke and Katie E. Cherry,

“Death at the End of the 20th Century: Individual

Processes and Developmental Tasks in Old Age,” Inter- national Journal of Aging and Human Development 54, no. 4 (2002): 315–333.

57. Hilary N. Weaver, Explorations in Cultural Compe- tence: Journeys to the Four Directions (Belmont, Calif.: Brooks/Cole, 2005), p. 25.

58. Frederick Erickson, “Culture and Human Develop-

ment,” Human Development 45 (2002): 299–306; quote p. 303.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 610des35465_notes_601-670.indd 610 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 2 611

88. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Nathalie Prettyman,

A Guidebook for Teaching Family Living (Boston: Allyn & Bacon, 1980), pp. 130–134.

89. See Mary Anne Sedney, “Children’s Grief

Narratives in Popular Films,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 39, no. 4 (1999): 315–324.

90. Ute Carson, “A Child Loses a Pet,” Death Education 3 (1980): 399–404.

91. Kenneth R. Kaufman and Nathaniel D. Kaufman,

“And Then the Dog Died,” Death Studies 30 (2006): 61–76; quote p. 63.

92. Kelly A. McCutcheon and Stephen J. Fleming,

“Grief Resulting from Euthanasia and Natural Death

of Companion Animals,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 44, no. 2 (2001–2002): 169–188.

93. Cheri Barton Ross and Jane Baron-Sorensen, Pet Loss and Human Emotion: A Guide to Recovery, 2nd ed. (New York: Routledge, 2007), p. 6.

94. Ross and Baron-Sorensen, Pet Loss and Human Emotion, 2nd ed., p. 122.

95. Barbara Ambros, “Vengeful Spirits or Loving Spir-

itual Companions? Changing Views of Animal Spirits

in Contemporary Japan,” Asian Ethnology 69, no. 1 (2010): 35–67; quotes pp. 36, 60.

96. Michelle Linn-Gust, “From the Backyard to the

Pet Bed: The Changing Role of Animals in Society,”

The Forum 33, no. 11 (April 2007): 1, 3–4.

97. Jane Brody, “When Your Pet Dies,” Honolulu Star- Bulletin & Advertiser, December 8, 1985.

98. See Morris A. Wessel, “Loss of a Pet,” in A Chal- lenge for Living: Dying, Death, and Bereavement, 2nd ed., ed. Inge B. Corless, Barbara B. Germino, and Mary A.

Pittman (New York: Springer, 2003), pp. 303, 305.

99. See Lynn A. Planchon and others, “Death of a

Companion Cat or Dog and Human Bereavement: Psy-

chosocial Variables,” Society & Animals 10, no. 1 (2002): 93–105.

100. Cheri Barton Ross, Pet Loss and Children: Establish- ing a Healthy Foundation (New York: Routledge, 2005), p. 40.

101. Stanley Coren, The Modern Dog: A Joyful Explana- tion of How We Live With Dogs Today (New York: Free Press, 2008), p. 164.

102. Ross and Baron-Sorensen, Pet Loss and Human Emotion, pp. 174–175.

103. Allan Kellehear and Jan Fook, “Lassie Come

Home: A Study of ‘Lost Pet’ Notices,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 34, no. 3 (1996 –1997): 191–202; quote p. 192.

75. Carolyn Marvin, “On Violence in Media,” Journal of Communication 50, no. 1 (2000): 142–149.

76. Sheila Hébert-Collins, Petite Rouge: A Cajun Twist to an Old Tale (Gretna, La.: Pelican, 1997); Niki Daly, Pretty Salma: A Little Red Riding Story from Africa (New York: Clarion, 2007).

77. See Eve Morel, ed., Fairy Tales and Fables (New York: Grosset & Dunlap, 1970), pp. 11–13; and Cath-

erine Orenstein, Little Red Riding Hood Uncloaked: Sex, Morality, and the Evolution of a Fairy Tale (New York: Basic Books, 2002).

78. Ed Young, trans., Lon Po Po: A Red-Riding Hood Story from China (New York: Philomel Books, 1989).

79. Kalle Achte and others, “Themes of Death and

Violence in Lullabies of Different Countries,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 20, no. 3 (1989–1990): 193–204.

80. Sandra L. Bertman, “Death Education in the Face

of a Taboo,” in Concerning Death: A Practical Guide for the Living, ed. Earl A. Grollman (Boston: Beacon Press, 1974), p. 334.

81. Reported by Richard Lonetto, Children’s Concep- tions of Death (New York: Springer, 1980), p. 9.

82. Davina A. Allen and others, “Religion,” in Key Ideas in Human Thought, ed. Kenneth McLeish (New York: Facts on File, 1993), pp. 626 –627.

83. Robert A. Emmons, “Religion in the Psychology

of Personality: An Introduction,” Journal of Personality 67, no. 6 (1999): 873–888. See also Alfred Kracher,

“The Study of Religion: Conversation Point for Theol-

ogy and Science,” Zygon: Journal of Religion and Science 35, no. 4 (2000): 827–848. See also Kenneth J. Doka,

“Religion, Spirituality, and Assessment and Interven-

tion,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk, 209–217 (New York:

Routledge, 2013).

84. Justin L. Barrett, “Exploring the Natural Founda-

tions of Religion,” Trends in Cognitive Sciences 4, no. 1 (2000): 29–34.

85. Clark, From Angels to Aliens, p. 9.

86. Michael E. McCullough and others, “Religious

Involvement and Mortality: A Meta-Analytic Review,”

Health Psychology 19, no. 3 (2000): 211–222.

87. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland,

“Using Life Experiences as a Way of Helping Children

Understand Death,” in Beyond the Innocence of Childhood: Factors Infl uencing Children and Adolescents’ Perceptions and Attitudes Toward Death, ed. David W. Adams and Eleanor J. Deveau, 45–54 (Amityville, N.Y.: Baywood,

1995).

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 611des35465_notes_601-670.indd 611 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

612 n o t e s

2. Jeffrey Jensen Arnett, “The Psychology of Global-

ization,” American Psychologist 57, no. 10 (2002): 774 –783. See also Mary Buchholtz, “Youth and

Cultural Practice,” Annual Review of Anthropology 31 (2002): 525–552.

3. Gordon Marshall, ed., The Concise Oxford Diction- ary of Sociology (New York: Oxford University Press, 1994), p. 104. See also Don Brenneis, “Some Cases for

Culture,” Human Development 45, no. 4 (2002): 264– 269; and Frederick Erickson, “Culture and Human

Development,” Human Development 45, no. 4 (2002): 299–306.

4. Norman Goodman, Introduction to Sociology (New York: HarperCollins, 1992), p. 42.

5. Davina A. Allen, “Structure,” in Key Ideas in Human Thought, ed. Kenneth McLeish, 508–509 (New York: Facts on File, 1993), p. 716.

6. Nancy Scheper-Hughes, “Death Without Weeping:

The Violence of Everyday Life in Brazil,” in The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and Dying, ed. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland (Mountain View,

Calif.: Mayfi eld, 1995), pp. 41–58.

7. Kathy Charmaz, “Conceptual Approaches to the

Study of Death,” Death and Identity, 3rd ed., ed. Robert Fulton and Robert Bendiksen (Philadelphia: Charles

Press, 1993), pp. 44–45.

8. Robert Blauner, “Death and Social Structure,” in

Death and Identity, rev. ed., ed. Robert Fulton (Bowie, Md.: Charles Press, 1976), pp. 35–59.

9. Robert Bendiksen, “The Sociology of Death,” in

Death and Identity, rev. ed., ed. Fulton, pp. 59–81.

10. Joseph M. Kaufert and John D. O’Neil, “Cultural

Mediation of Dying and Grieving Among Native Cana-

dian Patients in Urban Hospitals,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 59–74.

11. See Ernest Becker, The Denial of Death (New York: Free Press, 1973).

12. Paul Koudounaris, The Empire of Death: A Cul- tural History of Ossuaries and Charnel Houses (London: Thames & Hudson, 2011), p. 11.

13. Dana K. Cassell, Robert C. Salinas, and Peter A. S.

Winn, The Encyclopedia of Death and Dying (New York: Facts on File, 2005), p. xv.

14. See, for example, Ben Harder, “Evolving in Their

Graves: Early Burials Hold Clues to Human Origins,”

Science News 160 (December 15, 2001): 380–381. On the origin of “religious feeling” in funeral practices,

see Ina Wunn, “Beginning of Religion,” Numen: International Review for the History of Religions 47, no. 4 (2000): 417–452.

104. See www.aspca.org for further information.

105. See Lynn A. Planchon, Donald I. Templer, Shel-

ley Stokes, and Jacqueline Keller, “Death of a Compan-

ion Cat or Dog and Human Bereavement: Psychosocial

Variables,” Society & Animals 10, no. 1 (2002): 93–105.

106. Ross, Pet Loss and Children, p. 98.

107. McCutcheon and Fleming, “Grief Resulting

from Euthanasia and Natural Death of Companion

Animals.”

108. Avery D. Weisman, “Bereavement and Compan-

ion Animals,” in The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and Dying, ed. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland, 276 –280 (Mountain View, Calif.: Mayfi eld,

1995); quote p. 280.

109. Sandor B. Brent and Mark W. Speece, “‘Adult’

Conceptualization of Irreversibility: Implications for

the Development of the Concept of Death,” Death Stud- ies 17, no. 3 (1993): 203–224.

110. Sandor B. Brent and others, “The Development

of the Concept of Death Among Chinese and U.S.

Children 3–17 Years of Age: From Binary to ‘Fuzzy’

Concepts?” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 33, no. 1 (1996): 67–83. See also Shu Ching Yang and Shih-Fen

Chen, “A Phenomenographic Approach to the Mean-

ing of Death: A Chinese Perspective,” Death Studies 26, no. 2 (2002): 143–175.

111. David W. Plath, “Resistance at Forty-Eight:

Old-Age Brinksmanship and Japanese Life Course

Pathways,” in Aging and Life Course Transitions: An Interdisciplinary Perspective, ed. Tamara K. Hareven and Kathleen J. Adams, 109–125 (New York: Guilford

Press, 1982).

112. Thomas S. Weisner, “Ecocultural Understanding

of Children’s Developmental Pathways,” Human Devel- opment 45, no. 4 (2002): 275–281; quote p. 276.

113. Martin Sokefeld, “Debating Self, Identity, and

Culture in Anthropology,” Current Anthropology 40, no. 4 (1999): 417–447.

114. Linda M. Hunt, “Beyond Cultural Competence:

Applying Humility to Clinical Settings,” The Park Ridge Center Bulletin (November–December 2001): 3–4.

115. Albert Bandura, “Exploration of Fortuitous

Determinants of Life Paths,” Psychological Inquiry 9, no. 2 (1998): 95–115; quote p. 97.

C H A P T E R 3

1. Pittu Laungani, “Death and Bereavement in India

and England: A Comparative Analysis,” Mortality 1, no. 2 (1996): 191–212.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 612des35465_notes_601-670.indd 612 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 3 613

of Palliative Care 4, no. 3 (1988): 16 –20; and Frederick S. Paxton, Christianizing Death: The Creation of a Ritual Process in Early Medieval Europe (New York: Cornell University Press, 1990). Except where otherwise noted,

quoted material is from Ariès.

26. C. John Sommerville, “Stark’s Age of Faith Argu-

ment and the Secularization of Things: A Commen-

tary,” Sociology of Religion 63, no. 3 (2002): 361–372; esp. p. 362.

27. See Elisabeth Darby and Nicola Smith, The Cult of the Prince Consort (New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1983); Patricia Jalland, Death in the Victorian Family (New York: Oxford University Press, 1996); and John Morley, Death, Heaven, and the Victorians (Pittsburgh: University of Pittsburgh Press, 1971).

28. Oscar Lenius, A Well-Dressed Gentleman’s Pocket Guide (London: Prion, 1998), p. 209.

29. See, for example, Philip A. Mellor and Chris Schil-

ling, “Modernity, Self-Identity, and the Sequestration

of Death,” Sociology 27, no. 3 (August 1993): 411–431; and Charles O. Jackson, “Death Shall Have No Domin-

ion: The Passing of the World of the Dead in Amer-

ica,” in Death and Dying: Views from Many Cultures, ed. Richard A. Kalish, 47–55 (New York: Baywood, 1980).

30. See Peter Brown, The Cult of the Saints: Its Rise and Function in Latin Christianity (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1981); and Geary, Living with the Dead in the Middle Ages.

31. Koudounaris, The Empire of Death, p. 16.

32. Rob Kay, Santa Cruz Sentinel, March 20, 1983. See also “Empire of the Dead,” Smithsonian (April 2000).

33. A. A. Gill, “Where the Dead Don’t Sleep,” National Geographic 215, no. 2 (February 2009): 118–133; quote p. 122.

34. Richard A. Etlin, The Architecture of Death: The Transformation of the Cemetery in Eighteenth-Century Paris (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1984).

35. Kenneth T. Jackson and Camilo José Vergara,

Silent Cities: The Evolution of the American Cemetery (New York: Princeton Architectural Press, 1989), pp. 22–23.

36. See David E. Stannard, The Puritan Way of Death: A Study in Religion, Culture, and Social Change (New York: Oxford University Press, 1977) and “Calm Dwellings:

The Brief, Sentimental Age of the Rural Cemetery,”

American Heritage 30, no. 5 (August–September 1979): 42–55, and, edited by Stannard, Death in America (Phil- adelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1975); also

Michael Vovelle, “A Century and One-Half of Ameri-

can Epitaphs: Toward the Study of Collective Attitudes

About Death,” Comparative Studies in Society and History 22, no. 4 (October 1980): 534–547.

15. The use of blood-red oxide to decorate corpses is

possibly the earliest widespread funeral custom. Red

ochre was mined in Africa by the earliest Homo sapiens sapiens; it appeared in Europe in Neanderthal funeral practices and was used in burials throughout Europe,

Africa, Asia, Australia, and the Americas. If we imag-

ine the earth as a living organism, hematite is analo-

gous to the blood of Mother Earth.

16. Mike Parker Pearson, The Archaeology of Death and Burial (College Station: Texas A&M University Press, 2000), p. 3.

17. Giambattista Vico, The First New Science, ed. and trans. Leon Pompa (Cambridge: Cambridge University

Press, 2002), p. 263.

18. J. Peter Brosius, “Father Dead, Mother Dead:

Bereavement and Fictive Death in Penan Geng Soci-

ety,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 32, no. 3 (1995–1996): 197–226.

19. E. S. Craighill Handy and Mary Kawena Pukui, The Polynesian Family System in Ka-’u, Hawai’i (Rutland, Vt.: Charles E. Tuttle, 1972), pp. 98–101.

20. Anita J. Glaze, Art and Death in a Senufo Village (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1981),

pp. 150–151.

21. Ninian Smart, The Long Search (Boston: Little, Brown, 1977), p. 231.

22. Carol Warren, “Disrupted Death Ceremonies:

Popular Culture and the Ethnography of Bali,” Oceania 64, no. 1 (September 1993): 36 –56.

23. See Neville Drury, The Elements of Shamanism (Dorset, U.K.: Element Books, 1989); David Riches, “Shamanism:

The Key to Religion,” The Journal of the Royal Anthropologi- cal Institute 29, no. 2 (1994): 381–405; and Lyle B. Stead- man and Craig T. Palmer, “Visiting Dead Ancestors:

Shamans as Interpreters of Religious Traditions,” Zygon: Journal of Religion and Science 29, no. 2 (1994): 173–189.

24. Kenneth McLeish, “Necromancy,” in Key Ideas in Human Thought, ed. McLeish, 508–509 (New York: Facts on File, 1993).

25. Important studies include Philippe Ariès, Western Attitudes Toward Death: From the Middle Ages to the Present (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1974) and

The Hour of Our Death (New York: Knopf, 1981); Paul Binsky, Medieval Death: Ritual and Representation (Lon- don: British Museum Press, 1996); T. S. R. Boase, Death in the Middle Ages: Mortality, Judgment and Remembrance (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1972); Jacques Choron, Death and Western Thought (New York: Macmillan, 1963); Patrick J. Geary, Living with the Dead in the Middle Ages (Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1994); Ian Gen-

tles, “Funeral Customs in Historical Context,” Journal

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 613des35465_notes_601-670.indd 613 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

614 n o t e s

49. Theda Perdue and Michael D. Green, North Ameri- can Indians: A Very Short Introduction (New York: Oxford University Press, 2010), pp. 16 –17.

50. http://historicaltrauma.com/ .

51. Andrea C. Walker, “Building Bridges in American

Indian Bereavement Research,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 59, no. 4 (2009): 351–367; esp. p. 355.

52. Quoted in Vine Deloria, Jr., God Is Red (New York: Dell, 1973), pp. 176 –177. See also Frank Waters, “Two

Views of Nature: White and Indian,” The South Dakota Review, May 1964, pp. 28–29.

53. Clara Sue Kidwell and Alan Velie, Native American Studies (Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 2005), pp. 11, 21.

54. Chief Joseph, “White Takeover of Indian Land: An

Indian’s View,” in Christopher Columbus and His Legacy: Opposing Viewpoints, ed. Mary Ellen Jones, 123–132 (San Diego: Greenhaven, 1992), esp. p. 129.

55. Robson Bonnichsen and Alan L. Schneider, “Bat-

tle of the Bones,” The Sciences 40, no. 4 (2000): 40–46. See also “Human Remains: Contemporary Issues,” in

Death Studies 14, no. 6 (1990), ed. Glen W. Davidson and Larry W. Zimmerman.

56. Louise B. Halfe, “The Circle: Death and Dying

from a Native Perspective,” Journal of Palliative Care 5, no. 1 (1989): 37–41. See also Paul Radin, The Road of Life and Death: A Ritual Drama of the American Indians (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1973).

57. Stephen Levine, A Year to Live: How to Live This Year as If It Were Your Last (New York: Bell Tower, 1997), p. 154.

58. Richard J. Preston and Sarah C. Preston, “Death

and Grieving Among Northern Forest Hunters: An

East Cree Example,” in Coping with the Final Tragedy: Cultural Variation in Dying and Grieving, ed. David R. Counts and Dorothy A. Counts, 135–155 (Amityville,

N.Y.: Baywood, 1991).

59. Jamake Highwater, The Primal Mind: Vision and Reality in Indian America (New York: Harper & Row, 1981), p. 165.

60. Åke Hultkrantz, Native Religions of North America: The Power of Visions and Fertility (New York: Harper & Row, 1987). See also, by Hultkrantz, The Religions of the American Indians (Berkeley: University of Califor- nia Press, 1979), The Study of American Indian Religions (New York: Crossroad, 1983), and Shamanic Healing and Ritual Drama: Health and Medicine in Native North Ameri- can Religious Tradition (New York: Crossroad, 1992).

61. Malcolm Margolin, The Ohlone Way: Indian Life in the San Francisco Monterey Bay Area (Berkeley, Calif.: Heyday Books, 1978), pp. 145–149.

37. Ray S. Anderson, Theology, Death and Dying (New York: Basil Blackwood, 1986), pp. 105–107.

38. James Stevens Curl, A Celebration of Death: An Intro- duction to Some of the Buildings, Monuments, and Settings of Funerary Architecture in the Western European Tradition (New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1980), p. 367.

39. See, for example, John Cohen, “Death and the

Danse Macabre,” History Today (August 1982): 35–40; and Fritz Eichenberg, Dance of Death: A Graphic Com- mentary on the Danse Macabre Through the Centuries (New York: Abbeville, 1983).

40. See, for example, Norman F. Cantor, In the Wake of the Plague: The Black Death and the World It Made (New York: Free Press, 2001); and Colin Platt, King Death: The Black Death and Its Aftermath in Late-Medieval England (London: University College of London Press, 1996).

41. David Herlihy, The Black Death and the Transforma- tion of the West (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1997), pp. 63, 64.

42. Johan P. Mackenbach, “Dead Body with Mourners:

Medical Refl ections on the Emtombment of Christ,”

British Medical Journal 327 ( July 26, 2003): 215–217; quote p. 217.

43. Frank Gonzalez-Crussi, “Anatomy and Old Lace:

An Eighteenth-Century Attitude Toward Death,” The Sciences ( January–February 1988): 48–49.

44. Discussion based on Albert Lee Strickland, “Death

Masks,” in The A–Z of Death & Dying: Social, Medical, and Cultural Aspects, ed. Michael John Brennan (Santa Barbara, Calif.: ABC-Clio/Greenwood, 2014). See

also Ernst Benkard, Undying Faces: A Collection of Death Masks, trans. Margaret M. Green (New York: Norton, 1929).

45. The ensuing discussion of various cultural view-

points benefi ts from the following important studies:

Miguel A. Pérez and Raffy R. Luquis, eds., Cultural Competence in Health Education and Health Promotion (San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 2008); Larry D. Pur-

nell, Transcultural Health Care: A Culturally Competent Approach, 4th ed. (Philadelphia: F. A. Davis, 2013); and Hilary N. Weaver, Explorations in Cultural Competence: Journeys to the Four Directions (Belmont, Calif.: Brooks/ Cole, 2005).

46. Charles Wilkinson, Blood Struggle: The Rise of Mod- ern Indian Nations (New York: Norton, 2005), p. 353.

47. Cassell, Salinas, and Winn, The Encyclopedia of Death and Dying, p. xxii.

48. See Donald Bahr, “Bad News: The Predicament

of Native American Mythology,” Ethnohistory 48, no. 4 (2001): 587–612; and Carl Waldman, Atlas of the North American Indian (New York: Facts on File, 1985).

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 614des35465_notes_601-670.indd 614 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 3 615

Extravagant Funerals Among the Yorubas of Western

Nigeria,” Death Studies 25, no. 7 (2001): 609–619; and A. Odasuo Alali, “Management of Death and Grief in Obit-

uary and in Memoriam Pages of Nigerian Newspapers,”

Psychological Reports 73 (1993): 835–842.

76. Ronald Keith Barrett, “Contemporary African-

American Funeral Rites and Traditions,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 80–82; “Psy- chocultural Infl uences on African-American Attitudes

Toward Death, Dying, and Funeral Rites,” in Personal Care in an Impersonal World: A Multidimensional Look at Bereavement, ed. John D. Morgan (Amityville, N.Y.: Bay- wood, 1995), pp. 213–230.

77. Jennifer Hildebrand, “Funerals,” in Greenwood Encyclopedia of African American Folklore, ed. Anand Prahlad (Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 2005), p. 482.

78. Ronald K. Barrett, personal communication.

79. LaVone V. Hazell, “Cross-Cultural Funeral Rites,”

The Forum: Newsletter of the Association for Death Education and Counseling 24, no. 3 (1998): 1, 10–11; quote p. 10.

80. Kimberly S. Johnson, Katja I. Elbert-Avila, and

James A. Tulsky, “The Infl uence of Spiritual Beliefs

and Practices on the Treatment Preferences of African

Americans: A Review of the Literature,” Journal of the American Geriatrics Society 53 (2005): 711–719.

81. Weaver, Explorations in Cultural Competence, p. 112.

82. David R. Roediger, “And Die in Dixie: Funerals,

Death & Heaven in the Slave Community, 1700–1865,”

The Massachusetts Review 22, no. 1 (Spring 1981): 163–183.

83. Pérez and Luquis, Cultural Competence in Health Education and Health Promotion, p. 13.

84. Ronald K. Barrett, “Death and Dying in the Black

Experience: An Interview with Ronald K. Barrett,”

Innovations in End-of-Life Care 3, no. 5 (2001); www.edu .org.;lastacts .

85. Weaver, Explorations in Cultural Competence, p. 145.

86. Margo Simon Coler and Maria Adriana Felix

Coler, “People of Brazilian Heritage,” http://

resources.fadavis.com/purnell4e/bonus_chapters/

Ch27_001-011.pdf .

87. Tina A. Ellis and Larry D. Purnell, “People of

Guatemalan Heritage,” http://resources.fadavis.com/

purnell4e/bonus_chapters/Ch31_001-014.pdf .

88. Leylha Ahuile, “Ready for Prime Time,” Publishers Weekly (April 1, 2014), p. 3 (special section, “Spanish Language Publishing”).

89. Pérez and Luquis, Cultural Competence in Health Education and Health Promotion, p. 13.

62. Gerry R. Cox, “Native American Spirituality,

Illness, Dying, and Death” (paper presented at the

annual meeting of the Midwest Sociological Society,

Chicago, 1995).

63. David G. Mandelbaum, “Social Uses of Funeral

Rites,” in The Meaning of Death, ed. Herman Feifel, 189–217 (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1959).

64. John E. Reinhardt, Life . . . Afterlife: African Funerary Sculpture (Washington, D.C.: National Museum of Afri- can Art, 1982). On African religious thought, see John

S. Mbiti, African Religions and Philosophy (Garden City, N.Y.: Anchor/Doubleday, 1970); and Dominique Zahan,

The Religion, Spirituality, and Thought of Traditional Africa (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1979).

65. Meyer Fortes, “An Introductory Commentary,” in

Ancestors, ed. William Newell (The Hague: Moulton, 1976), p. 5.

66. Steadman and Palmer, “Visiting Dead Ancestors,”

p. 177.

67. Noel Q. King, Religions of Africa: A Pilgrimage into Traditional Religions (New York: Harper & Row, 1970), pp. 13–14; see also, by King, Christian and Muslim in Africa (New York: Harper & Row, 1971), p. 95.

68. Dominique Zahan, “Some Refl ections on African

Spirituality,” in African Spirituality: Forms, Meanings, and Expressions, ed. Jacob K. Olupona, 3–25 (New York: Crossroad, 2000), p. 12.

69. King, Religions of Africa, p. 68. See also Sjaak Van Der Geest, “‘I Want to Go!’ How Older People in

Ghana Look Forward to Death,” Ageing and Society 22 (2002): 7–28.

70. Kofi Asare Opoku, “African Perspectives on Death

and Dying,” in Perspectives on Death and Dying: Cross-Cul- tural and Multidisciplinary Views, ed. Arthur Berger and others, 14–23 (Philadelphia: Charles Press, 1989).

71. Ogbu U. Kalu, “Ancestral Spirituality and Society

in Africa,” in African Spirituality: Forms, Meanings, and Expressions, ed. Jacob K. Olupona, 54–84 (New York: Crossroad, 2000), p. 54.

72. Francis Bebey, African Music: A People’s Art (Brook- lyn, N.Y.: Lawrence Hill, 1975), p. 126.

73. From a story by Robert Dvorchak, The Los Angeles Times, July 8, 1990.

74. Jack Goody, Death, Property, and the Ancestors: A Study of the Mortuary Customs of the LoDagaa of West Africa (Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1962).

75. Olatunde Bayo Lawuyi, “Obituary and Ancestral

Worship: Analysis of a Contemporary Cultural Form in

Nigeria,” Sociological Analysis 48, no. 4 (1988): 372–379. See also Kemi Adamolekun, “Survivors’ Motives for

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 615des35465_notes_601-670.indd 615 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

616 n o t e s

96. Regina M. Marchi, Day of the Dead in the USA: The Migration and Transformation of a Cultural Phenomenon (New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 2009),

p. 40.

97. Stanley Brandes, Skulls to the Living, Bread to the Dead: The Day of the Dead in Mexico and Beyond (Malden, Mass.: Blackwell, 2006), pp. 48–50.

98. Paz, Labyrinth of Solitude.

99. Jorge Valadez, “Pre-Columbian and Modern Philo-

sophical Perspectives in Latin America,” in From Africa to Zen: An Invitation to World Philosophy, ed. Robert C. Solomon and Kathleen M. Higgins, 81–124 (Lanham,

Md.: Rowman and Littlefi eld, 1993), p. 107.

100. Davíd Carrasco, “Religions of Mesoamerica: Cos-

movision and Ceremonial Centers,” in Religious Tradi- tions of the World, ed. H. Byron Earhart, 107–253 (San Francisco: HarperCollins, 1992); quote pp. 232–233.

101. Marchi, Day of the Dead in the USA, p. 37.

102. Quoted in Marchi, Day of the Dead in the USA, p. 103.

103. Weaver, Explorations in Cultural Competence, p. 167.

104. Larry Purnell, “People of Hmong Heritage,” in

Transcultural Health Care, ed. Purnell, 310–318; p. 316.

105. Christopher L. Hayes and Richard A. Kalish,

“Death-Related Experiences and Funerary Practices of

the Hmong Refugee in the United States,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 75–79.

106. Jaya Jambunathan, “People of Hindu Heritage,” in

Transcultural Health Care, ed. Purnell, 288–309; p. 302.

107. Shanil Ebrahim, Sheena Bance, and Kerry W.

Bowman, “Sikh Perspectives Towards Death and End-

of-Life Care,” Journal of Palliative Care 27, no. 2 (2011): 170–174.

108. See, for example: H. Byron Earhart, “Religions

of Japan: Many Traditions Within One Sacred Way,” in

Religious Traditions of the World, ed. Earhart, 1075–1186 (San Francisco: HarperCollins, 1992); Dennis Klass,

“Ancestor Worship in Japan: Dependence and the

Resolution of Grief,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 33, no. 4 (1996): 279–302; Hajime Nakamura, Ways of Thinking of Eastern Peoples: India, China, Tibet, Japan, trans. and ed. Philip P. Wiener (Honolulu: University

of Hawaii Press, 1964); Sokyo Ono, Shinto: The Kami Way (Rutland, Vt.: Charles E. Tuttle, 1962); Daniel L. Overmyer, “Religions of China: The World as a Living

System,” in Religious Traditions of the World, ed. Earhart, 973–1073; Ian Reader, Religion in Contemporary Japan (Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1991); Robert J.

Smith, Ancestor Worship in Contemporary Japan (Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1974); Yamaori Tetsuo,

“The Metamorphosis of Ancestors,” Japan Quarterly 33,

90. Miguel León-Portilla, “Those Made Worthy by

Divine Sacrifi ce: The Faith of Ancient Mexico,” in

South and Meso-American Native Spirituality: From the Cult of the Feathered Serpent to the Theology of Liberation, ed. Gary H. Gossen, 41–64 (New York: Crossroad, 1993),

p. 56.

91. Rich Zoucha and Cecelia A. Zamarripa, “People

of Mexican Heritage,” in Transcultural Health Care, ed. Purnell, 374–390; p. 384.

92. Luis Cardoza y Arogón, quoted in Claudio Lom-

nitz, Death and the Idea of Mexico (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 2005), p. 23.

93. Quoted in Rafael Jesús González, El Corazón de la Muerte: Altars and Offerings for Days of the Dead (Berke- ley, Calif.: Heyday Books, 2005), p. 26.

94. Octavio Paz, The Labyrinth of Solitude: Life and Thought in Mexico (New York: Grove Press, 1961); quote p. 54.

95. See, by Mary J. Andrade, Through the Eyes of the Soul, Día de Muertos en Mexico: Michoacan, 2nd ed. (San Jose, Calif.: La Oferta, 1999), Through the Eyes of the Soul, Día de Muertos en Mexico: Oaxaca (San Jose, Calif.: La Oferta, 1999), and Through the Eyes of the Soul, Día de Muertos en Mexico: Mexico City, Mixquic, and Morelos (San Jose, Calif.: La Oferta 2000). See also Barbara

Brodman, The Mexican Cult of Death in Myth and Litera- ture (Gainesville: University of Florida Press, 1976); Elizabeth Carmichael and Chloë Sayer, The Skeleton at the Feast: The Day of the Dead in Mexico (London: Brit- ish Museum Press, 1991); Robert Childs and Patricia

B. Altman, Vive tu Recuerdo: Living Traditions of the Mexican Days of the Dead (Los Angeles: Museum of Cultural History, UCLA, 1982); Juanita Garciagodoy,

Digging the Days of the Dead: A Reading of Mexico’s Dias de Muertos (Niwot, Colo.: University Press of Colorado, 1998); Judith Strupp Green, “The Days of the Dead in

Oaxaca, Mexico: An Historical Inquiry,” in Death and Dying: Views from Many Cultures, ed. Kalish, pp. 56 –71; John Greenleigh and Rosalind Rosoff Beimler, The Days of the Dead: Mexico’s Festival of Communion with the Departed (San Francisco: HarperCollins, 1991); Rafael Jesús González, El Corazón de la Muerte: Altars and Offerings for Days of the Dead (Berkeley, Calif.: Heyday Books, 2005); Patricia Fernández Kelly, “Death in

Mexican Folk Culture,” American Quarterly 26, no. 5 (December 1974): 516 –535; Claudio Lomnitz, Death and the Idea of Mexico (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 2005); Joan Moore, “The Death Culture of Mexico

and Mexican Americans,” in Death and Dying: Views from Many Cultures, ed. Kalish, pp. 72–91; Patricia Osuna and David K. Reynolds, “A Funeral in Mexico:

Description and Analysis,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 1, no. 3 (1970): 249–269.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 616des35465_notes_601-670.indd 616 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 3 617

120. Janet Lee Scott, For Gods, Ghosts and Ancestors: The Chinese Tradition of Paper Offerings (Hong Kong: Hong Kong University Press, 2007), pp. 2, 20, 104, 114.

See also Roderick Cave, Chinese Paper Offerings (Hong Kong: Oxford University Press, 1998).

121. Scott, For Gods, Ghosts and Ancestors, p. 129.

122. Scott, For Gods, Ghosts and Ancestors, pp. 104, 150.

123. Tetsuo, “Metamorphosis of Ancestors,” p. 51.

124. Janice Selekman, “People of Jewish Heritage,” in

Transcultural Health Care, ed. Purnell, 339–356; p. 349.

125. See, for example, Barry Cunliffe, The Ancient Celts (New York: Oxford University Press, 1997); Hilda Ellis Davidson, Myths and Symbols in Pagan Europe: Early Scandinavian and Celtic Religions (Manchester, U.K.: Manchester University Press, 1988), and The Lost Beliefs of Northern Europe (London: Routledge, 1993); Peter Berresford Ellis, The Celtic Empire: The First Millennium of Celtic History 1000 BC–AD 51 (New York: Carroll & Graf, 2001); Ronald Hutton, The Pagan Religions of the Ancient British Isles: Their Nature and Legacy (Malden, Mass.: Blackwell, 1991); Prudence Jones and Nigel Pen-

nick, A History of Pagan Europe (London: Routledge, 1995); J. A. MacCulloch, The Celtic and Scandinavian Religions (London: Hutchinson’s University Library, 1948); Sabatino Moscati, ed., The Celts (New York: Rizzoli, 1991); Dáithé Ó’Hógáin, The Celts: A History (Cork: Boydell, 2020); and Ward Rutherford, Celtic Mythology (London: Thorsons, 1995).

126. Sandra M. Gilbert, Death’s Door: Modern Dying and the Ways We Grieve (New York: Norton, 2006), p. 1.

127. See, for example, Nora K. Chadwick, The Druids (Cardiff: University of Wales Press, 1966); Paul R.

Lonigan, The Druids: Priests of the Ancient Celts (Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1996).

128. John Sharkey, Celtic Mysteries: The Ancient Religion (New York: Thames & Hudson, 1975), p. 10.

129. James R. Babb, River Music: A Fly Fisher’s Four Sea- sons (Guilford, Conn.: Lyons Press, 2001), p. 176.

130. Elizabeth Kantor, The Politically Incorrect Guide to English and American Literature (Washington, D.C.: Reg- nery, 2006), p. 15.

131. Jack Santino, The Hallowed Eve: Dimensions of Cul- ture in a Calendar Festival in Northern Ireland (Lexing- ton: University Press of Kentucky, 1998), p. 90.

132. Stephanie Myers Schim, “People of Irish Heri-

tage,” http://resources.fadavis.com/purnell4e/bonus_

chapters/Ch33_001-013.pdf .

133. Humayun Ansari, “Burying the Dead: Making

Muslim Space in Britain,” Historical Research 80, no. 210 (November 2007): 545–566.

no. 1 ( January–March 1986): 50–53; and James L.

Watson and Evelyn S. Rawski, eds., Death Ritual in Late Imperial and Modern China (Berkeley: University of Cali- fornia Press, 1988).

109. Kate Jellema, “Everywhere Incense Burning:

Remembering Ancestors in Dôi Moí Vietnam,” Journal of Southeast Asian Studies 38, no. 3 (2007): 457–492; esp. p. 473.

110. Inge Rösch-Rhomberg, “Hierarchical Opposition

and the Concept of um-yang ( yin - yang ): A Reevaluation of Values in the Light of the Symbolism of Korean

Rituals for the Dead,” Anthropos 89 (1994): 471–491.

111. Satsuki Kawano, “A Sociocultural Analysis of

Death Anxiety Among Older Japanese Urbanites in a

Citizens’ Movement,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 62, no. 4 (2010–2011): 369–386.

112. Wanyan Shaoyuan, Exploring Fêng-shui (Singa- pore: McGraw-Hill, 2010), p. 6. See also Ole Bruun,

An Introduction to Feng Shui (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2008); Richard Creightmore, Feng Shui: Secrets of Chinese Geomancy (New York: Walker, 2012), esp. pp. 2, 4, 14; and Derek Walters, The Feng Shui Handbook: A Practical Guide to Chinese Geomancy and Harmony (San Francisco: Aquarian/Thorsons, 1991), esp. p. 165.

113. Yamaori Tetsuo, “The Metamorphosis of Ances-

tors,” Japan Quarterly 33, no. 1 ( January–March 1986): 50–53.

114. Keys to the Japanese Heart and Soul (Tokyo: Kodan- sha, 1996), p. 169.

115. Donald Keene, The Pleasures of Japanese Literature (New York: Columbia University Press, 1988), p. 53.

116. Andy Hau Yan Ho and Cecilia Lai Wan Chan,

“Liberating Dying People and Bereaved Families from

the Oppression of Death and Loss in Chinese Societ-

ies: A Public Health Approach,” in Governing Death and Loss: Empowerment, Involvement and Participation, ed. Steve Conway, 119–128 (New York: Oxford University

Press, 2011), p. 119.

117. Christine Valentine, “Negotiating a Loved One’s

Dying in Contemporary Japanese Society,” Mortality 14, no. 1 (2009): 34–52; esp. pp. 36, 37.

118. Christine Valentine, “Bereavement in Japan:

Contemporary Responses to Traditional Forms,” paper

presented at a conference of the Centre for Death and

Society, Bath, U.K., March 26, 2009.

119. Allan Kellehear and Daisuke Tanaka, “Support-

ing Bereavement in Society: Comparisons Between

Australia and Japan,” Grief Matters: The Australian Journal of Grief and Bereavement 7, no. 1 (Autumn 2004): 4–7.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 617des35465_notes_601-670.indd 617 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

618 n o t e s

146. This discussion of contemporary Chinese funeral

customs in Hawaii is based on interviews by the

authors with Anna Ordenstein and Ken Ordenstein

who, along with their Chinese-Hawaiian-Jewish-

Portuguese forebears, have provided funeral services

to residents of Hawaii over the course of fi ve genera-

tions. We are grateful for their assistance.

147. John F. McDermott, Jr., “Toward an Interethnic

Society,” in People and Cultures of Hawaii, ed. McDer- mott, Tseng, and Maretzki, p. 231; see also Wayne S.

Wooden, What Price Paradise? Changing Social Patterns in Hawaii (Washington, D.C.: University Press of America, 1981).

148. McDermott, “Toward an Interethnic Society,”

pp. 229–230; see also Elvi Whittaker, The Mainland Haole: The White Experience in Hawaii (New York: Columbia University Press, 1986).

149. Mary Kawena Pukui and Samuel H. Elbert,

Hawaiian Dictionary, rev. ed. (Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1986), p. 34.

150. Paul Spickard, quoted in Susan Yim, “Hapa in

Hawai’i,” Honolulu (December 1994), pp. 44–47, 90, 92.

151. Goodman, Introduction to Sociology, p. 37.

152. David H. Olson and John DeFrain, Marriage and Family: Diversity and Strengths (Mountain View, Calif.: Mayfi eld, 1994), p. 37.

153. Katie Algeo, “Teaching Cultural Geography with

‘Bend It Like Beckham,’” Journal of Geography 106, no. 3 (2007): 133–143.

154. See M. Eisenbruch, “Cross-Cultural Aspects

of Bereavement: Ethnic and Cultural Variations in

the Development of Bereavement Practices,” Culture, Medicine, and Psychiatry 8 (1984): 315–347; and Jimy M. Sanders, “Ethnic Boundaries and Identity in Plu-

ral Societies,” Annual Review of Sociology 28 (2002): 327–357.

155. Alvin O. Korte, “ Despedidas as Refl ections of Death in Hispanic New Mexico,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 32, no. 4 (1995–1996): 245–267.

156. Robert Pogue Harrison, The Dominion of the Dead (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2003), p. 70.

C H A P T E R 4

1. Robert Kastenbaum, “Death System,” in Encyclopedia of Death, ed. Robert Kastenbaum and Beatrice Kasten- baum, 90–93 (Phoenix, Ariz.: Oryx Press, 1989); and

Kenneth J. Doka, “Death System,” in Macmillan Ency- clopedia of Death and Dying, ed. Robert Kastenbaum, 222–223 (New York: Macmillan, 2003).

134. Pérez and Luquis, Cultural Competence in Health Education and Health Promotion, p. 16.

135. Weaver, Explorations in Cultural Competence, p. 191.

136. John F. McDermott, Jr., “Toward an Interethnic

Society,” in People and Cultures of Hawaii, ed. McDer- mott, Tseng, and Maretzki, p. 231.

137. Eleanor C. Nordyke, The Peopling of Hawai’i, 2nd ed. (Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1989), p. 1.

138. Patrick Vinton Kirch, Feathered Gods and Fishhooks: An Introduction to Hawaiian Archeology and Prehistory (Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1985), p. 298.

139. Jonathan Y. Okamura, “Why There Are No Asian

Americans in Hawai’i: The Continuing Signifi cance of

Local Identity,” Social Process in Hawaii 35 (1994): 161–178.

140. See Benjamin B. C. Young, “The Hawaiians,” in

People and Cultures of Hawaii: A Psychocultural Profi le, ed. John F. McDermott, Jr., Wen-Shing Tseng, and Thomas

W. Maretzki, 5–24 (Honolulu: John A. Burns School of

Medicine and University of Hawaii Press, 1980).

141. Mary Kawena Pukui, E. W. Haertig, and Cath-

erine A. Lee, Nana I Ke Kumu (Look to the Source), 2 vols. (Honolulu: Hui Hanai; Queen Lili’uokalani Chil-

dren’s Center, 1972). A study conducted in the 1930s

found families still tracing their lineage from ances-

tors who were viewed as spiritual guardians of their

descendants and who often interceded in very practi-

cal ways. See E. S. Craighill Handy and Mary Kawena

Pukui, The Polynesian Family System in Ka-’u, Hawai’i (Rutland, Vt.: Charles E. Tuttle, 1972).

142. George Hu’eu Sanford Kanahele, Ku Kanaka, Stand Tall: A Search for Hawaiian Values (Honolulu: Uni- versity of Hawaii Press, 1986), p. 182. On the soul after

death and realms of the spirits of the dead, see also

Donald D. Kilolani Mitchell, Resource Units in Hawaiian Culture (Honolulu: Kamehameha Schools Press, 1982), pp. 84–86.

143. Kathryn L. Braun, Noreen Mokuau, G. Haunani

Hunt, Momi Kaanoi, and Carolyn C. Gotay, “Supports

and Obstacles to Cancer Survival for Hawaii’s Native Peo-

ple,” Cancer Practice 10, no. 4 (2002): 192–200; esp. p. 193.

144. Margaret J. Maaka, Kathryn H. Au, Yvonne K.

Lefcourt, and L. Pauahi Bogac, “Raccoon? Wass Dat?

Hawaiian Preservice Teachers Reconceptualize Cul-

ture, Literacy, and Schooling,” in Reconceptualizing Lit- eracy in the New Age of Multiculturalism and Pluralism, ed. R. Schmidt and P. B. Mosenthal, 341–366 (Greenwich,

Conn.: Information Age, 2001), p. 344.

145. Nordyke, The Peopling of Hawai’i, p. 52; see also Walter F. Char and others, “The Chinese,” in People and Cultures of Hawaii, ed. McDermott, Tseng, and Maretzki, pp. 53–72.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 618des35465_notes_601-670.indd 618 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 4 619

17. Joseph B. Verrengia, “Remains of Columbia Crew

Recovered,” Associated Press Online, February 2, 2003.

18. John D. Lantos, Do We Still Need Doctors? (New York: Routledge, 1997), pp. 129–130.

19. George D. Lundberg, “Low-Tech Autopsies in

the Era of High-Tech Medicine: Continued Value for

Quality Assurance and Patient Safety,” JAMA 280, no. 14 (October 14, 1998): 1273–1274.

20. George D. Lundberg, “Who Does Not Like

Autopsies and Why,” MedPage Today (February 20, 2012); http://www.medpagetoday.com/Columns/

At-Large/31264 .

21. Joe Palazzolo and Rob Barry, “More Killings

Called Self-Defense,” The Wall Street Journal Weekend (March 31–April 1), p. A1.

22. Henry Lundsgaarde, Murder in Space City: A Cul- tural Analysis of Houston Homicide Patterns (New York: Oxford University Press, 1977).

23. Hugo Adam Bedau, “An Abolitionist’s Survey of

the Death Penalty in America,” in Debating the Death Penalty: Should America Have Capital Punishment? ed. Hugo Bedau and Paul Cassell (New York: Oxford Uni-

versity Press, 2004), pp. 26 –27.

24. Ted Rohrlich and Fredric N. Tulsky, “Not All

L.A. Murder Cases Are Equal,” The Los Angeles Times, December 3, 1995.

25. See N. Prabha Unnithan, “The Processing of

Homicide Cases with Child Victims: Systemic and

Situational Contingencies,” Journal of Criminal Justice 22, no. 1 (1994): 41–50, and “Children as Victims of Homi-

cide: Making Claims, Formulating Categories, and

Constructing Social Problems,” Deviant Behavior 15, no. 1 (1994): 63–83.

26. Catharine R. Stimpson, “Do These Deaths Surpass

Understanding? The Literary Figure of the Mother

Who Murders,” Triquarterly 124 (2006): 46 –61; see also George B. Palermo, “Murderous Parents,” International Journal of Offender Therapy and Comparative Criminology 46, no. 2 (2002): 123–143.

27. “Prisoners Executed Under Civil Authority” and

“Prisoners Under Sentence of Death,” Statistical Abstract of the United States: 2012, 131st ed. (Washington, D.C., 2011); http://www.census.gov/compendia/statab/ .

28. Roman Espejo, ed., Does Capital Punishment Deter Crime? (Farmington Hills, Mich.: Greenhaven, 2003), p. 7.

29. Glenn M. Vernon, Sociology of Death: An Analysis of Death-Related Behavior (New York: Ronald Press, 1970). See also Dennis J. Stevens, “The Death Sentence

and Inmate Attitudes,” Crime & Delinquency 38, no. 2 (1992): 272–279.

2. Carla J. Sofka, Illene Noppe Cupit, and Kathleen R.

Gilbert, eds., Dying, Death, and Grief in an Online Uni- verse (New York: Springer, 2012), p. 6.

3. Bert Hayslip, Jr., “Death Denial: Hiding and Cam-

oufl aging Death,” in Handbook of Death & Dying, ed. Clifton D. Bryant, 34–42 (Thousand Oaks, Calif.:

Sage, 2003); esp. p. 35.

4. Darcy Harris, “Healing the Narcissistic Injury of

Death in the Context of Western Society,” in The Shame of Death, Grief, and Trauma, ed. Jeffrey Kauffman, 75–86 (New York: Routledge, 2010), p. 80. See also

Kenneth J. Doka, Disenfranchised Grief: Recognizing Hid- den Sorrow (Lexington, Mass.: Lexington Books, 1989).

5. Susan Orpett Long, Final Days: Japanese Culture and Choice at the End of Life (Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 2005), p. 3.

6. Robert Kastenbaum, “Should We Manage Terror—

If We Could?” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 59, no. 4 (2009): 271–304; esp. 297.

7. Robert A. Hahn and others, “The Recording of

Demographic Information on Death Certifi cates: A

National Survey of Funeral Directors,” Public Health Reports 117 (January–February 2002): 37–43; quote p. 38.

8. Edwin S. Shneidman, Deaths of Man (New York: Quadrangle Books, 1973), pp. 121–130.

9. Chris Kaiser, “Heart Disease Not as Pervasive

as Reported,” MedPage Today (May 21, 2013);

www.medpagetoday.com/PublicHealthPolicy/

GeneralProfessionalIssues/39303 .

10. Brad Randall, Death Investigation: The Basics (Tuc- son, Ariz.: Galen, 1997), p. 1. On the functioning of a

big-city coroner’s offi ce, see Tony Blanche and Brad

Schreiber, Death in Paradise: An Illustrated History of the Los Angeles County Department of Coroner (Los Angeles: General Publishing Group, 1998).

11. Deborah Noyes, “Forensic Science,” in Encyclopedia of the End: Mysterious Death in Fact, Fancy, Folklore, and More, ed. Deborah Noyes (Boston: Houghton Miffl in, 2008), p. 50.

12. Stefan Timmermans, Postmortem: How Medical Examiners Explain Suspicious Deaths (Chicago: Univer- sity of Chicago Press, 2006), p. viii.

13. Timmermans, Postmortem, p. 43.

14. Quoted in Timmermans, Postmortem, p. 272.

15. Ernest F. Talarico, Jr., “A Change in Paradigm:

Giving Back Identity to Donors in the Anatomy

Laboratory,” Clinical Anatomy 26, no. 2 (2013): 161–172.

16. Jon Yoshishige, “Searching for Answers: Lab Iden-

tifi es Remains of Soldiers, Civilians,” Honolulu Adver- tiser, August 8, 1993.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 619des35465_notes_601-670.indd 619 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

620 n o t e s

45. Press release, “New A AN Guideline for Determin-

ing Brain Death Provides More Clarity and Direction,”

www.aan.com . See also Eelco F. M. Wijdicks et al.,

“Evidence-Based Guideline Update: Determining

Brain Death in Adults,” Neurology 74 ( June 8, 2010): 1911–1918.

46. Kellehear, “Dying as a Social Relationship,”

p. 1534. Kellehear notes that some researchers conclude

that the transplant lobby exerted a powerful infl uence

within the medical community at the time of these

deliberations.

47. See James L. Bernat, “The Biophilosophical Basis

of Whole-Brain Death,” Social Philosophy & Policy 19, no. 2 (2002): 324–342; Gary Greenberg, “As Good as

Dead: Is There Really Such a Thing as Brain Death?,”

The New Yorker, August 13, 2001, pp. 36 –41; K. G. Karakatsanis and J. N. Tsanakas, “A Critique on the

Concept of ‘Brain Death,’” Issues in Law and Medicine 18, no. 2 (2002): 127–141; R. D. Truog, “Is It Time to

Abandon Brain Death?” Hastings Center Report 27, no. 1 (1997): 29–37; and Robert M. Veatch, “The Impend-

ing Collapse of the Whole-Brain Defi nition of Death,”

Hastings Center Report 23, no. 4 (1993): 18–24. See also John P. Lizza, “Persons and Death: What’s Metaphysi-

cally Wrong with Our Current Statutory Defi nition of

Death?” Journal of Medicine and Philosophy 18 (1993): 351–374.

48. Kellehear, “Dying as a Social Relationship,” p. 1536.

49. Shemie, “Clarifying the Paradigm for the Ethics of

Donation and Transplantation,” p. 18.

50. Karen G. Gervais, “Advancing the Defi nition of

Death: A Philosophical Essay,” Medical Humanities Review 3 ( July 1989): 7–19; and, by Gervais, Redefi ning Death (New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1986).

51. Robert M. Veatch, “What Counts as Basic Health

Care? Private Values and Public Policy,” Hastings Center Report 24, no. 3 (1994): 20–21.

52. President’s Commission for the Study of Ethical

Problems in Medicine and Biomedical and Behavioral

Research, Defi ning Death: A Report on the Medical, Legal and Ethical Issues in the Determination of Death (Washing- ton, D.C.: Government Printing Offi ce, 1981), p. 45.

53. President’s Commission, Defi ning Death.

54. Albert R. Jonsen, The Birth of Bioethics (New York: Oxford University Press, 1998), pp. 238–244.

55. Zamperetti, Bellomo, and Ronco, “Defi ning Death

in Non-Heart Beating Donors,” p. 184.

56. Zamperetti, Bellomo, and Ronco, “Defi ning

Death,” p. 184.

57. Kellehear, “Dying as a Social Relationship,” p. 1541.

30. Hugo A. Bedau, “Capital Punishment,” Academic American Encyclopedia Online, March 1991.

31. Kastenbaum and Aisenberg, The Psychology of Death (New York: Springer, 1972), pp. 284–285.

32. Linda R. Monk, The Words We Live By: Your Anno- tated Constitution (New York: Stonesong, 2003), p. 187. On the risk of innocent deaths occurring in the opera-

tion of the death penalty, see James S. Liebman, “Rates

of Reversible Error and the Risk of Wrongful Execu-

tion,” Judicature 86, no. 2 (2002): 78–82.

33. Lundsgaarde, Murder in Space City, p. 146.

34. Allan Kellehear, “Dying As a Social Relationship:

A Sociological Review of Debates on the Determina-

tion of Death,” Social Science & Medicine 66 (2008): 1533–1544.

35. Douglas N. Walton, On Defi ning Death: An Analytic Study of the Concept of Death in Philosophy and Medical Eth- ics (Montreal: McGill-Queen’s University Press, 1979).

36. Ronald E. Cranford, “The Persistent Vegetative

State: The Medical Reality,” in Medical Ethics: Applying Theories and Principles to the Patient Encounter, ed. Matt Weinberg, 111–120 (Amherst, N.Y.: Prometheus, 2001).

37. D. Alan Shewman, transcript, “Session 5:

Responses to the Council’s White Paper, ‘Controver-

sies in the Determination of Death,’” The President’s

Council on Bioethics (November 9, 2007).

38. Sam D. Shemie, “Clarifying the Paradigm for the

Ethics of Donation and Transplantation: Was ‘Dead’

Really So Clear Before Organ Donation?” Philosophy, Ethics, and Humanities in Medicine 2 (August 24, 2007): 18.

39. William R. Clark, Sex and the Origins of Death (New York: Oxford University Press, 1996), p. 171.

40. Robert M. Veatch, Death, Dying, and the Biologi- cal Revolution: Our Last Quest for Responsibility, rev. ed. (New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1989).

41. Duncan MacDougall, “Hypothesis Concerning

Soul Substance Together with Experimental Evidence

of the Existence of Such Substance,” Journal of the Amer- ican Society for Psychical Research 1, no. 5 (May 1907): 237–244.

42. Jay F. Rosenberg, Thinking Clearly About Death (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1983), p. 106.

43. “A Defi nition of Irreversible Coma: Report of the

Ad Hoc Committee of the Harvard Medical School

to Examine the Defi nition of Brain Death,” Journal of the American Medical Association 205, no. 6 (August 5, 1968): 337–340.

44. N. Zamperetti, R. Bellomo, and C. Ronco, “Defi n-

ing Death in Non-Heart Beating Donors,” Journal of Medical Ethics 29 (2003): 182–185.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 620des35465_notes_601-670.indd 620 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 4 621

and Barriers of Asian American and Pacifi c Islander

Adolescents in Hawaii,” Progress in Transplantation 20, no. 4 (2010): 392–400; Elisa J. Gordon, Jillian Rodde,

and Juan Carlos Calcedo, “Quality of Internet Educa-

tion about Living Kidney Donation for Hispanics,”

Progress in Transplantation 22, no. 3 (2012): 294–302.

71. Louis A. Gamino and R. Hal Ritter, Jr., Ethical Practice in Grief Counseling (New York: Springer, 2009), p. 153.

72. Caplan, “Organ Transplantation,” p. 130.

73. John Lauerman and Connie Guglielmo, “Jobs

Travel to Transplant Mecca Shows System Flaws,”

Bloomberg.com .

74. Susan E. Morgan, Michael T. Stephenson, Tyler R.

Harrison, Walid A. Afi fi , and Shawn D. Long, “Facts

versus ‘Feelings’: How Rational Is the Decision to

Become an Organ Donor?” Journal of Health Psychology 13 (2008): 644–658.

75. Felicia Schanche Hodge, Patricia Bellanger, and

Connie Norman, “Organ Donation and Transplanta-

tion: A Dialogue with American Indian Healers and

Western Health-Care Providers,” American Indian Cul- ture and Research Journal 35, no. 3 (2011); 79–90; quote p. 87.

76. Margaret Robbins, “The Donation of Organs for

Transplantation: The Donor Families,” in Contemporary Issues in the Sociology of Death, Dying, and Disposal, ed. Glennys Howarth and Peter C. Jupp, 179–192 (New

York: St. Martin’s, 1996).

77. See Julia D. Mahoney, “The Market for Human

Tissue,” Virginia Law Review 86, no. 2 (2000): 163–223; and Laura A. Siminoff and Mary Beth Mercer, “Public

Policy, Public Opinion, and Consent for Organ Dona-

tion,” Cambridge Quarterly of Healthcare Ethics 10, no. 4 (2001): 377–386.

78. Annie Cheney, Body Brokers: Inside America’s Under- ground Trade in Human Remains (New York: Broadway, 2006), pp. 8–10.

79. Timmermans, Postmortem, pp. 226 –227; see also Chapter 6, “The Organ and Tissue Trade,”

pp. 225–249.

80. Renee C. Fox and Judith P. Swazey, Spare Parts: Organ Replacement in American Society (New York: Oxford University Press, 1992), p. 206.

81. Nancy Scheper-Hughes, “The Global Traffi c in

Human Organs,” Current Anthropology 41, no. 2 (2000): 191–224; quote p. 194. On the way in which a unique

set of social and religious conditions facilitated

acceptance of brain death and organ transplantation

in the United States during the late 1960s, see Wil-

liam R. LaFleur, “From Agape to Organs: Religious

58. Mark H. Beers and Robert Berkow, eds., The Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, 17th ed. (Whitehouse Station, N.J.: Merck Research Laboratories, 1999),

p. 1067.

59. Leonard L. Bailey, “Organ Transplantation: A

Paradigm of Medical Progress,” Hastings Center Report ( January–February 1990): 24–28; see also Susan L.

Smith, “Progress in Clinical Organ Transplantation,”

www.medscape.com .

60. “First ‘Breathing Lung’ Transplant in United States,”

www.sciencedaily.com/releases/2012/11/121126130928

.htm .

61. Robert Steinbrook, “Organ Donation After Car-

diac Death,” New England Journal of Medicine 357, no. 3 ( July 19, 2007): 209–213; esp. p. 209.

62. Steinbrook, “Organ Donation After Cardiac

Death,” p. 211.

63. Steinbrook, “Organ Donation After Cardiac

Death,” quote p. 211. See also The President’s Council

on Bioethics, Controversies in the Determination of Death (Washington, D.C.: 2008).

64. David K. Meagher, “Ethical and Legal Issues and

Loss, Grief and Mourning,” in Handbook of Thanatol- ogy, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk, 179–190 (New York: Routledge, 2013), p. 183.

65. Joseph L. Verheijde, Mohamed Y. Rady, and Joan

L. McGregor, “The United States Revised Uniform

Anatomical Gift Act (2006): New Challenges to Bal-

ancing Patient Rights and Physician Responsibilities,”

Philosophy, Ethics, and Humanities in Medicine 2, (September 12, 2007): 19–21.

66. Michael A. DeVita and Arthur L. Caplan, “Caring

for Organs or for Patients? Ethical Concerns about the

Uniform Anatomical Gift Act (2006),” Annals of Inter- nal Medicine 147, no. 12 (2007): 876 –879.

67. Zamperetti, Bellomo, and Ronco, “Defi ning Death

in Non-Heart Beating Donors,” p. 184.

68. Margaret Lock, “Human Body Parts as Therapeu-

tic Tools: Contradictory Discourses and Transformed

Subjectivities,” Qualitative Health Research 12, no. 10 (2002): 1406 –1418; quote p. 1407.

69. Arthur Caplan, “Organ Transplantation,” in From Birth to Death and Bench to Clinic: The Hastings Center Bioethics Briefi ng Book for Journalists, Policymakers, and Campaigns, ed. Mary Crowley, 129–132 (Garrison, N.Y.: The Hastings Center, 2008); and United Network for

Organ Sharing ( www.unos.org ).

70. See, for example, Cheryl L. Albright et al.,

“Choosing to be a Designated Organ Donor on Their

First Driver’s License: Actions, Opinions, Intentions,

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 621des35465_notes_601-670.indd 621 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

622 n o t e s

6. Joshua Hauser and John Lantos, “Stories of Car-

ing and Connection,” Hastings Center Report 30, no. 2 (2000): 44–47.

7. Paul M. Insel and Walton T. Roth, Connect Core Concepts in Health, 13th ed. (New York: McGraw-Hill, 2013), p. 584.

8. Alastair Gray, “International Patterns of Health

Care, 1960 to the 1990s,” in Caring for Health: History and Diversity, ed. Charles Webster, Health and Disease Series, Book 6 (Buckingham, U.K.: Open University

Press, 1994), p. 174. See also Thomas S. Bodenheimer

and Kevin Grumbach, Understanding Health Policy: A Clinical Approach, 3rd ed. (New York: Lange Medical Books, 2002).

9. Daniel Callahan, Taming the Beloved Beast: How Medi- cal Technology Costs Are Destroying Our Health Care System (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 2009), p. 7.

10. Callahan, Taming the Beloved Beast, p. 9.

11. Callahan, Taming the Beloved Beast, pp. 47, 151.

12. Callahan, Taming the Beloved Beast, p. 152.

13. Callahan, Taming the Beloved Beast, p. 177.

14. Howard M. Spiro, “If It Ain’t Broke,” Science & Medicine 3, no. 6 (November–December 1996): 4–5.

15. Clive F. Seale, “Changing Patterns of Death and

Dying,” Social Science and Medicine 51 (2000): 917–930.

16. Callahan, Taming the Beloved Beast, p. 3.

17. Madeline Jacobs, “Ethical and Legal Issues Related

to Dying and End-of-Life Care,” in Handbook of Thana- tology, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk, 43–49 (New York: Routledge, 2013), p. 43.

18. George D. Lundberg, “How to Rein in Medical

Costs, RIGHT NOW,” http://thehealthcareblog.com/

blog/2009/08/11/how-to-rein-in-medical-costs-

right-now .

19. Daniel Callahan, “Health Care Costs and Medical

Technology,” 79–92, The Hastings Center Bioethics Briefi ng Book (Garrison, N.Y.: The Hastings Center, 2009), p. 80.

20. Callahan, “Health Care Costs and Medical Tech-

nology,” p. 82.

21. Daniel Callahan, “The Limits of Medical Progress:

A Principle of Symmetry,” in The Path Ahead: Read- ings in Death and Dying, ed. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland, 103–105 (Mountain View,

Calif.: Mayfi eld, 1995), p. 104. See also, by Callahan,

What Kind of Life: The Limits of Medical Progress (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1990).

22. Madeline Jacobs, “Ethical and Legal Issues

Related to Dying and End-of-Life Care,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, p. 47.

Differences Between Japan and America in Judging

the Ethics of the Transplant,” Zygon: Journal of Religion and Science 37, no. 3 (2002): 623–642. For different religious views, see Laurence J. O’Connell, “The Reli-

gious and Spiritual Perspective Toward Human Organ

Donation and Transplantation,” in The Ethics of Organ Transplantation, ed. Wayne Shelton and John Balint, 277–292 (New York: JAI Press, 2001).

82. This case study draws on the following sources:

Albert R. Jonsen, “Ethical Issues in Organ Transplan-

tation,” in Medical Ethics, 2nd ed., ed. Robert M. Veatch (Boston: Jones & Bartlett, 1997), pp. 239–274; Rihito

Kimura, “Organ Transplantation and Brain-Death in

Japan: Cultural, Legal, and Bioethical Background,”

Annals of Transplantation 3, no. 3 (1998): 5–58; Darryl Macer, “Bioethics in and from Asia,” Journal of Medical Ethics 25 (1999): 293–295; Masahiro Morioka, “Bio- ethics and Japanese Culture: Brain Death, Patients’

Rights, and Cultural Factors,” Eubios Journal of Asian and International Bioethics 5 (1995): 87–90; Emiko Ohnuki-Tierney, “Brain Death and Organ Transplan-

tation: Cultural Bases of Medical Technology,” Current Anthropology 35, no. 3 (1994): 233–254; and Mona New- some Wicks, “Brain Death and Transplantation: The

Japanese,” www.medscape.com .

83. Mari Yamaguchi, “Japan Lifts Ban on Children

Donating Organs,” AP News Online, July 13, 2009.

84. Michihiro Matsumoto and Lafayette De Mente

Boyé, Japanese Nuance in Plain English (Tokyo: Kodan- sha, 2007), p. 35.

85. Robert Kastenbaum, Death, Society, and Human Experience, 7th ed. (Needham Heights, Mass.: Allyn & Bacon, 2001), p. 62.

C H A P T E R 5

1. Richard A. Deyo, “Cascade Effects of Medical

Technology,” Annual Review of Public Health 23 (2002): 23–44; quote p. 29.

2. Ira Byock, The Best Care Possible: A Physician’s Quest to Transform Care Through the End of Life (New York: Avery Penguin, 2012), p. 3.

3. Stephen R. Connor, Hospice and Palliative Care: The Essential Guide, 2nd ed. (New York: Routledge, 2009), p. 2.

4. Vanessa M. P. Johnson, Joan M. Teno, Meg Bour-

bonniere, and Vincent Mor, “Palliative Care Needs of

Cancer Patients in U.S. Nursing Homes,” Journal of Pal- liative Medicine 8, no. 2 (2005): 273–279.

5. Charles E. Rosenberg, “Institutionalized Ambigu-

ity: Confl ict and Continuity in the American Hospi-

tal,” Second Opinion 12 (November 1989): 63–73.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 622des35465_notes_601-670.indd 622 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 5 623

Support of the Cancer Patient,” in Psychosocial Care of the Dying Patient, ed. Charles A. Garfi eld, 169–184 (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1978).

34. Candace West, Routine Complications: Troubles with Talk Between Doctors and Patients (Bloomington: Indi- ana University Press, 1984).

35. Sandra L. Bertman, Michael D. Wertheimer, and

H. Brownell Wheeler, “Humanities in Surgery, a Life-

Threatening Situation: Communicating the Diagno-

sis,” Death Studies 10, no. 5 (1986): 431–439.

36. Richard S. Sandor, “On Death and Coding,” in

The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 144 –147.

37. Eugene A. Stead, Jr., A Way of Thinking: A Primer on the Art of Being a Doctor (Durham, N.C.: Carolina Aca- demic Press, 1995), p. 126. See also Susan E. Hickman,

“Improving Communication Near the End of Life,”

American Behavioral Scientist 46, no. 2 (2002): 252–267.

38. Albert Lee Strickland and Lynne Ann DeSpelder,

“Communicating About Death and Dying,” in Dying, Death, and Bereavement: A Challenge for Living, 2nd ed., ed. Inge Corless, Barbara B. Germino, and Mary A.

Pittman, 7–24 (New York: Springer, 2003).

39. S. M. Johnson and M. E. Kurtz, “Name Usage in

Clinical Practice: Ethnic and Gender Disparities,”

Humane Medicine 11, no. 3 (1995): 106 –109. See also Gary L. Brase and Jillian Richmond, “The White-

Coat Effect: Physician Attire and Perceived Authority,

Friendliness, and Attractiveness,” Journal of Applied Social Psychology 34, no. 12 (2004): 2469–2481; Felicity Goodyear-Smith and Stephen Buetow, “Power Issues

in the Doctor-Patient Relationship,” Health Care Analy- sis 9, no. 4 (2001): 449–462; and Robert M. Veatch, “White Coat Ceremonies: A Second Opinion,” Journal of Medical Ethics 28, no. 1 (2002): 5–9.

40. Jeanne Quint Benoliel, “Health Care Providers

and Dying Patients: Critical Issues in Terminal Care,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 18, no. 4 (1987–1988): 341–363; quote p. 345.

41. Anne-Mei The, Tony Hak, Gerard Koëter, and

Gerrit van der Wal, “Collusion in Doctor-Patient Com-

munication about Imminent Death: An Ethnographic

Study,” British Medical Journal 321 (December 2, 2000): 1376 –1381.

42. “Tapping Human Potential: An Interview with

Norman Cousins,” Second Opinion 14 ( July 1990): 57–71.

43. See Balfour Mount, “Whole Person Care: Beyond

Psychosocial and Physical Needs,” American Journal of Hospice and Palliative Care 10, no. 1 ( January–February 1993): 28–37.

23. Arthur W. Frank, “The Painter and the Camera-

man: Boundaries in Clinical Relationships,” Theoretical Medicine 23 (2002): 219–232; quote p. 231.

24. Michael D. Fetters and Howard Brody, “The Epide-

miology of Bioethics,” Journal of Clinical Ethics 10, no. 2 (1999): 107–115.

25. See Dan W. Brock, “The Ideal of Shared Decision

Making Between Physicians and Patients,” Kennedy Institute of Ethics Journal (March 1991): 28–47; and Christine K. Cassel, “The Patient-Physician Covenant:

An Affi rmation of Asklepios,” Annals of Internal Medi- cine 124 (1996): 604–606.

26. Stanley Joel Reiser, “The Era of the Patient: Using

the Experience of Illness in Shaping the Missions of

Health Care,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 106 –115.

27. C. D. Bessinger, “Doctoring: The Philosophic

Milieu,” Southern Medical Journal 81, no. 12 (1988): 1558–1562. See also William Campbell Felch, The Secret(s) of Good Patient Care: Thoughts on Medicine in the 21st Century (Westport, Conn.: Praeger, 1996); and Edmund D. Pellegrino and David C. Thomasma, A Philosophical Basis for Medical Practice: Towards a Phi- losophy and Ethic of the Healing Professions (New York: Oxford University Press, 1981).

28. Stephen R. Connor, “The Family, Larger Systems,

and Dying,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk, p. 41. This

phrase is attributed to Avery Weisman, On Dying and Denying (1972).

29. See, for example, Dieter Birnbacher, “Predictive

Medicine: The Right to Know and the Right Not to

Know,” Acta Analytica: Philosophy and Psychology 16 (2001): 35–47; Todd S. Elwyn, Michael D. Fetters,

Hiroki Sasaki, and Tsukada Tsuda, “Responsibil-

ity and Cancer Disclosure in Japan,” Social Science & Medicine 54, no. 2 (2002): 281–293; and Stan A. Kaplowitz, Shelly Campo, and Wai Tat Chiu, “Cancer

Patients’ Desires for Communication of Prognosis

Information,” Health Communication 14, no. 2 (2002): 221–241.

30. Blair Sumner Mynatt and Robyn L. Mowery, “The

Family, Larger Systems, and End-of-Life Decision Mak-

ing,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, p. 99f.

31. Kenneth J. Doka, Counseling Individuals with Life- Threatening Illness (New York: Springer, 2009), pp. 35–36.

32. Thomas J. Smith, “Tell It Like It Is,” Journal of Clini- cal Oncology 18, no. 19 (2000): 3441–3445.

33. For a model of such discussion, see Ernest Rosen-

baum, “Oncology/Hematology and Psychosocial

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 623des35465_notes_601-670.indd 623 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

624 n o t e s

58. See F. Ackerman, “Goldilocks and Mrs. Ilych: A

Critical Look at the ‘Philosophy of Hospice,’” Cambridge Quarterly of Healthcare Ethics 6, no. 3 (1997): 314–324.

59. See Katherine Froggatt, “Rites of Passage and the

Hospice Culture,” Mortality 2, no. 2 (1997): 123–136.

60. David S. Greer, Vincent Mor, and Robert Kasten-

baum, “Concepts, Questions, and Research Priorities,”

in The Hospice Experiment, ed. Vincent Mor, David S. Greer, and Robert Kastenbaum (Baltimore: Johns

Hopkins University Press, 1988), p. 249. See also Mar-

cia Lattanzi-Licht, John J. Mahoney, and Galen W.

Miller, The Hospice Choice: In Pursuit of a Peaceful Death (New York: Fireside, 1998).

61. NHPCO Facts and Figures: Hospice Care in America 2012, www.nhpco.org .

62. Stephen R. Connor, Joan Teno, Carol Spench, and

Neal Smith, “Family Evaluation of Hospice Care,” Journal of Pain and Symptom Management 30, no. 1 (2005): 9–17.

63. R. Sean Morrison, Catherine Maroney-Galin,

Peter D. Kravolec, and Diane E. Meier, “The Growth

of Palliative Care Programs in United States Hos-

pitals,” Journal of Palliative Medicine 8, no. 6 (2005): 1127–1134.

64. Ira Byock, “Improving Palliative Care in Intensive

Care Units: Identifying Strategies and Interventions

That Work,” Critical Care Medicine 34, no. 11 (2006): S302–S305; quote p. S303.

65. Stephen R. Connor, “JAMA Article Provides Valu-

able Guidance,” NHPCO Newsline (April 2009): 1–2, 4–5. See also NHPCO, Hospice Care: A Consumer’s Guide to Selecting a Hospice Program, which can be downloaded free from www.caringinfo.org .

66. Ira Byock, “Palliative Care,” in On Our Own Terms: Moyers on Dying, ed. Public Affairs Television (New York: WNET, 2000), pp. 10–11. See also, by Byock,

“End-of-Life Care: A Public Health Crisis and an

Opportunity for Managed Care,” American Journal of Managed Care 7, no. 12 (2001): 1123–1132.

67. See William E. Phipps, “The Origin of Hospices/

Hospitals,” Death Studies 12, no. 2 (1988): 91–99; Susan Lynn Sloan, “The Hospice Movement: A Study in the

Diffusion of Innovative Palliative Care,” American Journal of Hospice and Palliative Care (May–June 1992): 24–31; and Sandol Stoddard, “Hospice in the United

States: An Overview,” Journal of Palliative Care 5, no. 3 (1989): 10–19.

68. James Luther Adams, “Palliative Care in the Light

of Early Christian Concepts,” Journal of Palliative Care 5, no. 3 (1989): 5–8.

69. See Thelma Ingles, “St. Christopher’s Hospice,” in

A Hospice Handbook: A New Way to Care for the Dying, ed.

44. Marilee Ivars Donovan and Sandra Girton Pierce,

Cancer Care Nursing (New York: Appleton-Century- Crofts, 1976), p. 32.

45. Betty Davies and others, Fading Away: The Experi- ence of Transition in Families with Terminal Illness (Amityville, N.Y.: Baywood, 1996).

46. Elisabeth Kübler-Ross, On Death and Dying (New York: Macmillan, 1969), p. 249. For a biographical

account of Kübler-Ross’s experiences, see Elisabeth

Kübler-Ross, The Wheel of Life: A Memoir of Living and Dying (New York: Scribner, 1997).

47. Balfour M. Mount, “Keeping the Mission,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 125–132, quote p. 125.

48. Inge B. Corless, “Settings for Terminal Care,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 18, no. 4 (1987–1988): 319–340.

49. See Rien M. J. P. A. Janssens, Zbigniew Zylicz, and

Henk A. M. J. Ten Have, “Articulating the Concept

of Palliative Care: Philosophical and Theological

Perspectives,” Journal of Palliative Care 15, no. 2 (1999): 38–44; and Allan Kellehear, “Spirituality and Palliative

Care: A Model of Needs,” Palliative Medicine 14 (2000): 149–155.

50. Joan M. Teno and Stephen R. Connor, “Referring

a Patient and Family to High-Quality Palliative Care

at the Close of Life,” JAMA 301, no. 6 (February 11, 2009): 651–659; quote p. 655.

51. Reported in Teno and Connor, “Referring a

Patient and Family to High-Quality Palliative Care at

the Close of Life,” p. 652.

52. Stephen R. Connor, “Palliative Care is a Human

Right,” ADEC Forum 37, no. 3 (2011): 1, 3–4, 10.

53. Study commissioned by the Worldwide Palliative

Care Alliance. See M. Wright et al., “Mapping Levels of

Palliative Care Development,” Journal of Pain and Symp- tom Management 35 (2008): 469–485.

54. Stephen R. Connor, Hospice and Palliative Care: The Essential Guide, 2nd ed., p. 215.

55. Teno and Connor, “Referring a Patient and Family

to High-Quality Palliative Care at the Close of Life,”

p. 654.

56. Mark H. Beers, ed., The Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, 18th ed. (Whitehouse Station, N.J.: Merck Research Laboratories, 2006), p. 2763. It is noteworthy

that there is no entry for “palliative” in the Manual’s index.

57. Connor, Hospice and Palliative Care: The Essential Guide, p. 8.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 624des35465_notes_601-670.indd 624 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 5 625

news/2013/Apr/30/sharp-san-diego-hospice-auction/ .

See also press release, “San Diego Hospice and

Scripps Health Joint Statement: San Diego Hospice

Announces Intent to Close,” February 13, 2013.

84. NHPCO Facts and Figures, p. 7; and “Resident Population by Race, Hispanic Origin, and Age: 2009,”

Statistical Abstract of the United States: 2012, 131st ed. (Washington, D.C., 2011); http://www.census.gov/

compendia/statab/ .

85. Ronald K. Barrett, “Blacks, Death, Dying, and

Funerals: Things You’ve Wondered About but Thought

It Politically Incorrect to Ask” (keynote presentation,

King’s College 15th International Conference on

Death and Bereavement, London, Ontario, May 12,

1997). See also Harold P. Freeman and Richard Payne,

“Racial Injustice in Health Care,” New England Journal of Medicine 342, no. 14 (April 6, 2000): 1045–1047; and Harold P. Freeman, Richard Payne, and Louis W. Sul-

livan, “Racial Injustice in Health Care: How Should It

Be Addressed?” Medical Crossfi re 2, no. 8 (2000): 31–33.

86. David J. Casarett and others, “The Terrible

Choice: Re-Evaluating Hospice Eligibility Criteria for

Cancer,” Journal of Clinical Oncology 27, no. 6 (2009): 953–959; and Jessica Fishman and others, “Race,

Treatment Preferences, and Hospice Enrollment:

Eligibility Criteria May Exclude Patients with Greatest

Needs for Care,” Cancer 115, no. 3 (2009): 689–697. See also Alexander K. Smith, Craig C. Earle, and Ellen

P. McCarthy, “Racial and Ethnic Differences in End-

of-Life Care in Fee-for-Service Medicare Benefi ciaries

with Advanced Cancer,” Journal of the American Geriat- rics Society 57 ( January 2009): 153–158.

87. Sandol Stoddard, quoted in Sloan, “The Hospice

Movement: A Study in the Diffusion of Innovative

Palliative Care,” 24–31.

88. Richard Payne, “At the End of Life, Color Still

Divides,” The Washington Post, February 15, 2000. See also Leslie J. Blackhall and others, “Ethnicity and

Attitudes Towards Life Sustaining Technology,” Social Science & Medicine 48, no. 12 (1999): 1779–1789; Eric L. Krakauer, Christopher Crenner, and Ken Fox, “Barriers

to Optimum End-of-Life Care for Minority Patients,”

Journal of the American Geriatrics Society 50, no. 1 (2002): 182–190; and “Palliative Care in African-American

Communities” (whole issue), Innovations in End-of-Life Care: An International Online Journal 3, no. 5 (September– October 2001) www.2.edu.org/lastacts/crntisue.asp .

89. Carole A. Winston, Paula Leshner, Jennifer

Kramer, and Gillian Allen, “Overcoming Barriers to

Access and Utilization of Hospice and Palliative Care

Services in African-American Communities,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 50, no. 2 (2004–2005): 151–163; quote p. 161.

Michael P. Hamilton and Helen F. Reid, 45–56 (Grand

Rapids, Mich.: Eerdmans, 1980). See also Cicely Saun-

ders, “The Evolution of Palliative Care,” Patient Educa- tion and Counseling 41, no. 1 (2000): 7–13.

70. Connor, Hospice and Palliative Care: The Essential Guide, p. 4.

71. Cicely Saunders, personal communication.

72. Quoted in Constance Holden, “Hospices for the

Dying, Relief from Pain and Fear,” in Hospice Handbook, ed. Hamilton and Reid, p. 61.

73. Stephen R. Connor, “The Family, Larger Systems,

and Dying,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 33–41 (New York: Routledge,

2013), p. 37.

74. Ira Byock, “The Ethics of Loving Care,” Health Progress 85, no. 4 (2004): 12–19, 57.

75. International Work Group on Death, Dying, and

Bereavement, Statements on Death, Dying, and Bereave- ment (London, Ont.: IWG, 1994).

76. Kenneth J. Doka, “Historical and Contemporary

Perspectives on Dying,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 17–23 (New York:

Routledge, 2013), p. 19. See also Andrea Fontana and

Jennifer Reid Keene, Death and Dying in America (Malden, Mass.: Polity, 2009), p. 41.

77. William M. Lamers, Jr., “Hospice: Enhancing the

Quality of Life,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 116 –124.

78. For a report compiled by the National Hospice

Work Group, see Bruce Jennings, True Ryndes, Carol

D’Onofrio, and Mary Ann Baily, Access to Hospice Care: Expanding Boundaries, Overcoming Barriers: Hastings Cen- ter Report Special Supplement 33, no. 2 (2003): S3–S59.

79. Paul Glare and others, “A Systematic Review of

Physicians’ Survival Predictions in Terminally Ill

Cancer Patients,” British Medical Journal 327 ( July 26, 2003): 195–198.

80. Quoted in article by Jeff Sharlet, “The Truth Can

Comfort the Dying,” Chronicle of Higher Education 46, no. 21 ( January 28, 2000): A20–A24.

81. Lucette Lagnado, “Medicare Head Tackles Criticism

on Hospice Care,” The Wall Street Journal, September 15, 2000; and Nancy-Ann Min DeParle, Administrator,

Health Care Financing Administration, “Letter to

Medicare Hospices,” September 12, 2000.

82. Code of Federal Regulations, Title 42, Chapter IV,

Part 418, Certifi cation of Terminal Illness (current to

March 1, 2010).

83. Paul Sisson, “Scripps Wins Bidding for Hospice

Property” (April 30, 2013); www.utsandiego.com/

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 625des35465_notes_601-670.indd 625 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

626 n o t e s

105. Jon Hendricks and C. Davis Hendricks, Aging in Mass Society: Myths and Realities (Cambridge, Mass.: Winthrop, 1977), pp. 284–285.

106. Hendricks and Hendricks, Aging in Mass Society, p. 282.

107. See Muriel R. Gillick, “Do We Need to Create

Geriatric Hospitals?” Journal of the American Geriatrics Society 50, no. 1 (2002): 174–177.

108. Arthur L. Kellerman and Ricardo Martinez, “The

ER, Fifty Years On,” New England Journal of Medicine 364, no. 24 ( June 15, 2011): 2278–2279.

109. Michael Nurok, “The Death of a Princess and the

Formulation of Medical Competence,” Social Science & Medicine 53 (2001): 1427–1438; quote p. 1436. See also Thomas A. Sancton, “Death of a Princess: Did Princess

Diana Have to Die? A Study in French Emergency

Medicine,” The Internet Journal of Rescue and Disaster Medicine 1, no. 2 (2000).

110. “Deaths and Death Rates by Selected Causes,”

Statistical Abstract of the United States: 2012, 131st ed. (Washington, D.C., 2011); http://www.census.gov/

compendia/statab/ .

111. See, for example, Mickey Eisenberg, Life in the Bal- ance: Emergency Medicine and the Quest to Reverse Sudden Death (New York: Oxford University Press, 1997).

112. See, for example, Frank Huyler, The Blood of Strangers: Stories from Emergency Medicine (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1999).

113. “Family Presence During Cardiac Resuscitation,”

New England Journal of Medicine 368, no. 11 (March 14, 2013): 1060–1062. This article includes opposing com-

mentary by James Downer and Patricia A. Kritek.

114. Jerome Groopman, “Being There: Should

Patients’ Families See What Happens in the Emer-

gency Room?” The New Yorker (April 3, 2006): 34–39; quote p. 34.

115. James K. Crissman and Mary A. Crissman, “Noti-

fi cations of Death,” in Macmillan Encyclopedia of Death and Dying, ed. Robert Kastenbaum (New York: Macmil- lan, 2003), p. 620.

116. Resources include Kenneth V. Iserson, Grave Words: Notifying Survivors About Sudden, Unexpected Deaths (Tucson, Ariz.: Galen Press, 1999); R. Moroni Leash, Death Notifi cation: A Practical Guide to the Process (Hinesburg, Vt.: Upper Access, 1994); Janice H. Lord,

Breaking the Bad News with Concern for the Professional and Compassion for the Survivor (Washington, D.C.: U.S. Department of Justice, n.d.); C. A. J. McLauchlan,

“Handling Distressed Relatives and Breaking Bad

News,” British Medical Journal 301 (November 17, 1990): 1145–1149; and Alan Stewart and Janice Harris Lord,

90. “The Debate in Hospice Care,” Journal of Oncology Practice 4, no. 3 (2008): 153–157.

91. Stephen R. Connor, Martha Tecca, Judi Lund-

Person, and Joan Teno, “Measuring Hospice Care,”

Journal of Pain and Symptom Management 28, no. 4 (2004): 316 –328; quote p. 325.

92. Inge B. Corless, “Hospice and Hope: An Incompat-

ible Duo,” American Journal of Hospice and Palliative Care (May–June 1992): 10–12.

93. See Nicky James and David Field, “The Routiniza-

tion of Hospice: Charisma and Bureaucratization,”

Social Science & Medicine 34, no. 12 (1992): 1363–1375.

94. Corless, “Settings for Terminal Care,” p. 331.

95. William M. Lamers, Jr., “Hospice Care and Its

Effect on the Grieving Process,” in Living with Grief When Illness Is Prolonged, ed. Kenneth J. Doka and Joyce Davidson, 67–82 (Washington, D.C.: Hospice Founda-

tion of America, 1997). See also, by Lamers, “Defi ning

Hospice and Palliative Care: Some Further Thoughts,”

Journal of Pain & Palliative Care Pharmacotherapy 16, no. 3 (2002): 65–71; and Inge B. Corless, “Palliative

Care: One Does Not Need to Be Terminally Ill,” in The Nursing Profession and Beyond, ed. Norma L. Chasha, 561–573 (Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage, 2001).

96. “The Debate in Hospice Care,” p. 155.

97. “The Debate in Hospice Care,” p. 156.

98. Information from www.partners.org .

99. Pam Brown, Betty Davies, and Nola Martens,

“Families in Supportive Care––Part II: Palliative Care

at Home: A Viable Care Setting,” Journal of Palliative Care 6, no. 3 (1990): 21–27. See also Tony Chapman, “There’s No Place Like Home,” Theory, Culture & Society 18, no. 6 (2001): 135–146.

100. Carol Levine, “Family Caregiving,” 63–67, The Hastings Center Bioethics Briefi ng Book (Garrison, N.Y.: The Hastings Center, 2009), p. 63.

101. Sylvia Sherwood, Robert Kastenbaum, John N.

Morris, and Susan M. Wright, “The First Months of

Bereavement,” in The Hospice Experiment, ed. Vincent Mor, David S. Greer, and Robert Kastenbaum (Balti-

more: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1988), p. 150.

102. Frank Ostaseski, “Stories of Lives Lived and Now

Ending,” Inquiring Mind: A Journal of the Vipassana Com- munity 10, no. 2 (Spring 1994): 14–16.

103. Allan Kellehear, “Health-Promoting Palliative

Care: Developing a Social Model for Practice,” Mortal- ity 4, no. 1 (1999): 75–82; quote p. 77.

104. April Dembosky, “Stanford Program Ensures No

One Dies Alone,” The Mercury News; www.mercurynews .com August 21, 2009

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 626des35465_notes_601-670.indd 626 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 6 627

of Palliative Care,” Journal of Palliative Care 18, no. 1 (2002): 15–24.

129. Pallimed: A Hospice and Palliative Medicine Blog

(May 22, 2013). See also David E. Weissman, “Moral

Distress in Palliative Care,” Journal of Palliative Medicine 12, no. 10 (2009): 865–866.

130. Danai Papadatou, In the Face of Death: Profession- als Who Care for the Dying and the Bereaved (New York: Springer, 2009), p. 13.

131. Papadatou, In the Face of Death, p. 172.

132. See Graham Loomes and Lynda McKenzie, “The

Use of QALYs in Health Care Decision Making,” Social Science & Medicine 28 (1989): 299–308; and Erik Nord, “The QALY: A Measure of Social Value Rather Than

Individual Utility?” Health Economics 3 (1993): 89–93, as well as “The Trade-Off Between Severity of Illness

and Treatment Effect in Cost-Value Analysis of Health

Care,” Health Policy 24 (1993): 227–238.

133. Callahan, Taming the Beloved Beast, p. 7.

134. Allan Kellehear, Compassionate Cities: Public Health and End of Life Care (New York: Routledge, 2005), p. x.

C H A P T E R 6

1. Alexander Morgan Capron, “The Burden of Deci-

sion,” Hastings Center Report (May–June 1990): 36 –41.

2. “Introduction to Part 2,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk (New

York: Routledge, 2013), p. 51 .

3. On the history of medical ethics, see Albert R. Jon-

sen, The Birth of Bioethics (New York: Oxford University Press, 1998).

4. Alan Meisel, “End-of-Life Care,” 51–54, The Hastings Center Bioethics Briefi ng Book (Garrison, N.Y.: The Hast- ings Center, 2009).

5. See Karen Bullock, “The Infl uence of Culture on

End-of-Life Decision Making,” Journal of Social Work in End-of-Life & Palliative Care 7, no. 1 (2011): 83–98.

6. Timothy E. Quill and Christine K. Cassel, “Non-

abandonment: A Central Obligation for Physicians,”

Annals of Internal Medicine 122, no. 5 (1995): 368–374.

7. John D. Lantos, Do We Still Need Doctors? (New York: Routledge, 1997), pp. 47–48.

8. The President’s Commission for the Study of Ethi-

cal Problems in Medicine and Biomedical and Behav-

ioral Research, Making Health Care Decisions: The Ethical and Legal Implications of Informed Consent in the Patient- Practitioner Relationship, vol. 1, Report, and vol. 3, Studies on the Foundations of Informed Consent (Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Offi ce, 1982).

“The Death Notifi cation Process,” in Handbook of Death & Dying, ed. Clifton D. Bryant, 513–522 (Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage, 2003).

117. Leash, Death Notifi cation, p. 25. See also Alan E. Stewart, “Complicated Bereavement and Posttrau-

matic Stress Disorder Following Fatal Car Crashes:

Recommendations for Death Notifi cation Practice,”

Death Studies 23 (1999): 289–321.

118. Roger Ray, “Death Notifi cation: A Dreaded Duty,”

The Orlando Sentinel, March 21, 2005.

119. Julian Guthrie, “The Saddest Duty: Informing

Families of Loss,” San Francisco Chronicle, April 6, 2003.

120. “Deaths and Death Rates by Selected Causes,”

Statistical Abstract of the United States: 2012, 131st ed. (Washington, D.C., 2011); http://www.census.gov/

compendia/statab/ .

121. Leash, Death Notifi cation, p. 48.

122. Peter Rober and Paul C. Rosenblatt, “Selected

Discourse in a First Conversation About a Family

Death in James Agee’s Novel, A Death in the Family, ” Death Studies 37 (2013): 172–194. This novel describes three days in the life of a family confronted with the

husband/father’s death in a road accident.

123. Leash, Death Notifi cation, p. 52.

124. William M. Lamers, Jr., “How Patient Deaths

Affect Health Professionals: A Plea for More Open

Communication,” Journal of Pharmaceutical Care in Pain & Symptom Control 5, no. 3 (1997): 59–71.

125. See Danai Papadatou, “A Proposed Model of

Health Professionals’ Grieving Process,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 41, no. 1 (2000): 59–77.

126. See, for example, John D. Sugimoto and Kevin

Ann Oltjenbruns, “The Environment of Death and

Its Infl uence on Police Offi cers in the United States,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 43, no. 2 (2001): 145–155; and Laurence Miller, “Tough Guys: Psycho-

therapeutic Strategies with Law Enforcement and

Emergency Services Personnel,” in Stress Management in Law Enforcement, ed. Leonard Territo and James D. Sewell, 317–332 (Durham, N.C.: Carolina Academic

Press, 1999).

127. Morag B. Harris, Mustafa Baloğlu, and James R.

Stacks, “Mental Health of Trauma-Exposed Firefi ght-

ers and Critical Incident Stress Debriefi ng,” Journal of Loss and Trauma 7 (2002): 223–238.

128. See Patricia Boston, Anna Towers, and David

Barnard, “Embracing Vulnerability: Risk and Empa-

thy in Palliative Care,” Journal of Palliative Care 17, no. 4 (2001): 248–253; and Judi Webster and Linda J.

Kristjanson, “‘But Isn’t It Depressing?’: The Vitality

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 627des35465_notes_601-670.indd 627 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

628 n o t e s

21. Sharon R. Kaufman, And a Time to Die: How Ameri- can Hospitals Shape the End of Life (New York: Scribner, 2005), pp. 116 –117.

22. Josh Lakin, “Discussing CPR: What Makes It So

Different?” GeriPal: Geriatrics and Palliative Care Blog (May 24, 2013).

23. Kaufman, And a Time to Die, pp. 49, 74.

24. S. J. Diem and J. D. Lantos, “Cardiopulmonary

Resuscitation on Television: Miracles and Misinfor-

mation,” New England Journal of Medicine 334, no. 24 (1996): 1578–1582.

25. A. Halevy and B. A. Brody, “A Multi-Institutional

Collaborative Policy on Medical Futility,” Journal of the American Medical Association 276, no. 7 (1996): 571–574. See also Donald Joralemon, “Reading Futility: Refl ec-

tions on a Bioethical Concept,” Cambridge Quarterly of Healthcare Ethics 11, no. 2 (2002): 127–133.

26. President’s Commission for the Study of Ethical

Problems in Medicine and Biomedical and Behavioral

Research, Summing Up: Final Report on Studies of the Ethical and Legal Problems in Medicine and Biomedical and Behavioral Research (Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Offi ce, March 1983), p. 31. See also the com-

panion volume, Deciding to Forego Life-Sustaining Treat- ment: A Report on the Ethical, Medical, and Legal Issues in Treatment Decisions (Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Offi ce, March 1983).

27. Berkow, ed., Merck Manual of Medical Information: Home Edition, p. 16.

28. See, by C. G. Prado, Choosing to Die: Elective Death and Multiculturalism (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2008), which addresses the question of when

and whether it is rational to end one’s life to escape

devastating terminal illness; Coping with Choices to Die (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2011), which

deals with the reasoning that needs to be done by fam-

ily and friends of individuals who choose to die; and

The Last Choice: Preemptive Suicide in Advanced Age, 2nd ed. (Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1998), which puts

forth the argument that there are good reasons to end

one’s life as an unforced anticipation of demeaning

and agonizing developments.

29. In the Matter of Karen Quinlan: The Complete Legal Briefs, Court Proceedings and Decisions in the Superior Court of New Jersey (1975) and In the Matter of Karen Quinlan, Volume 2: The Complete Briefs, Oral Arguments, and Opinion in the New Jersey Supreme Court (1976; Arlington, Va.: University Publications of America).

30. Background to the Cruzan case and arguments on

both sides of the issue can be found in Hastings Center Report ( January–February 1990): 38–50. See also Ron

9. Carl B. Becker, “Japan: Challenges of Caring for

the Aging and Dying,” in Buddhist Care for the Dying and Bereaved, ed. Jonathan S. Watts and Yosiharu Tomatsu, 19–36 (Boston: Wisdom, 2012), p. 24.

10. Donald Oken, “What to Tell Cancer Patients: A Study

of Medical Attitudes,” JAMA 175 (1961): 1120–1128.

11. D. H. Novack and others, “Changes in Physicians’

Attitudes Toward Telling the Cancer Patient,” JAMA 241 (March 2, 1979): 897–900.

12. See Daniel J. Klenow and George A. Youngs,

“Changes in Doctor/Patient Communication of a

Terminal Prognosis: A Selective Review and Critique,”

Death Studies 11, no. 4 (1987): 263–277.

13. D. H. Novack and others, “Physicians’ Attitudes

Toward Using Deception to Resolve Diffi cult Ethical

Problems,” JAMA 261 (May 26, 1989): 2980–2985.

14. Robert Berkow, ed., The Merck Manual of Medical Information: Home Edition (Whitehouse Station, N.J.: Merck Research Laboratories, 1997), p. 16.

15. Daniel Callahan, The Troubled Dream of Life: Living with Mortality (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1993), p. 48.

16. Margot L. White and John C. Fletcher, “The Story

of Mr. and Mrs. Doe: ‘You Can’t Tell My Husband He’s

Dying; It Will Kill Him,’” in The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and Dying, ed. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland (Mountain View, Calif.: Mayfi eld,

1995), pp. 148–153.

17. The SUPPORT Principal Investigators, “A Con-

trolled Trial to Improve Care for Seriously Ill Hospi-

talized Patients: The Study to Understand Prognoses

and Preferences for Outcomes and Risks of Treatment

(SUPPORT),” Journal of the American Medical Association 274, no. 20 (1995): 1591–1598. See also in Journal of the American Geriatrics Society 48, no. 5 (2000): Russell S. Phillips and others, “Findings from SUPPORT and

HELP: An Introduction” (pp. S1–S5); Neil S. Wenger

and others, “Physician Understanding of Patient

Resuscitation Preferences: Insights and Clinical Impli-

cations” (pp. S44–S51); and Carol E. Golin and others,

“A Prospective Study of Patient-Physician Communica-

tion About Resuscitation” (pp. S52–S60).

18. Stephen R. Connor, Hospice and Palliative Care: The Essential Guide, 2nd ed. (New York: Routledge, 2009), p. 39.

19. Madeline Jacobs, “Ethical and Legal Issues Related

to Dying and End-of-Life Care,” in Handbook of Thanatol- ogy, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 43–49; quote p. 49.

20. Stephen R. Connor, Hospice and Palliative Care: The Essential Guide, 2nd ed. (New York: Routledge, 2009), p. 94.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 628des35465_notes_601-670.indd 628 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 6 629

also, in the same issue of Death Studies, Peter H. Ditto, “What Would Terri Want? On the Psychological Chal-

lenges of Surrogate Decision Making,” pp. 135–148.

39. See Steve Perlmutter, “Physician-Assisted Suicide: A

Medicolegal Inquiry,” Michigan State University Journal of Medicine & Law 15 (Spring 2011): 203–225. See also How- ard Brody, “Assisted Death: A Compassionate Response

to a Medical Failure,” New England Journal of Medicine 327 (November 5, 1992): 1384–1388; Eugenie Anne Gifford,

“ Artes Moriendi: Active Euthanasia and the Art of Dying,” UCLA Law Review 40 (1993): 1545–1585; and Albert R. Jonsen, “Living with Euthanasia: A Futuristic Scenario,”

Journal of Medicine and Philosophy 18 (1993): 241–251.

40. Physician-assisted suicide (PAS) conducted by

Michigan pathologist Jack Kevorkian brought the issue

of hastened deaths of patients to widespread media and

public attention during the 1990s. At the time of his

sentencing in 1999 for the second-degree murder of

Thomas Youk, Dr. Kevorkian had provided aid-in-dying

to more than 100 individuals since he began his active

crusade to legalize physician-assisted suicide in 1990.

41. See Choice in Dying, “Physician-Assisted Suicide:

Vacco v. Quill and Washington v. Glucksberg,” www.choices .org/sctdec.htm ; John Dinan, “Rights and the Political

Process: Physician Assisted Suicide in the Aftermath of

Washington v. Glucksberg,” Publius: The Journal of Federal- ism 31, no. 4 (2001): 1–21; and James L. Werth, Jr., and Judith R. Gordon, “Amicus Curiae Brief for the United

States Supreme Court on Mental Health Issues Associ-

ated with ‘Physician-Assisted Suicide,’” Journal of Coun- seling & Development 80, no. 2 (2002): 160–172.

42. Oregon Health Division, “2008 Summary of

Oregon’s Death with Dignity Act,” http://oregon.gov/

DHS/ph/pas/ar-index.shtml .

43. Timothy E. Quill and Jane Greenlaw, “Physician-

Assisted Death,” in The Hastings Center Bioethics Briefi ng Book, pp. 137–141 (Garrison, N.Y.: The Hastings Cen- ter, 2009); quote p. 138.

44. Ira Byock, “Dying: After the Court Ruling,” The Wall Street Journal, June 25, 1997, p. A14.

45. John A. Pridonoff, “Introduction,” in Hospice and Hemlock: Retaining Dignity, Integrity, and Self-Respect in End-of-Life Decisions, ed. Michele A. Trepkowski (Eugene, Ore.: Hemlock Society, 1993).

46. See P. Rousseau, “Terminal Sedation in the Care

of Dying Patients,” Archives of Internal Medicine 1556, no. 16 (1996): 1785–1786.

47. M. Maltoni and others, “Palliative Sedation Ther-

apy Does Not Hasten Death: Results from a Prospec-

tive Multicenter Study,” Annals of Oncology 20 (2009): 1163–1169.

Hamel, “The Supreme Court’s Decision in the Cru- zan Case: A Synopsis,” Bulletin of the Park Ridge Center (September 1990): 18, 20; and Thane Josef Messinger,

“A Gentle and Easy Death: From Ancient Greece to

Beyond Cruzan Toward a Reasoned Legal Response to

the Societal Dilemma of Euthanasia,” Denver University Law Review 71, no. 1 (1993): 175–251.

31. Lois Shepherd, If That Ever Happens to Me: Making Life and Death Decisions After Terri Schiavo (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2009), p. 67.

32. See Arthur L. Caplan, James J. McCartney, and

Dominic A. Sisti, eds., The Case of Terri Schiavo: Ethics at the End of Life (Amherst, N.Y.: Prometheus, 2006); Ken- neth Goodman, ed., The Case of Terri Schiavo: Ethics, Politics, and Death in the 21st Century (New York: Oxford University Press, 2009); and Shepherd, If That Ever Happens to Me.

33. Jon Eisenberg, Using Terri: The Religious Right’s Con- spiracy to Take Away Our Rights (San Francisco: Harper- Collins, 2005), p. 160. The term persistent vegetative state was coined in 1972 by Scottish neurosurgeon Bryan

Jennett and American neurologist Fred Plum in the

medical journal The Lancet.

34. Madeline Jacobs, “Ethical and Legal Issues in End-

of-Life Decision Making,” pp. 102, 103.

35. William Colby, Unplugged: Reclaiming Our Right to Die in America (New York: Amacom, 2006), p. 95.

36. Kenneth Goodman, “Ethics Schmethics: The Schi-

avo Case and the Culture Wars,” University of Miami Law Review 61, no. 3 (2007): 863–870. See also Ronald E. Cranford, “What is a Minimally Conscious State,”

Western Journal of Medicine 176 (2002): 129–130; Joseph J. Fins, “Brain Injury: The Vegetative and Minimally

Conscious States,” 15–19, The Hastings Center Bioethics Briefi ng Book (Garrison, N.Y.: The Hastings Center, 2009); and J. T. Giacino and others, “The Minimally

Conscious State: Defi nition and Diagnostic Criteria,”

Neurology 58 (2002): 349–353. For a review of the underlying mechanisms and classifi cation of disorders

of consciousness, see Andrew M. Goldfi ne and Nicho-

las D. Schiff, “Consciousness: Its Neurobiology and the

Major Classes of Impairment,” Neurologic Clinics 29, no. 4 (2011): 723–737.

37. Rebecca Dresser, “Schiavo and Contemporary

Myths about Dying,” University of Miami Law Review 61, no. 3 (2007): 821–846.

38. Kathy L. Cerminara, “Tracking the Storm: The

Far-Reaching Power of the Forces Propelling the Schi-

avo Case,” Stetson Law Review 35, no. 1 (2005): 147–178, quote p. 176; and “Theresa Marie Schiavo’s Long Road

to Peace,” Death Studies 30, no. 2 (2006): 101–112. See

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 629des35465_notes_601-670.indd 629 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

630 n o t e s

Ethics of Lament,” Linacre Quarterly 56 (August 1989): 64–69; and J. Slomka, “What Do Apple Pie and Moth-

erhood Have to Do with Feeding Tubes and Caring

for the Patient?” Archives of Internal Medicine 155, no. 12 (1995): 1258–1263.

56. Dena S. Davis, “Old and Thin,” Second Opinion 15 (November 1990): 26 –32; see also, in the same issue,

Ronald M. Green, “Old and Thin: A Response,” pp.

34–39. On Japanese attitudes toward withdrawing

nutrition and hydration, see Emiko Konishi, Anne J.

Davis, and Toshiaki Aiba, “The Ethics of Withdrawing

Artifi cial Food and Fluid from Terminally Ill Patients:

An End-of-Life Dilemma for Japanese Nurses and

Families,” Nursing Ethics 9, no. 1 (2002): 7–19.

57. Alan R. Fleishman, “Neonatal Care,” in The Hast- ings Center Bioethics Briefi ng Book, pp. 121–124 (Garri- son, N.Y.: The Hastings Center, 2009); quote p. 121.

58. Fleishman, “Neonatal Care,” p. 122.

59. Quoted in Richard A. McCormick, “To Save or

Let Die: The Dilemma of Modern Medicine,” in Ethical Issues in Death and Dying, ed. Robert F. Weir (New York: Columbia University Press, 1977), pp. 173–184.

60. See, for example, Peter A. Clark, “Medical Futility

in Pediatrics: Is It Time for a Public Policy?” Journal of Public Health Policy 23, no. 1 (2002): 66 –89; and John J. Paris, Jeffrey Ferranti, and Frank Reardon, “From

the Johns Hopkins Baby to Baby Miller: What Have

We Learned from Four Decades of Refl ection on Neo-

natal Cases?” Journal of Clinical Ethics 12, no. 3 (2001): 207–214.

61. Alan R. Fleishman, “Neonatal Care,” p. 124.

62. See Peter H. Ditto and others, “Advance Directives

as Acts of Communication,” Archives of Internal Medicine 161 (2001): 421–430; Angela Fagerlin and others, “Pro-

jection in Surrogate Decisions About Life-Sustaining

Medical Treatments,” Health Psychology 20, no. 3 (2001): 166 –175; and Angela Fagerlin and others, “The Use of

Advance Directives in End-of-Life Decision Making:

Problems and Possibilities,” American Behavioral Scien- tist 46, no. 2 (2002): 268–283.

63. Lisa M. Krieger, “New Survey Sheds Light on Cali-

fornians’ End-of-Life Wishes,” San Jose Mercury News (February 14, 2012), A10.

64. Judi Lund Person, “Regulatory Issues in the Care

of Dying,” in Dying, Death, and Bereavement: A Challenge for Living, 2nd ed., ed. Inge B. Corless, Barbara B. Germino, and Mary A. Pittman (New York: Springer,

2003), p. 205.

65. California Medical Association, “California Natu-

ral Death Act,” www.cmanet.org .

48. Drew Rosielle, “Palliative Sedation and Shortened

Survival,” Pallimed, www.pallimed.org , July 2, 2009.

49. Quoted in Quill and Greenlaw, “Physician-Assisted

Death,” p. 141.

50. Euthanasia can be involuntary, nonvoluntary, or

voluntary. Involuntary euthanasia refers to the death of a patient by a medical practitioner without the patient’s consent. A notorious example was the medicalized kill-

ing done by the Nazi regime. Involuntary euthanasia

is usually considered murder. Nonvoluntary euthanasia occurs when a surrogate decision maker (not the

patient himself or herself) asks a physician for assis-

tance to end another person’s life. This could occur, for

instance, when a family member assumes life-or-death

decisions for an ailing relative. Nonvoluntary euthana-

sia is the category usually applied to child euthanasia

when a seriously ill child is deemed incompetent to

make a decision for himself or herself. Voluntary eutha- nasia is the intentional termination of a patient’s life at

his or her request by someone other than the patient.

In practice, this usually means that a competent patient

requests direct assistance to die, and he or she receives

assistance from a qualifi ed medical practitioner.

51. “It’s Over, Debbie,” Journal of the American Medical Association 259, no. 2 ( January 8, 1988): 272.

52. See Raphael Cohen-Almagor, “Why the Neth-

erlands?” Journal of Law, Medicine & Ethics 30, no. 1 (2002): 95–104, and “‘Culture of Death’ in the Neth-

erlands: Dutch Perspectives,” Issues in Law & Medicine 17, no. 2 (2001): 167–179; Herbert Hendin, “The Dutch

Experience,” Issues in Law & Medicine 17, no. 3 (2002): 223–246; and Herman H. van der Kloot Meijburg,

“How Health Care Institutions in the Netherlands

Approach Physician-Assisted Death,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 32, no. 3 (1995–1996): 179–196.

53. Charles J. Dougherty, “The Common Good, Ter-

minal Illness, and Euthanasia,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 154–164.

54. Thomas Attig, “Can We Talk? On the Elusiveness

of Dialogue,” Death Studies 19, no. 1 (1995): 1–19.

55. R. J. Connelly, “The Sentiment Argument for

Artifi cial Feeding of the Dying,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 20, no. 3 (1989–1990): 229–237. See also Germain Grisez and Kevin O’Rourke, “Should

Nutrition and Hydration Be Provided to Permanently

Unconscious and Other Mentally Disabled Persons,”

Issues in Law & Medicine 5 (1989): 165–196; James J. McCartney and Jane Mary Trau, “Cessation of the

Artifi cial Delivery of Food and Fluids: Defi ning Ter-

minal Illness and Care,” Death Studies 14, no. 5 (1990): 435–444; Steven H. Miles, “Nourishment and the

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 630des35465_notes_601-670.indd 630 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 6 631

80. Kaja Whitehouse, What Your Lawyer May Not Tell You About Your Family’s Will (New York: Warner, 2006), p. 219.

81. Jackson P. Rainer, “Ethical and Legal Issues in

Assessment and Intervention,” in Handbook of Thana- tology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, pp. 255–261; quote p. 260.

82. See Kenneth J. Doka, “The Monkey’s Paw: The

Role of Inheritance in the Resolution of Grief,” Death Studies 16, no. 1 (1992): 45–58. For a cross-cultural comparison of inheritance practices, see Misa Izuhara,

“Care and Inheritance: Japanese and English Perspec-

tives on the ‘Generational Contract,’” Ageing and Soci- ety 22 (2002): 61–77.

83. Colleen DeBaise, “‘Family Letters’ Go Beyond

Wills,” The Wall Street Journal (November 16, 2005), p. D3.

84. See www.ethicalwill.com ; and Barry K. Baines,

Ethical Wills: Putting Your Values on Paper (New York: Perseus, 2002).

85. Richard Costa, “Challenges of Being an Estate

Executor,” Capitola Soquel Times (May 1, 2006), p. 31.

86. Survey by EZLaw Wills and Estate Planning,

reported in The Week (September 9, 2011), p. 34.

87. See Joseph M. Belth, Life Insurance: A Consumer’s Handbook, 2nd ed. (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1985).

88. Karen E. Steinhauser, Nicholas A. Christakis, and

others, “Factors Considered Important at the End of

Life by Patients, Family, Physicians, and Other Care

Providers,” JAMA 284, no. 19 (November 15, 2000): 2476 –2482.

89. Kaufman, And a Time to Die, p. 93.

90. Leon R. Kass, “Practicing Ethics: Where’s the

Action?” Hastings Center Report ( January–February 1990): 5–12.

91. Jitaro Mizuno, “A Caring Heart and Integrated

Knowledge: An Ethics Which Inquires into the Rela-

tionship Between the Self and Others,” Reitaku Uni-

versity, Japan.

92. Jeffrey P. Bishop, The Anticipatory Corpse: Medicine, Power, and the Care of the Dying (Notre Dame, Ind.: University of Notre Dame Press, 2011), p. 7. See also,

by Bishop and others, “Reviving the Conversation

Around CPR/DNR,” American Journal of Bioethics 10, no. 1 (2010): 61–67.

93. Richard B. Gilbert, “End-of-Life Care: Spirituality

and Religion,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher Balk, pp. 63–71; quote p. 63.

66. Quotes by H. Harrison Sadler, M.D., in “Califor-

nia’s Natural Death Act—Medical Staff Conference,

University of California, San Francisco,” Western Jour- nal of Medicine 128 (1978): 318–330.

67. Angela Fagerlin and Carl E. Schneider, “Enough:

The Failure of the Living Will,” Hastings Center Report 34, no. 2 (2004): 30–42; quote p. 38.

68. Fagerlin and Schneider, “Enough,” pp. 30–42.

69. President’s Council on Bioethics, Ethical Caregiving in Our Aging Society (Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Offi ce, 2005), p. 55.

70. Current information can be found at www.POLST

.org .

71. Marilyn J. Field and Christine K. Cassel, eds.,

Approaching Death: Improving Care at the End of Life (Washington, D.C.: National Academies Press, 1997).

72. Information can be found at www.agingwith-

dignity.org .

73. The authors thank Senator John C. Danforth,

sponsor of this measure, for providing information

about its provisions. See also Elizabeth Leibold McClo-

skey, “The Patient Self-Determination Act,” Kennedy Institute of Ethics Journal 1, no. 2 (1991): 163–169.

74. Madeline Jacobs, “Ethical and Legal Issues in End-

of-Life Decision Making,” p. 104.

75. Information and forms for each state can be

downloaded from Caring Connections at www.caring-

info.org .

76. Susan Dolan and Audrey Vizzard, The End of Life Advisor: Personal, Legal, and Medical Considerations for a Peaceful, Dignifi ed Death (New York: Kaplan, 2009), p. 73.

77. Zelda Foster, “The Struggle to End My Father’s

Life,” in Dying, Death, and Bereavement, 2nd ed., ed. Corless, Germino, and Pittman, pp. 79–85. See also

Reneé Semonin Holleran, “When Is Dead, Dead? The

Ethics of Resuscitation in Emergency Care,” Nursing Clinics of North America 37, no. 1 (2002): 11–18.

78. Christian Sinclair, “Do Not (Attempt) Resuscita-

tion vs. Allow Natural Death,” Pallimed, www.pallimed .org , March 5, 2009.

79. Barton E. Bernstein, “Lawyer and Counselor as

an Interdisciplinary Team: Interfacing for the Termi-

nally Ill,” Death Education 1, no. 3 (Fall 1977): 277–291; “Lawyer and Therapist as an Interdisciplinary Team:

Serving the Terminally Ill,” Death Education 3, no. 1 (Spring 1979): 11–19; and “Lawyer and Therapist as an

Interdisciplinary Team: Serving the Survivors,” Death Education 4, no. 2 (Summer 1980): 179–188.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 631des35465_notes_601-670.indd 631 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

632 n o t e s

15. E. Mansell Pattison, The Experience of Dying (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1977), and “The

Living-Dying Process,” in Psychological Care of the Dying, ed. Charles Garfi eld (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1978),

pp. 163–168. See also Karin L. Olson and others,

“Linking Trajectories of Illness and Dying,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 42, no. 4 (2001): 293–308.

16. Avery D. Weisman, On Dying and Denying: A Psychi- atric Study of Terminality (New York: Behavioral Publica- tions, 1972).

17. Elisabeth Kübler-Ross, On Death and Dying (New York: Macmillan, 1969). See also Colin Murray Parkes,

“Classics Revisited: Elisabeth Kübler-Ross, On Death and Dying: A Reappraisal,” Mortality 18, no. 1 (2013): 94–97.

18. Abraham Verghese, “On Death and Dying,” The Wall Street Journal, August 31, 2004.

19. Charles A. Corr and Donna M. Corr, “Culture,

Socialization, and Dying,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk, 3–8

(New York: Routledge, 2013), p. 8. See also Charles A.

Corr, “Coping with Dying: Lessons That We Should

and Should Not Learn from the Work of Elisabeth

Kübler-Ross,” Death Studies 17 (1993): 69–83.

20. Harold Brodkey, “To My Readers,” in The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and Dying, ed. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland (Mountain View,

Calif.: Mayfi eld, 1995), pp. 295–300; quote p. 298. See

also Robert Connelly, “Living with Death: The Mean-

ing of Acceptance,” Journal of Humanistic Psychology 43, no. 1 (2003): 45–63.

21. Kenneth J. Doka, “Coping with Life-Threatening

Illness: A Task Model,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 32, no. 2 (1995–1996): 111–122. See also Doka, Counseling Individuals with Life-Threatening Illness, and Living with Life-Threatening Illness: A Guide for Patients, Their Families, and Caregivers (New York: Lexington, 1993).

22. Doka, “Coping with Life-Threatening Illness,”

p. 120.

23. Herman Feifel, “Psychology and Death: Meaning-

ful Rediscovery,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 19–28; quote p. 23. See also Susan

Folkman and Steven Greer, “Promoting Psychological

Well-Being in the Face of Serious Illness: When Theory,

Research and Practice Inform Each Other,” Psycho- Oncology 9, no. 1 (2000): 11–19. See also Susan Folkman, “Positive Psychological States and Coping with Severe

Stress,” Social Science & Medicine 45, no. 8 (1997): 1207– 1221; and Susan Folkman and Judith Tedlie Moskowitz,

“Positive Affect and the Other Side of Coping,” American Psychologist 55, no. 6 (2000): 647–654.

C H A P T E R 7

1. Lee Lipsenthal, Enjoy Every Sandwich: Living Each Day As If It Were Your Last (New York: Crown Archetype, 2011), p. 110.

2. Paul M. Insel and Walton T. Roth, Connect Core Concepts in Health, 13th ed. (New York: McGraw-Hill, 2013), pp. 414, 428–429, 432.

3. Randall C. Thompson et al., “Atherosclerosis Across

4000 Years of Human History: The Horus Study of

Four Ancient Populations,” The Lancet Early Online Pub- lication (March 11, 2013).

4. Cassandra Lorius, “Taboo,” in Key Ideas in Human Thought, ed. Kenneth McLeish (New York: Facts on File, 1993), p. 731.

5. S. Kay Toombs, “Chronic Illness and the Goals of

Medicine,” Second Opinion 21, no. 1 ( July 1995): 11–19. See also Charles E. Rosenberg, “The Tyranny of Diag-

nosis: Specifi c Entities and Individual Experience,”

Milbank Quarterly 80, no. 2 (2002): 237–260.

6. S. Lochlann Jain, “Survival Odds: Mortality in Cor-

porate Time,” Current Anthropology 52, Supplement 3 (April 2011): S45–S55.

7. Ira Byock, The Best Care Possible: A Physician’s Quest to Transform Care Through the End of Life (New York: Avery, 2012), p. 1.

8. Byock, The Best Care Possible, pp. 25, 26.

9. See Maggie Callanan and Patricia Kelley. Final Gifts: Understanding the Special Awareness, Needs, and Communi- cations of the Dying (New York: Bantam, 1997).

10. Arthur W. Frank, “The Pedagogy of Suffering:

Moral Dimensions of Psychological Therapy and

Research with the Ill,” Theory & Psychology 2, no. 4 (1992): 467–485.

11. See Kevin P. Kaut, “Religion, Spirituality, and

Existentialism Near the End of Life: Implications for

Assessment and Application,” American Behavioral Scien- tist 46, no. 2 (2002): 220–234.

12. Charles A. Corr, “A Task-Based Approach to Cop-

ing with Dying,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 24, no. 2 (1991–1992): 81–94. See also Charles A. Corr and

Kenneth J. Doka, “Current Models of Death, Dying,

and Bereavement,” Critical Care Nursing Clinics of North America 6, no. 3 (1994): 545–552.

13. Barney G. Glaser and Anselm L. Strauss, Awareness of Dying (Chicago: Aldine, 1965). See also Neil Small and Merryn Gott, “The Contemporary Relevance of

Glaser and Strauss,” Mortality 17, no. 4 (2012): 355–377.

14. Kenneth J. Doka, Counseling Individuals with Life- Threatening Illness (New York: Springer, 2009), p. 206.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 632des35465_notes_601-670.indd 632 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 7 633

37. Robert L. Wrenn, Dan Levinson, and Danai Papa-

datou, End of Life Decisions: Guidelines for the Health Care Provider (Tucson: University of Arizona Health Sci- ences Center, 1996), p. 20.

38. Byock, The Best Care Possible, p. 244.

39. Anne Hughes, Betty Davies, and Maria Gud-

mundsdottir, “‘Can You Give Me Respect?’: Experi-

ences of the Urban Poor on a Dedicated AIDS Nursing

Home Unit,” Journal of the Association of Nurses in AIDS Care 19, no. 5 (2008): 342–356; and Anne Hughes, Maria Gudmundsdottir, and Betty Davies, “Everyday

Struggling to Survive: Experiences of the Urban Poor

Living with Advanced Cancer,” Oncology Nursing Forum 34, no. 6 (2007): 1113–1118.

40. Anemona Hartocollis and Ford Fessenden,

“In New York City, Two Versions of End-of-Life Care,”

New York Times, May 30, 2008, http://www.nytimes .com/2008/05/30/nyregion/30hospitals.html?_r 5 0# .

See also Kevin Fiscella and Kathleen Holt, “Racial

Disparity in Hypertension Control: Tallying the Death

Toll,” Annals of Family Medicine 6, no. 6 (2008): 497–502.

41. Harvey Max Chochinov, “Dignity-Conserving

Care: A New Model for Palliative Care: Helping the

Patient Feel Valued,” JAMA 287, no. 17 (2002): 2253– 2260; quote p. 2254.

42. Andy Hau Yan Ho et al., “Living and Dying with

Dignity in Chinese Society: Perspectives of Older Pal-

liative Care Patients in Hong Kong,” Age and Ageing 42, no. 4 (2013): 455–461. See also Ho and others, “Dignity

Amidst Liminality: Healing Within Suffering Among

Chinese Terminal Cancer Patients,” Death Studies (2013), in press, as well as Cecilia L. W. Chan and oth-

ers, “The Blessings and Curses of Filial Piety on Dignity

at the End of Life: Lived Experiences of Hong Kong

Chinese Adult Children Caregivers,” Journal of Ethnic and Cultural Diversity in Social Work 21 (2012): 277–296.

43. Insel and Roth, Connect Core Concepts in Health, p. 444.

44. Paolo Venies, “Defi nition and Classifi cation of

Cancer: Monothetic or Polythetic?” Theoretical Medicine 14 (1993): 249–256.

45. Robert Berkow, ed., The Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, 16th ed. (Rahway, N.J.: Merck Research Laboratories, 1992), p. 1275.

46. Laurence McCahill and Betty Ferrell, “Palliative

Surgery for Cancer Pain,” Western Journal of Medicine 176, no. 2 (2002): 107–110.

47. See Berkow, ed., Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, 16th ed., pp. 1276–1277; Merck Manual of Medi- cal Information: Home Edition (Whitehouse Station, N.J.: Merck Research Laboratories, 1997), p. 801; and R. A.

Hope and others, Oxford Handbook of Clinical Medicine, 3rd ed. (New York: Oxford University Press, 1994), p. 768.

24. Avery D. Weisman, The Coping Capacity: On the Nature of Being Mortal (New York: Human Sciences Press, 1986).

25. Weisman, On Dying and Denying. See also, by Weis- man, Coping with Cancer (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1979); and “Thanatology,” in Comprehensive Textbook of Psychiatry, ed. O. Kaplan (Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins, 1980).

26. Betsy L. Fife, “The Measurement of Meaning in

Illness,” Social Science & Medicine 40, no. 8 (1995): 1021–1028. See also, by Fife, “The Conceptualization

of Meaning in Illness,” Social Science & Medicine 38, no. 2 (1994): 309–316.

27. See Phoebe Cramer, “Coping and Defense Mecha-

nisms: What’s the Difference?” Journal of Personality 66, no. 6 (1998): 919–946; and “Defense Mechanisms in

Psychology Today: Further Processes for Adaptation,”

American Psychologist 55, no. 6 (2000): 637–646.

28. Russell Noyes, Jr., and others, “Illness Fears in the

General Population,” Psychosomatic Medicine 62, no. 3 (2000): 318–325.

29. Edwin S. Shneidman, Lives and Deaths: Selections from the Works of Edwin S. Shneidman, ed. Antoon A. Leenaars (Philadelphia: Brunner-Mazel, 1999), p. 260.

30. Therese A. Rando, Grief, Dying, and Death: Clinical Interventions for Caregivers (Lexington, Mass.: Lexing- ton, 1993).

31. Richard S. Lazarus, “Toward Better Research

on Stress and Coping,” American Psychologist 55, no. 6 (2000): 665–673.

32. Mark R. Somerfi eld and Robert R. McCrae, “Stress

and Coping Research: Methodological Challenges,

Theoretical Advances, and Clinical Applications,”

American Psychologist 55, no. 6 (2000): 620–625.

33. Folkman and Greer, “Promoting Psychological

Well-Being in the Face of Serious Illness.”

34. On deferred demises, see Bruce Bower, “Death

Waits for No One,” Science News 165, no. 23 (2004): 356; and Judith A. Skala and Kenneth E. Freedland, “Death

Takes a Raincheck,” Psychosomatic Medicine 66 (2004): 382–386.

35. Tone Rustøen and Ingela Wiklund, “Hope in

Newly Diagnosed Patients with Cancer,” Cancer Nurs- ing 23, no. 3 (2000): 214–219. See also Jaklin Eliott and Ian Olver, “The Discursive Properties of ‘Hope’:

A Qualitative Analysis of Cancer Patients’ Speech,”

Qualitative Health Research 12, no. 2 (2002): 173–193.

36. Mary-Jo Del Vecchio Good and others, “Oncology

and Narrative Time,” Social Science & Medicine 38, no. 6 (1994): 855–862.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 633des35465_notes_601-670.indd 633 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

634 n o t e s

62. Gerry Cox, Death and the American Indian (Omaha, Neb.: Grief Illustrated Press, 2010), p. 55. See also

Gerry R. Cox, “The Native American Way of Death,”

in Handbook of Death and Dying, ed. Clifton D. Bryant, 631–639 (Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage, 2003).

63. Robert T. Trotter II and Juan Antonio Chavira,

Curanderismo: Mexican-American Folk Healing, 2nd ed. (Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1997).

64. Kaja Finkler, “Sacred Healing and Biomedicine

Compared,” Medical Anthropology Quarterly 8, no. 2 ( June 1994): 178–197.

65. Berkow, ed., Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, 16th ed., pp. 2593–2596.

66. Lawrence J. Schneiderman, “Alternative Medicine

or Alternatives to Medicine? A Physician’s Perspective,”

Cambridge Quarterly of Healthcare Ethics 9, no. 1 (2000): 83–97.

67. Michael Specter, “The Power of Nothing,” The New Yorker (December 12, 2008), pp. 30–36.

68. Steven B. Perlmutter, “Clinical Use of Placebos:

Medicine, Neuroscience, Ethics, and the Law,” 8 Ten- nessee Journal of Law and Policy 8 (2012).

69. Insel and Roth, Connect Core Concepts in Health, pp. 566 –567.

70. Michael Specter, “The Power of Nothing,” The New Yorker (December 12, 2008), p. 31.

71. Specter, Power of Nothing," p. 31.

72. Perlmutter, “Clinical Use of Placebos.”

73. Perlmutter, “Clinical Use of Placebos.”

74. Rodolfo Passalacqua, Francesco Campione, and

Caterina Caminiti, “Patients’ Opinions, Feelings, and

Attitudes After a Campaign to Promote the Di Bella

Therapy,” The Lancet 353 (April 17, 1999): 1310–1314; quote p. 1313.

75. Doris M. Schoenhoff, The Barefoot Expert: The Inter- face of Computerized Knowledge Systems and Indigenous Knowledge Systems (Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1993), pp. 13–14.

76. Insel and Roth, Connect Core Concepts in Health, p. 579.

77. “Medicinal Use of Marijuana,” New England Journal of Medicine 368 (February 28, 2013): 866 –868.

78. Stanley J. Watson, John A. Benson, Jr., and Janet E.

Joy, “Marijuana and Medicine: Assessing the Science

Base,” Archives of General Psychiatry 57 (2000): 547–552. See also Inge B. Corless and others, “Marijuana Effec-

tiveness as an HIV Self-Care Strategy,” Clinical Nursing Research 18, no. 2 (2009): 172–193; Franjo Grotenher- men, “The Medical Use of Cannabis in Germany,”

48. See Berkow, ed., Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, 16th ed., pp. 55, 1277, 1287; and Merck Man- ual: Home Edition, pp. 799, 802; and Hope and others, Oxford Handbook of Clinical Medicine, 3rd ed., p. 768.

49. Jane C. Weeks et al., “Patients’ Expectations about

Effects of Chemotherapy for Advanced Cancer,” New England Journal of Medicine 367 (October 25, 2012): 1616 –1625.

50. Insel and Roth, Connect Core Concepts in Health, p. 565.

51. Insel and Roth, Connect Core Concepts in Health, p. 566.

52. Roxanne Nelson, “Framework for Experimental

Drug Use in Terminally Ill Patients,” Medscape Medical News, www.medscape.com .

53. Berkow, ed., Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, 16th ed., p. 1263.

54. The National Center for Complementary and

Alternative Medicine (NCCAM) is the federal gov-

ernment’s lead agency for scientifi c research on

complementary and alternative medicine. It is one of

the twenty-seven institutes and centers that make up

the National Institutes of Health (NIH) within the

U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. See

http://nccam.nih.gov/about/ataglance .

55. Terri A. Winnick, “From Quackery to ‘Comple-

mentary’ Medicine: The American Medical Profession

Confronts Alternative Therapies,” Social Problems 52, no. 1 (2005): 38–61. For critical views on CAM, see the

website Quackwatch ( www.quackwatch.org ).

56. David K. Reynolds, A Thousand Waves: A Sensible Life Style for Sensitive People (New York: Quill/Morrow, 1990).

57. See Josep M. Comelles, “The Role of Local Knowl-

edge in Medical Practice: A Trans-Historical Perspec-

tive,” Culture Medicine and Psychiatry 24, no. 1 (2000): 41–75.

58. Quoted in Anne Fadiman, The Spirit Catches You and You Fall Down: A Hmong Child, Her American Doc- tors, and the Collision of Two Cultures (New York: Farrar, Straus and Giroux, 1997), p. 261. See also Arthur

Kleinman, Patients and Healers in the Context of Culture (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1980).

59. Lori Arviso Alvord and Elizabeth Cohen Van

Pelt, The Scalpel and the Silver Bear (New York: Bantam, 1999).

60. Biography, Dr. Lori Arviso Alvord, National

Library of Medicine. www.nlm.nih.gov/changingthefa-

ceofmedicine/physicians/biography_7.html.

61. Biograpy, Dr. Lori Arviso Alvord.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 634des35465_notes_601-670.indd 634 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 7 635

92. Perry G. Fine and Clarinda Mac Low, “The Last

Chance for Comfort: An Update on Pain Management

at the End of Life,” Medscape, December 26, 2005, www.medscape.com .

93. Berkow, ed., Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, 16th ed., pp. 1409, 1412. See also Fredrica A. Preston,

Siew Tzuh Tang, and Ruth McCorkle, “Symptom Man-

agement for the Terminally Ill,” in Dying, Death, and Bereavement: A Challenge for Living, 2nd ed., ed. Inge Corless, Barbara B. Germino, and Mary A. Pittman

(New York: Springer, 2003), pp. 145–180.

94. See Fine and Low, “The Last Chance for Comfort.”

95. Ana Blasco, Miguel Berzosa, Vega Iranzo, and

Carlos Camps, “Update in Cancer Pain,” Cancer & Che- motherapy Reviews 4, no. 2 (2009): 95–109.

96. Stephen R. Connor, “Palliative Care is a Human

Right,” ADEC Forum 37, no. 3 (2011): 1, 3–4, 10.

97. Ana Blasco, Miguel Berzosa, Vega Iranzo, and

Carlos Camps, “Update in Cancer Pain,” Medscape Cancer & Chemotherapy Reviews, August 28, 2009, www .medscape.com .

98. See Betty Rolling Ferrell, ed., “Issues in Cancer

Pain Management: Models of Success,” Cancer Practice 10, Supplement 1 (2002): whole issue.

99. See Karen L. Schumacher and others, “Pain Man-

agement Autobiographies and Reluctance to Use Opi-

oids for Cancer Pain Management,” Cancer Nursing 25, no. 2 (2002): 125 –133; and James L. Werth, Jr.,

“Reinterpreting the Controlled Substances Act:

Predictions for the Effect on Pain Relief,” Behavioral Sciences and the Law 20, no. 3 (2002): 287–305.

100. See David Clark, “‘Total Pain’: Disciplinary Power

and the Body in the Work of Cicely Saunders, 1958–1967,”

Social Science & Medicine 49 (1999): 727–736.

101. Robert Kastenbaum and Claude Normand,

“Deathbed Scenes as Imagined by the Young and

Experienced by the Old,” Death Studies 14, no. 3 (1990): 201–217.

102. Barney G. Glaser and Anselm L. Strauss, Time for Dying (Chicago: Aldine, 1968). See also Pattison, The Experience of Dying.

103. Scott A. Murray, Marilyn Kendall, Kirsty Boyd,

and Aziz Sheikh, “Illness Trajectories and Palliative

Care,” British Medical Journal 330 (2005): 1007–1011.

104. Murray and others, “Illness Trajectories and Pal-

liative Care,” p. 1011.

105. Inge B. Corless, “Dying Well: Symptom Control

Within Hospice Care,” in Annual Review of Nursing Research, vol. 12, ed. J. J. Fitzpatrick and J. S. Stevenson (New York: Springer, 1994), pp. 125–146.

Journal of Drug Issues 32, no. 2 (2002): 607–633; and Donald I. Templer, Hiroko Arikawa, and Patrick C.

Gariety, “Psychotropic Drugs in Terminally Ill Patients:

A Review of the Clinical and Research Literature,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 49, no. 3 (2004): 249–274.

79. Gregory T. Carter and Bruce Mirken, “Medical

Marijuana: Politics Trumps Science at the FDA,” Medscape General Medicine, May 24, 2006, www.medscape.com .

80. “Is Marijuana Bad for You? The Week (November 30, 2012), p. 11.

81. Anson Shupe and Jeffrey K. Hadden, “Symbolic

Healing,” Second Opinion 12 (November 1989): 74–97.

82. “Tapping Human Potential: An Interview with

Norman Cousins,” Second Opinion 14 ( July 1990): 57–71. See also Norman Cousins, Anatomy of an Ill- ness as Perceived by the Patient: Refl ections on Healing and Regeneration (New York: Norton, 1979).

83. Kjell Kallenberg and Carl-Rheinhold Braken-

hielm, “Pain and Suffering as Existential Questions in

Palliative Care,” European Journal of Palliative Care 1, no. 1 (1994): 54–56.

84. S. Deandrea, M. Montanari, L. Moja, and G.

Apolone, “Prevalence of Undertreatment in Cancer

Pain: A Review of Published Literature,” Annals of Oncology 19, no. 12 (2008): 1985–1991.

85. Marcia K. Merboth and Susan Barnason, “Managing

Pain: The Fifth Vital Sign,” Nursing Clinics of North America 35, no. 2 (2000): 375–383. See also Marni Jackson,

Pain: The Fifth Vital Sign (New York: Crown, 2002).

86. Alison Twycross, “Education About Pain: A

Neglected Area?” Nurse Education Today 20, no. 3 (2000): 244–253. See also, by Twycross, “Educating

Nurses About Pain Management: The Way Forward,”

Journal of Clinical Nursing 11, no. 6 (2002): 705–714.

87. Berkow, ed., Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, 16th ed., p. 1409.

88. Dorland’s Illustrated Medical Dictionary, 26th ed. (Philadelphia: Saunders, 1985), p. 954.

89. Yasmin Hawkins and others, “Changes in Sexual-

ity and Intimacy After the Diagnosis and Treatment of

Cancer: The Experience of Partners in a Sexual Rela-

tionship with a Person with Cancer,” Cancer Nursing 32, no. 4 (2009): 271–280.

90. Linda C. Garro, “Culture, Pain and Cancer,” Jour- nal of Palliative Care 6, no. 3 (1990): 34–44. See also David B. Morris, The Culture of Pain (Berkeley: Univer- sity of California Press, 1991).

91. “Interview with Yvette Colón,” Hospice Foundation of America, www.hospicefoundation.org .

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 635des35465_notes_601-670.indd 635 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

636 n o t e s

120. Cosh, “Spiritual Care of the Dying,” p. 136.

121. Tenshin Reb Anderson, quoted by Frank Osta-

seski, “Stories of Lives Lived and Now Ending,” Inquir- ing Mind: A Journal of the Vipassana Community 10, no. 2 (Spring 1994), p. 29.

122. Marcia Lattanzi-Licht, “Religion, Spirituality,

and Dying,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 9–16; p. 10.

123. Makoto Ueda, Modern Japanese Writers and the Nature of Literature (Stanford, Calif.: Stanford Univer- sity Press, 1976), p. 193.

124. Jitaro Mizuno, “A Caring Heart and Integrated

Knowledge: An Ethics Which Inquires into the Rela-

tionship Between the Self and Others” (Reitaku

University, Japan, 2005). Unpublished manuscript.

125. Janmarie Silvera, “Crossing the Border,” in

The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 301–302.

C H A P T E R 8

1. Mike Parker Pearson, The Archaeology of Death and Burial (College Station: Texas A&M University Press, 2000), p. 194. See also Robert W. Habenstein and Wil-

liam M. Lamers, Funeral Customs the World Over, rev. ed. (Milwaukee: Bulfi n Printers, 1974).

2. See Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strick-

land, “Ceremonies,” in Encyclopedia of Death and Dying, ed. Glennys Howarth and Oliver Leaman (New York:

Routledge, 2001), pp. 84–85.

3. Dominic Janes, Romans and Christians (Charleston, S.C.: Tempus, 2002), p. 32.

4. Christopher Hall, “For As Long As It Takes,”

February 22, 2009, www.theage.com.au . See also

Amitai Etzioni, “Toward a Theory of Public Ritual,”

Sociological Theory 18, no. 1 (2000): 44–59.

5. David L. Hall and Roger T. Ames, “Understanding

Order: The Chinese Perspective,” in From Africa to Zen: An Invitation to World Philosophy, ed. Robert S. Solomon and Kathleen M. Higgins, 1–23 (Lanham, Md.: Row-

man and Littlefi eld, 1993), p. 8.

6. Vanderlyn R. Pine, “Funerals: Life’s Final Cer-

emony,” in A Challenge for Living: Dying, Death, and Bereavement, ed. Inge B. Corless, Barbara B. Germino, and Mary A. Pittman (Boston: Jones & Bartlett, 1995),

pp. 159–171. See also Jenny Hockey, “Encountering the

‘Reality of Death’ Through Professional Discourse: The

Matter of Materiality,” Mortality 1, no. 1 (1996): 45–60.

7. Jennifer Hildebrand, “Funerals,” in Greenwood Ency- clopedia of African American Folklore, ed. Anand Prahlad, 478–479 (Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 2005).

106. See Diane M. Thomas and Brenda Moretta Guer-

rero, “Terminal Restlessness in the Dying: Hospice

Attitudes and Practices,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 46, no. 1 (2002–2003): 77–90.

107. Eric J. Cassell, “Dying in a Technological Society,”

in Death Inside Out: The Hastings Center Report, ed. Peter Steinfels and Robert M. Veatch (New York: Harper &

Row, 1974), pp. 43–48; see also, by Cassell, The Nature of Suffering and the Goals of Medicine (New York: Oxford University Press, 1991); Glaser and Strauss, Awareness of Dying; and David Sudnow, Passing On: The Social Organiza- tion of Dying (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1967).

108. Talcott Parsons, The Social System (New York: Free Press, 1951).

109. Marjorie Kagawa-Singer, “Redefi ning Health:

Living with Cancer,” Social Science & Medicine 37, no. 3 (1993): 295–304.

110. See Russell Noyes, Jr., and John Clancy, “The

Dying Role: Its Relevance to Improved Patient Care,”

Psychiatry 40 (February 1977): 41–47.

111. Robert J. Baugher and others, “A Comparison

of Terminally Ill Persons at Various Time Periods to

Death,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 20, no. 2 (1989–1990): 103–155.

112. Allan Kellehear and Terry Lewin, “Farewells by

the Dying: A Sociological Study,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 19, no. 4 (1988–1989): 275–292.

113. Byock, The Best Care Possible, p. 76.

114. Stephen R. Connor, Hospice and Palliative Care: The Essential Guide, 2nd ed. (New York: Routledge, 2009), p. 12.

115. Arthur W. Frank, “The Pedagogy of Suffering:

Moral Dimensions of Psychological Therapy and

Research with the Ill,” Theory & Psychology 2, no. 4 (1992): 467–485; see also, by Frank, “What Kind of

Phoenix? Illness and Self-Knowledge,” Second Opinion 18, no. 2 (October 1992): 31–41.

116. Thomas Lyons, e-mail message to authors, May

25, 2013.

117. Allan Kellehear, The Inner Life of the Dying Person (New York: Columbia University Press, in press).

118. Ira Byock, “Personal Health and Human Develop-

ment in Life-Threatening Conditions,” in Handbook of Psychiatry in Palliative Medicine, 2nd ed., ed. Harvey Max Chochinov and William Breitbart, 281–299 (New

York: Oxford University Press, 2009). See also Ira

Byock, Dying Well: The Prospect for Growth at the End of Life (New York: Riverhead, 1997).

119. Roderick Cosh, “Spiritual Care of the Dying,” in

Dying, Death, and Bereavement: A Challenge for Living, ed. Corless, Germino, and Pittman, pp. 131–143.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 636des35465_notes_601-670.indd 636 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 8 637

19. See Ben H. Bagdikian, The Information Machines: Their Impact on Men and the Media (New York: Harper & Row, 1971), pp. 39, 59; and Bradley Greenberg,

“Diffusion of News of the Kennedy Assassination,”

Public Opinion Quarterly 28, no. 2 (Summer 1964): 225–232.

20. See Peter Svensson, “Deaths of Gamers Leave

Their Online Lives in Limbo,” Associated Press (March 14, 2009).

21. Quoted in Daniel Landis, “WoW Gamer Kicked

from Guild, Too Dead To Log In,” Philadelphia Gaming News Examiner (March 15, 2009).

22. J. Z. Young, Programs of the Brain (New York: Oxford University Press, 1978), p. 255.

23. Vernon Reynolds and Ralph Tanner, The Social Ecology of Religion (New York: Oxford University Press, 1995), p. 213.

24. John R. Elliott, “Funerary Artifacts in Contempo-

rary America,” Death Studies 14, no. 6 (1990): 601–612.

25. Federal Trade Commission, Compliance Guide- lines: Trade Regulation Rule on Funeral Industry Practices (Washington, D.C., 1984).

26. See Robert W. Habenstein and William M. Lam-

ers, The History of American Funeral Directing (Milwau- kee: Bulfi n Printers, 1962). See also Gary Laderman,

Rest in Peace: A Cultural History of Death and the Funeral Home in Twentieth-Century America (New York: Oxford University Press, 2003).

27. See Glennys Howarth, Last Rites: The Work of the Modern Funeral Director (Amityville, N.Y.: Baywood, 1996).

28. Benito and Azzaro quotes from Jeanene Harlick,

“Local Undertakers Survive Recession, Stave Off Ste-

reotypes,” Santa Cruz Sentinel, June 2, 2003.

29. Harlick, “Local Undertakers Survive Recession,

Stave Off Stereotypes.”

30. NFDA Funeral Service Facts. http://nfda.org/

about-funeral-service-/trends-and-statistics.html .

31. O. Duane Weeks and Catherine Johnson, “Devel-

oping a Successful Aftercare Program,” The Director 67, no. 12 (December 1995): 12–18.

32. LeRoy Bowman, The American Funeral: A Study in Guilt, Extravagance, and Sublimity (Washington, D.C.: Public Affairs Press, 1959).

33. Jessica Mitford, The American Way of Death (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1963), pp. 16 –19.

34. D. van Vuure, “The Relatives Asked for a Duo-

Committal for Their Parents,” Thanos 22 (1996): 28–30.

8. Michael A. Goldwasser, “Wakes,” in Greenwood Ency- clopedia of African American Folklore, ed. Anand Prahlad, 1359–1361 (Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 2005); see

also, by Goldwasser, in the same volume, “Nine-Night

Rituals,” pp. 908–909.

9. See Charles Reagan Wilson, “Funerals,” in Folklife, ed. Glenn Hinson and William Ferris, Volume 14 of

Encyclopedia of Southern Culture (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 2009), pp. 102–104.

10. Glenys Caswell, “Beyond Words: Some Uses of

Music in the Funeral Setting,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 64, no. 4 (2011–2012): 319–334.

11. Sue Adamson and Margaret Holloway, “A Sound

Track of Your Life: Music in Contemporary UK Funer-

als,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 65, no. 1 (2012): 33–54; quote p. 49.

12. Deborah Noye, Encyclopedia of the End: Mysterious Death in Fact, Fancy, Folklore, and More (Boston: Hough- ton Miffl in, 2008), p. 93.

13. Alma Williams Freeman, “A Special Love: Spirit of

New Orleans,” The International Review of African Ameri- can Art 17, no. 2 (2002): 14–15.

14. Hilary Mac Austin, “Brass Bands,” in Greenwood Encyclopedia of African American Folklore, ed. Anand Prahlad, 156 (Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 2005).

See also Tashel C. Bordere, “Second-Lining at Death

in New Orleans,” The Forum: Newsletter of the Association for Death Education and Counseling 31, no. 4 (2005): 1, 3.

15. William G. Hoy, Do Funerals Matter? The Purposes and Practices of Death Rituals in Global Perspective (New York: Routledge, 2013), p. 22.

16. Thomas Lynch, The Undertaking: Life Studies from the Dismal Trade (New York: Norton, 1997), p. 21.

17. David Sudnow, Passing On: The Social Organization of Dying (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1967), pp. 153–168.

18. Ronald K. Barrett, “Contemporary African-American

Funeral Rites and Traditions,” in The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and Dying, ed. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland (Mountain View, Calif.: Mayfi eld, 1995),

pp. 80–92, quote p. 88; and, also by Barrett, “The Legacy

of Traditional African-American Funeral Rites,” Thanos 16 (October 1994): 18–20; “Affi rming and Reclaiming

African-American Funeral Rites,” The Director 66, no. 11 (October 1994): 36–40; and “Psychocultural Infl uences

on African American Attitudes Toward Death, Dying,

and Funeral Rites,” in Personal Care in an Impersonal World, ed. John Morgan (Amityville, N.Y.: Baywood, 1993),

pp. 213–230. See also Elaine Nichols, ed., The Last Miles of the Way: African-American Homegoing Traditions, 1890– Present (Columbia: South Carolina State Museum, 1989).

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 637des35465_notes_601-670.indd 637 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

638 n o t e s

49. “Other Services––Estimated Revenue,” Statistical Abstract of the United States: 2012, 131st ed. (Washington, D.C., 2011). http://www.census.gov/compendia/

statab/.

50. NFDA Funeral Service Facts. http://nfda.org/

about-funeral-service-/trends-and-statistics.html .

51. Ronny E. Turner and Charles Edgley, “Death as

Theatre: A Dramaturgical Analysis of the American

Funeral,” Sociology and Social Research 60, no. 4 (1976): 377–392. See also Liam Hyland and Janice M. Morse,

“Orchestrating Comfort: The Role of Funeral Direc-

tors,” Death Studies 19, no. 5 (1995): 453–474.

52. Kenneth V. Iserson, Death to Dust: What Happens to Dead Bodies? 2nd ed. (Tucson, Ariz.: Galen Press, 2001), p. 226; see also pp. 241–257 for a detailed

description of embalming and other body-preparation

procedures.

53. Edward C. Johnson and Melissa Johnson Williams,

“Dr. Charles DeCosta Brown, Civil War Embalming

Surgeon and the Masonic Order,” American Funeral Director 120, no. 9 (September 1997): 74–78.

54. Vanderlyn Pine, “The Care of the Dead: A Histori-

cal Portrait,” in Death and Dying: Challenge and Change, ed. Robert Fulton, Eric Markusen, Greg Owen, and

Jane L. Scheiber (San Francisco: Boyd & Fraser, 1978),

p. 276; see also, by Pine, Caretaker of the Dead: The Ameri- can Funeral Director (New York: Irvington, 1985).

55. Briefl y summarized, exceptions to this require-

ment occur when (1) state or local law requires

embalming or (2) there are “exigent circumstances,”

such as (a) when a family member or other authorized

person cannot be contacted despite diligent efforts,

and (b) there is no reason to believe the family does

not want embalming, and (c) after the body has been

embalmed, the family is notifi ed that no fee will be

charged if they choose a funeral that does not require

embalming.

56. Thanos 24 (1997): 9.

57. Stephen Prothero, Purifi ed by Fire: A History of Cre- mation in America (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2001), p. 2.

58. Reynolds and Tanner, The Social Ecology of Religion, p. 221.

59. Iserson, Death to Dust, p. 390.

60. See Niels Bonde and Arne Emil Christensen,

“Dendrochronological Dating for the Viking Age

Ship Burials at Oseberg, Gokstad, and Tune, Norway,”

Antiquity 67 (1993): 575–583.

61. See Bruce A. Iverson, “Bodies for Science,” Death Studies 14, no. 6 (1990): 577–587; Robert D. Reece

35. Carla Sofka, “Cyberfunerals,” in Encyclopedia of Death and the Human Experience, ed. Clifton D. Bryant and Dennis L. Peak, 249–251 (Thousand Oaks, Calif.:

Sage, 2009), pp. 249–250.

36. See, for example, Andre Van Gemert, “The Digital

Death,” Thanos 21 (1996): 18–21; Lucette Lagnado, “Phone Eulogies, Cybermourners Make Funerals into

Virtual Events,” The Wall Street Journal, August 21, 1996, p. B1.

37. www.Legacy.com/NS/about/ . See also Janice

Hume and Bonnie Bressers, “Obituaries Online: New

Connections with the Living—And the Dead,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 60, no. 3 (2009–2010): 255–271.

38. Examples include Virtual Memorial Gardens,

Dearly Departed, Empty Arms, Garden of Remem-

brance, The Virtual Memorial Company, and World

Wide Cemetery. For current Web addresses, an online

search is recommended.

39. Pamela Roberts, “The Living and the Dead: Com-

munity in the Virtual Cemetery,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 49, no. 1 (2004): 57–76; quote p. 57.

40. Brochure, Leif Technologies, 1997.

41. Dan Morse, “Shirts for the Dead Are the New Rage

in Some Inner Cities,” The Wall Street Journal, February 4, 1999. For a related version of inner-city memorial-

ization, see Martha Cooper and Joseph Sciorra, R.I.P.: Memorial Wall Art (New York: Henry Holt, 1994).

42. Cooper and Sciorra, R.I.P.: Memorial Wall Art.

43. Charles O. Collins and Charles D. Rhine, “Road-

side Memorials,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 47, no. 3 (2003): 221–244. See also Holly Everett, Roadside Crosses in Contemporary Memorial Culture (Denton: Uni- versity of North Texas Press, 2002); and Jon K. Reid

and Cynthia L. Reid, “A Cross Marks the Spot: A Study

of Roadside Death Memorials in Texas and Okla-

homa,” Death Studies 25 (2001): 341–356.

44. Jennifer Clark and Ashley Cheshire, “RIP by the

Roadside: A Comparative Study of Roadside Memori-

als in New South Wales, Australia, and Texas, United

States,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 48, no. 3 (2003–2004): 203–222; quote p. 204.

45. Sylvia Grider, “Spontaneous Shrines and Public

Memorialization,” in Death and Religion in a Changing World, ed. Kathleen Garces-Foley, 246 –264 (Armonk, N.Y.: M. E. Sharpe, 2006), p. 255.

46. Grider, “Spontaneous Shrines and Public Memori-

alization,” p. 262.

47. Lynch, The Undertaking, p. 191.

48. Data from the NFDA General Price List Survey.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 638des35465_notes_601-670.indd 638 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 8 639

76. Angelo B. Henderson, “In Detroit, Blacks Turn the

Staid Obit Into a Glossy Art,” The Wall Street Journal, May 1, 2000.

77. Marion K. Pinsdorf, “Greater Dead Heroes than

Live Husbands: Widows as Image-Makers,” Public Rela- tions Review 28 (2002): 283–299.

78. Kathleen Garces-Foley, “Funerals of the Unaf-

fi liated,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 46, no. 4 (2002–2003): 287–302; quote p. 288.

79. Steve Kurutz, “Grave New World,” Details (March 2003), pp. 147–148.

80. Kathleen Garces-Foley and Justin S. Holcomb,

“Contemporary American Funerals: Personalizing Tra-

dition,” in Death and Religion in a Changing World, ed. Kathleen Garces-Foley, 207–227 (Armonk, N.Y.: M. E.

Sharpe, 2006), p. 208.

81. Marilyn Yalom, The American Resting Place: Four Hundred Years of History Through Our Cemeteries and Burial Grounds (Boston: Houghton Miffl in, 2008), p. 274.

82. Garces-Foley and Holcomb, “Contemporary

American Funerals: Personalizing Tradition,” p. 208.

83. Garces-Foley, “Funerals of the Unaffi liated,” p. 295.

84. Douglas J. Davies, “Forms of Disposal,” in Death and Religion in a Changing World, ed. Kathleen Garces- Foley, 228–245 (Armonk, N.Y.: M. E. Sharpe, 2006),

p. 240.

85. Excerpted from Undertaken with Love: A Home Funeral Guide for Congregations and Communities (Oak Ridge, N.C.: Home Funeral Committee Manual Pub-

lishing Group, 2009), p. 5.

86. For information on preplanning a home- or fam-

ily-directed funeral, contact Final Passages, PO Box

1721, Sebastopol, CA 95473, or www.fi nalpassages.org .

87. See, for example, Bob Butz, Going Out Green: One Man’s Adventure Planning His Own Burial (Traverse City, Mich.: Spirituality & Health, 2009).

88. Garces-Foley and Holcomb, “Contemporary

American Funerals: Personalizing Tradition,” p. 221.

89. The Ecopod coffi n, for example, is a recycled

paper coffi n. See www.ecopod.co.uk or www.natural-

burialcompany.com.

90. Eternal Reefs, Inc., www.eternalreefs.com.

91. Katharine Q. Seelye, “Ashes-to-Fireworks Send-Off

for an ‘Outlaw’ Writer,” The New York Times, August 22, 2005.

92. Lou LaGrand, “How to Use Linking Objects as

You Mourn and Continue with Life,” http://ezinearti-

cles.com/?How-to-Use-Linking-Objects-as-You-Mourn-

and-Continue-with-Life&id 5 594394 .

and Jesse H. Ziegler, “How a Medical School (Wright

State University) Takes Leave of Human Remains,”

Death Studies 14, no. 6 (1990): 589–600; and Kathleen A. Schotzinger and Elizabeth Kirkley Best, “Closure

and the Cadaver Experience: A Memorial Service for

Deeded Bodies,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 18, no. 3 (1987–1988): 217–227.

62. Honolulu Star-Bulletin & Advertiser, June 3, 1984.

63. Rick Atkinson, “The Nation’s Cemetery,” National Geographic ( June 2007), pp. 121–137.

64. Sir Raymond Firth, “Foreword,” in The Secret Cem- etery, by Doris Frances, Leonie Kellaher, and Georgina Neophytou (Oxford: Berg, 2005), p. xv.

65. Doris Frances, Leonie Kellaher, and Georgina

Neophytou, The Secret Cemetery (Oxford: Berg, 2005), p. 197.

66. Michael Kammen, Digging Up the Dead: A History of Notable American Reburials (Chicago: University of Chi- cago Press, 2010), p. 198.

67. Jack Goody and Cesare Poppi, “Flowers and Bones:

Approaches to the Dead in Anglo-American and Ital-

ian Cemeteries,” Comparative Studies in Society and His- tory 36, no. 1 (1994): 146 –175.

68. See Diane O. Bennett, “Bury Me in Second Class:

Contested Symbols in a Greek Cemetery,” Anthropologi- cal Quarterly 67, no. 3 (1994): 122–134.

69. “L.A.’s Well-to-Do Get Burial Space,” Associated Press, February 10, 2002. http://www.apnewsarchive .com/2002/L-A-s-Well-to-Do-Get-Burial-Space/

id-8b35c5a0d712cd98b74b804bb8c14105 .

70. Douglas Keister, “A Brief History of the Commu-

nity Mausoleum,” American Cemetery 69, no. 9 (Septem- ber 1997): 20–21, 50–52.

71. See Hali J. Weiss, “In the Long Run: Staying Rel-

evant Amidst Cultural Change,” Cemetery Management ( January 1995): 14–16; and, also by Weiss, “Dust to

Dust: Transforming the American Cemetery,” Tikkun 10, no. 5 (1996): 21–25.

72. NFDA, Cremation Facts. Accessed June 22, 2013.

http://nfda.org/about-funeral-service-/trends-and-

statistics.html .

73. Hoy, Do Funerals Matter? p. 125.

74. Sally Gribbin, “The Social Crisis Facing the Cre-

mation Industry,” Cemetery Management ( January 1994), reprint.

75. James Mackay, The Guinness Book of Stamps Facts & Feats (New York: Canopy, 1992), pp. 157–158; see also Charles A. Fricke, “Death and Funeral Notices on U.S.

Postal Cards,” Scott Stamp Monthly 13, no. 7 (1995): 9, 22.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 639des35465_notes_601-670.indd 639 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

640 n o t e s

6. See Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strick-

land, “Loss,” in Encyclopedia of Death and Dying, ed. Glennys Howarth and Oliver Leaman (New York:

Routledge, 2001), pp. 288–289.

7. Simon Shimson Rubin, Ruth Malkinson, and

Eliezer Wiztum, “On Bereavement Interventions,

Controversy and Consensus,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 263–272; p. 264.

8. See Thomas A. Attig, How We Grieve: Relearning the World (New York: Oxford University Press, 1996); and Jeffrey Kauffman, ed., Loss of the Assumptive World: A Theory of Traumatic Loss (New York: Brunner- Routledge, 2002).

9. Terry Tafoya, “The Widow as Butterfl y: Treatment

of Grief/Depression Among the Sahaptin,” unpub-

lished paper.

10. Philippe Ariès, “The Reversal of Death: Changes

in Attitudes Toward Death in Western Societies,”

in Death in America, ed. David E. Stannard (Phila- delphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1975),

pp. 134 –158.

11. J. William Worden, Grief Counseling and Grief Ther- apy: A Handbook for the Mental Health Practitioner, 4th ed. (New York: Springer, 2009), esp. pp. 39–53.

12. Therese A. Rando, Treatment of Complicated Mourn- ing (Champaign, Ill.: Research Press, 1993).

13. See Robert M. Sapolsky, “The Solace of Patterns,”

The Sciences 34, no. 6 (November–December 1994): 14–16.

14. Sigmund Freud, “Mourning and Melancholia,”

Collected Papers, vol. 4 (New York: Basic Books, 1959), pp. 152–170. Originally published in 1917. See also

Lorraine Siggins, “Mourning: A Critical Survey of the

Literature,” International Journal of Psycho-Analysis 47 (1966): 14–25.

15. See John Bowlby’s three-volume work, Attachment and Loss (New York: Basic Books): vol. 1, Attachment (1969); vol. 2, Separation: Anxiety and Anger (1973); and vol. 3, Loss: Sadness and Depression (1982); and The Making and Breaking of Affectional Bonds (London: Tavis- tock, 1979). See also Dale Vincent Hardt, “An Investi-

gation of the Stages of Bereavement,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 9, no. 3 (1978–1979): 279–285; and Dennis Klass, “John Bowlby’s Model of Grief and the

Problem of Identifi cation,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 18, no. 1 (1987–1988): 13–32.

16. Therese A. Rando, “Grief and Mourning: Accom-

modating to Loss,” in Dying: Facing the Facts, 3rd ed., ed. Hannelore Wass and Robert A. Neimeyer (Wash-

ington, D.C.: Taylor & Francis, 1995), pp. 211–241;

quote p. 212.

93. Nancy C. Reeves and Frederic J. Boersma, “The

Therapeutic Use of Ritual in Maladaptive Grieving,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 20, no. 4 (1989– 1990): 281–291.

94. Onno van der Hart, Coping with Loss: The Thera- peutic Use of Leave-Taking Ritual (New York: Irvington, 1988); and, also by van der Hart, “An Imaginary Leave-

Taking Ritual in Mourning Therapy: A Brief Com-

munication,” The International Journal of Clinical and Experimental Hypnosis 36, no. 2 (1988): 63–69.

95. William Lamers, Sr., quoted in Concerning Death: A Practical Guide for the Living, ed. Earl Grollman (Bos- ton: Beacon Press, 1974), and in Successful Funeral Ser- vice Practice, ed. Howard C. Raether (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1971).

96. William M. Lamers, Jr., “Funerals Are Good for

People: M.D.’s Included,” Medical Economics ( June 23, 1969): 1–4.

97. Alan Wolfelt, “Understanding the Trend Toward

Deritualization of the Funeral,” The Forum: Newsletter of the Association for Death Education and Counseling 20, no. 6 (November–December 1994): 1, 15–17.

98. Sabine Bode and Fritz Roth, Der Trauer Eine Heimat Geben: Für Einen Lebendigen Umgang mit dem Tod [Giving Grief a Home] (Bergisch Gladbach, Ger.: Gustav

Lübbe Verlag, 1998), and Trauer hat Viele Farben [Grief Has Many Colors] (Bergisch Gladbach, Ger.: Ehren-

wirth, 2004).

99. E. S. Craighill Handy and Mary Kawena Pukui,

The Polynesian Family System in Ka-’u, Hawai’i (Rutland, Vt.: Charles E. Tuttle, 1972), p. 157; and Mary Kawena

Pukui, E. W. Haertig, and Catherine A. Lee, Nana I Ke Kumu (Look to the Source), vol. 1 (Honolulu: Hui Hanai; Queen Lili’uokalani Children’s Center, 1972), p. 139.

C H A P T E R 9

1. Georges Bataille, “Sacrifi ce, the Festival, and the

Principles of the Sacred World,” Theory of Religion, trans. Robert Hurley (New York: Zone Books, 1992), p. 48.

2. Simon Shimson Rubin, Ruth Malkinson, and

Eliezer Wiztum, “On Bereavement Interventions:

Controversy and Consensus,” in Handbook of Thanatol- ogy, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk, 263–272 (New York: Routledge, 2013), p. 265.

3. Personal communication.

4. Bob Krizek, “Goodbye Old Friend: A Son’s Farewell

to Comiskey Park,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 25, no. 2 (1992): 87–93.

5. An adaptation of an anonymous reading used in

many funeral and memorial services.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 640des35465_notes_601-670.indd 640 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 9 641

27. Rando, Treatment of Complicated Mourning, p. 53.

28. See Simon Shimshon Rubin, “Psychodynamic

Therapy with the Bereaved: Listening for Confl ict,

Relationship, and Transference,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 39, no. 2 (1999): 83–98; and Paul A. Boelen and others, “Continuing Bonds and Grief: A

Prospective Analysis,” Death Studies 30 (2006): 767–776.

29. Dennis Klass, “Continuing Conversation about

Continuing Bonds,” Death Studies 30 (2006): 843–858; quote p. 851.

30. Lyn H. Lofl and, “Loss and Human Connection:

An Exploration into the Nature of the Social Bond,” in

Personality, Roles, and Social Behavior, ed. William Ickes and Eric S. Knowles (New York: Springer-Verlag, 1982),

pp. 219–242.

31. John D. Kelly, “Grief: Re-forming Life’s Story,”

in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 242–245.

32. Jerome Bruner, “The Narrative Construction of

Reality,” Critical Inquiry 18 (1991): 1–21; quote p. 4.

33. Carolyn Ellis, “‘There Are Survivors’: Telling a

Story of Sudden Death,” Sociological Quarterly 34, no. 4 (1993): 711–730.

34. Mary Anne Sedney, John E. Baker, and Esther

Gross, “‘The Story’ of a Death: Therapeutic Consider-

ations with Bereaved Families,” Journal of Marital and Family Therapy 20, no. 3 (1994): 287–296. See also Jack J. Bauer and George A. Bonanno, “Continuity amid

Discontinuity: Bridging One’s Past and Present in

Stories of Conjugal Bereavement,” Narrative Inquiry 11, no. 1 (2001): 123–158; Kathleen R. Gilbert, “Taking a

Narrative Approach to Grief Research: Finding Mean-

ing in Stories,” Death Studies 26, no. 3 (2002): 223–239; and Brian Schiff, Chaim Noy, and Bertram J. Cohler,

“Collected Stories in the Life Narratives of Holocaust

Survivors,” Narrative Inquiry 11, no. 1 (2001): 159–193.

35. Jane Harper Chelf and others, “Storytelling: A

Strategy for Living and Coping with Cancer,” Cancer Nursing 23, no. 1 (2000): 1–5.

36. Tony Walter, “A New Model of Grief: Bereavement

and Biography,” Mortality 1, no. 1 (1996): 7–25, quote p. 13; see also James A. Thorson, “Qualitative Thana-

tology,” Mortality 1, no. 2 (1996): 177–190.

37. Quoted in Kathleen Fowler, “So New, So New: Art

and Heart in Women’s Grief Memoirs,” Women’s Studies 36, no. 7 (2007): 525–549.

38. Simon Shimson Rubin, Ruth Malkinson, and

Eliezer Wiztum, “On Bereavement Interventions: Con-

troversy and Consensus,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 263–272; p. 271.

17. Erich Lindemann, “The Symptomatology and

Management of Acute Grief,” American Journal of Psy- chiatry 101 (1944): 141–148.

18. Colin Murray Parkes, “Research: Bereavement,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 18, no. 4 (1987–1988): 365–377; quote p. 366.

19. Colin Murray Parkes, “Complicated Grief in the

DSM-5: Problems and Solutions,” in Beyond Kübler-Ross: New Perspectives on Death, Dying, and Grief, ed. Kenneth J. Doka and Amy S. Tucci, 93–111 (Washington, D.C.:

Hospice Foundation of America, 2011), p. 94.

20. See Dennis Klass, “Developing a Cross-Cultural

Model of Grief: The State of the Field,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 39, no. 3 (1999): 153–178.

21. Margaret Stroebe, “Coping with Bereavement: A

Review of the Grief Work Hypothesis,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 26, no. 1 (1992–1993): 19–42. See also George A. Bonanno, ed., “New Directions in

Bereavement Research and Theory (special issue),”

American Behavioral Scientist 44, no. 3 (2001); Torill Christine Lindstrøm, “‘It Ain’t Necessarily So’: Chal-

lenging Mainstream Thinking About Bereavement,”

Family & Community Health 25, no. 1 (2002): 11–21; R. J. Russac, Nina S. Steighner, and Angela I. Canto, “Grief

Work Versus Continuing Bonds: A Call for Paradigm

Integration or Replacement?” Death Studies 26, no. 6 (2002): 463–478; and Margaret Stroebe and others,

“Does Disclosure of Emotions Facilitate Recovery

from Bereavement? Evidence from Two Prospective

Studies,” Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 70, no. 1 (2002): 169–178.

22. See Dennis Klass and Robert Goss, “Spiritual

Bonds to the Dead in Cross-Cultural and Historical

Perspective: Comparative Religion and Modern Grief,”

Death Studies 23, no. 6 (1999): 547–567.

23. Simon Shimson Rubin, Ruth Malkinson, and

Eliezer Wiztum, “On Bereavement Interventions: Con-

troversy and Consensus,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 263–272; p. 265.

24. Dennis Klass, “Solace and Immortality: Bereaved

Parents’ Continuing Bond with Their Children,”

in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 246 –259.

25. Dennis Klass, “The Inner Representation of the

Dead Child and the Worldviews of Bereaved Parents,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 26, no. 4 (1992–1993): 255–272.

26. Phyllis R. Silverman, Steven Nickman, and J. Wil-

liam Worden, “Detachment Revisited: The Child’s

Reconstruction of a Dead Parent,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 260–270.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 641des35465_notes_601-670.indd 641 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

642 n o t e s

Margaret S. Stroebe, Robert O. Hansson, Henk Schut,

and Wolfgang Stroebe, 511–530 (Washington, D.C.:

American Psychological Association, 2008), p. 513. See

also Nadeau, Families Making Sense of Death (Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage, 1997).

47. Nancy L. Moos, “An Integrative Model of Grief,”

Death Studies 19, no. 4 (1995): 337–364, quote p. 337. See also Froma Walsh and Monica McGoldrick, eds.,

Living Beyond Loss: Death in the Family, 2nd ed. (New York: Norton, 2004).

48. See Robert A. Neimeyer and John R. Jordan, “His-

torical and Contemporary Perspectives on Assessment

and Intervention,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2 nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 219–237; p. 224.

49. Stephen J. Fleming and Paul J. Robinson, “The

Application of Cognitive Therapy to the Bereaved,” in

The Challenge of Cognitive Therapy: Applications to Nontra- ditional Populations, ed. T. M. Vallis, J. L. Howes, and P. C. Miller (New York: Plenum Press, 1991), pp. 135–158.

50. Fleming and Robinson, “Application of Cognitive

Therapy to the Bereaved.”

51. Ira Byock, The Best Care Possible: A Physician’s Quest to Transform Care Through the End of Life (New York: Avery, 2012), p. 92 .

52. Sandra L. Bertman, Helen K. Sumpter, and Harry

L. Green, “Bereavement and Grief,” in Introduction to Clinical Medicine, ed. Harry L. Green (Philadelphia: B. C. Decker, 1991), p. 682.

53. See Liam Hyland and Janice M. Morse, “Orches-

trating Comfort: The Role of Funeral Directors,” Death Studies 19, no. 5 (1995): 453–474.

54. Bertman, Sumpter, and Green, “Bereavement and

Grief,” p. 682.

55. See Beverly Raphael and Christine Minkov,

“Abnormal Grief,” Current Opinion in Psychiatry 12, no. 1 (1999): 99–102.

56. Sarah Brabant, “Old Pain or New Pain: A Social

Psychological Approach to Recurrent Grief,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 20, no. 4 (1989–1990): 273–279.

57. M. A. Bull, S. Clark, and K. Duszynski, “Lessons

from a Community’s Response to the Death of Diana,

Princess of Wales,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 46, no. 1 (2002): 35–49.

58. Ira O. Glick, Robert S. Weiss, and Colin Murray

Parkes, The First Year of Bereavement (New York: Wiley, 1974), p. viii; see also Colin Murray Parkes and Robert

S. Weiss, Recovery from Bereavement (New York: Basic Books, 1983); and Robert S. Weiss, “Loss and Recov-

ery,” Journal of Social Issues 44, no. 3 (1988): 37–52.

39. See George A. Bonanno, Anthony Papa, and Kath-

leen O’Neill, “Loss and Human Resilience,” Applied & Preventive Psychology 10, no. 3 (2001): 193–206; Louis A. Gamino, Nancy S. Hogan, and Kenneth W. Sewell,

“Feeling the Absence: A Content Analysis from the

Scott and White Grief Study,” Death Studies 26, no. 10 (2002): 793–813; Judith A. Murray, “Loss as a Universal

Concept: A Review of the Literature to Identify Com-

mon Aspects of Loss in Diverse Situations,” Journal of Loss and Trauma 6, no. 3 (2001): 219–241; and Robert A. Neimeyer, “Reauthoring Life Narratives: Grief Therapy

as Meaning Reconstruction,” Israel Journal of Psychiatry and Related Sciences 38, nos. 3–4 (2001): 171–183.

40. Margaret Stroebe and Henk Schut, “The Dual Pro-

cess Model of Coping with Bereavement” (paper pre-

sented at the Meeting of the International Work Group

on Death, Dying, and Bereavement, Oxford, U.K., June

1995); see also Stroebe and Schut, “The Dual Process

Model of Bereavement: Rationale and Description,”

Death Studies 23, no. 3 (1999): 197–224.

41. Simon Shimshon Rubin, “The Two-Track Model

of Bereavement: Overview, Retrospect, and Prospect,”

Death Studies 23 (1999): 681–714.

42. Simon Shimson Rubin, Ruth Malkinson, and

Eliezer Wiztum, “On Bereavement Interventions: Con-

troversy and Consensus,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 263–272; p. 267.

43. Ruth Malkinson, Simon Shimshon Rubin, and

Eliezer Witztum, “Therapeutic Issues and the Rela-

tionship to the Deceased: Working Clinically with the

Two-Track Model of Bereavement,” Death Studies 30, no. 9 (2006): 797–815; esp. pp. 811–812. See also Ruth

Malkinson, Cognitive Grief Therapy: Constructing a Ratio- nal Meaning to Life Following Loss (New York: Norton, 2007); Ruth Malkinson, Simon Shimshon Rubin, and

Eliezer Witztum, eds., Traumatic and Nontraumatic Loss and Bereavement: Clinical Theory and Practice (Madison, Conn.: Psychosocial Press, 2000); and Rubin, “Two-

Track Model of Bereavement,” pp. 709–710.

44. Colin Murray Parkes, “Bereavement in Adult Life,”

British Medical Journal 316 (1998): 856–859, and “Facing Loss,” British Medical Journal 316 (1998): 1521–1524. See also, by Parkes, “Bereavement Dissected: A Reexamina-

tion of the Basic Components Infl uencing the Reaction

to Loss,” Israel Journal of Psychiatry and Related Sciences 38, nos. 3–4 (2001): 150–156, and “Grief: Lessons from

the Past, Visions for the Future,” Death Studies 26, no. 5 (2002): 367–385.

45. Hannelore Wass, personal communication,

September 15, 2009.

46. Janice Winchester Nadeau, “Meaning-Making in

Bereaved Families,” in Handbook of Bereavement Research and Practice: Advances in Theory and Intervention, ed.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 642des35465_notes_601-670.indd 642 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 9 643

69. Margaret Stroebe and Henk Schut, “Complicated

Grief: A Conceptual Analysis of the Field,” Omega: Jour- nal of Death and Dying 52, no. 1 (2005–2006): 53–70; quote p. 67.

70. See Jerome F. Fredrick, “Grief as a Disease

Process,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 7, no. 4 (1976 –1977): 297–305; and Edgar N. Jackson, “The

Physiology of Crisis,” in his Coping with the Crises of Your Life (New York: Hawthorne Books, 1974), pp. 48–55.

71. Quoted in Jerry E. Bishop, “Secrets of the Heart:

Can It Be ‘Broken’?” The Wall Street Journal, February 14, 1994.

72. Margaret S. Stroebe, “The Broken Heart Phenom-

enon: An Examination of the Mortality of Bereave-

ment,” Journal of Community & Applied Social Psychology 4 (1994): 47–61.

73. W. D. Rees and S. G. Lutkins, “The Mortality of

Bereavement,” British Medical Journal 4 (1967): 13–16.

74. See Nicholas R. Hall and Allan L. Goldstein,

“Thinking Well: The Chemical Links Between Emo-

tions and Health,” The Sciences 26, no. 2 (March/April 1986): 34–40.

75. For a review of these studies, see Colin Murray

Parkes, “Research: Bereavement,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 18, no. 4 (1987–1988): 365–377.

76. George L. Engel, “Sudden and Rapid Death Dur-

ing Psychological Stress,” Annals of Internal Medicine 74 (1971); see also, by Engel, “Emotional Stress and Sud-

den Death,” Psychology Today, November 1977.

77. Colin Murray Parkes, “The Broken Heart,” in his

Bereavement: Studies of Grief in Adult Life, 3rd ed. (Phila- delphia: Routledge, 2001), pp. 14–30; quote p. 17.

78. Edgar N. Jackson, Understanding Grief: Its Roots, Dynamics, and Treatment (Nashville: Abingdon Press, 1957), p. 27; see also, by Jackson, The Many Faces of Grief (Nashville: Abingdon Press, 1977). In an inter- view with the authors, Dr. Jackson described how the

death of his young son became the impetus for his

studies of grief, which became a mechanism for cop-

ing with, understanding, and coming to terms with

the loss.

79. Karen S. Pfost, Michael J. Stevens, and Anne B.

Wessels, “Relationship of Purpose in Life to Grief

Experiences in Response to the Death of a Signifi cant

Other,” Death Studies 13, no. 4 (1989): 371–378.

80. See Paul C. Rosenblatt, “Grief: The Social Con-

text of Private Feelings,” Journal of Social Issues 44, no. 3 (1988): 67–78. See also Carolyn Ambler Walter and

Judith L. M. McCoyd, Grief and Loss Across the Lifes- pan: A Biopsychosocial Perspective (New York: Springer, 2009).

59. Stephen Fleming and Paul Robinson, “Grief and

Cognitive-Behavioral Therapy: The Reconstruction of

Meaning,” in Handbook of Bereavement Research: Conse- quences, Coping, and Care, ed. Margaret S. Stroebe, Robert O. Hansson, Wolfgang Stroebe, and Henk Schut,

647–669 (Washington, D.C.: American Psychological

Association, 2001), p. 647.

60. Therese A. Rando, The Treatment of Complicated Mourning (Champaign, Ill.: Research Press, 1993).

61. Robert O. Hansson and Margaret S. Stroebe,

Bereavement in Late Life: Coping, Adaptation, and Develop- mental Infl uences (Washington, D.C.: American Psycho- logical Association, 2007), p. 172.

62. Therese A. Rando, “The Increasing Prevalence

of Complicated Mourning: The Onslaught Is Just

Beginning,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 26, no. 1 (1992–1993): 43–59.

63. See Louis A. Gamino and R. Hal Ritter, Jr., Ethical Practice in Grief Counseling (New York: Springer, 2009), pp. 250–252. See also Heather L. Servaty-Seib, “Con-

nections Between Counseling Theories and Current

Theories of Grief and Mourning,” Journal of Mental Health Counseling 26, no. 2 (2004): 125–145; esp. pp. 136 –140.

64. Robert A. Neimeyer, Holly G. Prigerson, and Betty

Davies, “Mourning and Meaning,” American Behavioral Science 46, no. 2 (2002): 235–251.

65. Kenneth J. Doka, “Grief and the DSM: A Brief

Q & A,” Huffpost Healthy Living (May 29, 2013); italics added.

66. Excerpted from the statement developed by a

work group at the meeting of the International Work

Group on Death, Dying and Bereavement (IWG)

in Victoria, British Columbia on April 28–May 3,

2013. This statement represents the opinions of the

authors, not the opinions of the Board or member-

ship of IWG. The full text of the statement can be

found on the European Association of Palliative Care

Blog, http://eapcnet.wordpress.com/2013/05/20/

when-does-a-broken-heart-become-a-mental-disorder.

67. Phyllis R. Silverman, “Dying and Bereavement in

Historical Perspective,” in Living with Dying: A Hand- book for End-of-Life Care Practitioners, ed. Joan Berzoff and Phyllis R. Silverman (New York: Columbia Univer-

sity Press, 2004), pp. 128–149; quote p. 144.

68. Jason M. Holland, Robert A. Neimeyer, Paul A.

Boelen, and Holly G. Prigerson, “The Underlying

Structure of Grief: A Taxometric Investigation of

Prolonged and Normal Reactions to Loss,” Journal of Psychopathology and Behavior Assessment 31, no. 3 (2009): 190–201.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 643des35465_notes_601-670.indd 643 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

644 n o t e s

93. Lynne Ann DeSpelder, “Culture and Gender:

Diversity in Dying, Death, and Bereavement” (paper

presented at the VI International Congress of the

International Association of Thanatology and Suici-

dology, Bologna, Italy, June 2005).

94. Arlene Sheskin and Samuel E. Wallace, “Differ-

ing Bereavements: Suicide, Natural, and Accidental

Death,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 7, no. 3 (1976): 229–242.

95. See Robert L. Fulton, “Death, Grief, and Social

Recuperation,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 1, no. 1 (1970): 23–28; and Bruce J. Horacek, “A Heuristic

Model of Grieving After High-Grief Death,” Death Studies 19, no. 1 (1995): 21–31.

96. See Pauline Boss, Ambiguous Loss: Learning to Live with Unresolved Grief (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard Uni- versity Press, 1999).

97. Therese A. Rando, Loss and Anticipatory Grief (Lexington, Mass.: Lexington, 1986), p. 24.

98. See Bernard Schoenberg, Arthur C. Carr, Austin

H. Kutscher, David Peretz, and Ivan K. Goldberg,

eds., Anticipatory Grief (New York: Columbia University Press, 1974), p. 4.

99. Yvonne K. Ameche, “A Story of Loss and Survivor-

ship,” Death Studies 14, no. 2 (1990): 185–198.

100. Carol J. Van Dongen, “Social Context of Post-

suicide Bereavement,” Death Studies 17, no. 2 (1993): 125–141; quote p. 130.

101. See Charles P. McDowell, Joseph M. Rothberg,

and Ronald J. Koshes, “Witnessed Suicides,” Suicide and Life-Threatening Behavior 24, no. 3 (1994): 213–223.

102. Francoise M. Reynolds and Peter Cimbolic,

“Attitudes Toward Suicide Survivors as a Function of

Survivors’ Relationship to the Victim,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 19, no. 2 (1988–1989): 125–133.

103. Lula M. Redmond, Surviving When Someone You Love Was Murdered: A Professional’s Guide to Group Therapy for Families and Friends of Murder Victims (Clear- water, Fla.: Psychological Consultation and Education

Services, 1989), p. 38.

104. See entry on survivors’ grief, by Lynne Ann

DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland, in Encyclopedia of Death and Dying, ed. Howarth and Leaman, pp. 221–223.

105. Terrence Des Pres, The Survivor (New York: Oxford University Press, 1976; Pocket Books, 1977);

and Lawrence L. Langer, Versions of Survival: The Holo- caust and the Human Spirit (Albany: State University of New York Press, 1982). See also Robert Jay Lifton,

Death in Life: Survivors of Hiroshima (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1967).

81. Wolfgang Stroebe and Margaret Stroebe, “Is Grief

Universal? Cultural Variations in the Emotional Reac-

tion to Loss,” in Death and Identity, 3rd ed., ed. Fulton and Bendiksen, p. 197.

82. Daniel Callahan, The Troubled Dream of Life: Living with Mortality (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1993), p. 15.

83. Unni Wikan, “Bereavement and Loss in Two Mus-

lim Communities: Egypt and Bali Compared,” Social Science & Medicine 27, no. 5 (1988): 451–460.

84. Alicia Skinner Cook, “The Family, Larger Sys-

tems, and Loss, Grief, and Mourning,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 171–178; p. 171.

85. Greg Owen, Robert Fulton, and Eric Marcusen,

“Death at a Distance: A Study of Family Bereavement,”

in Death and Identity, 3rd ed., ed. Fulton and Bendik- sen, p. 241.

86. Stephen R. Connor, Hospice and Palliative Care: The Essential Guide, 2nd ed. (New York: Routledge, 2009), p. 88.

87. Fred Sklar and Shirley F. Hartley, “Close Friends

as Survivors: Bereavement Patterns in a ‘Hidden’

Population,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 21, no. 2 (1990): 103–112.

88. See entry on “Grief, Vicarious,” by Lynne Ann

DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland, in Encyclope- dia of Death and Dying, ed. Howarth and Leaman, pp. 225–226.

89. Larry A. Bugen, “Human Grief: A Model for Pre-

diction and Intervention,” American Journal of Orthopsy- chiatry 47, no. 2 (1977): 196 –206.

90. Robert J. Smith, John H. Lingle, and Timothy C.

Brock, “Reactions to Death as a Function of Perceived

Similarity to the Deceased,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 9, no. 2 (1978–1979): 125–138.

91. Richard M. Leliaert, “Spiritual Side of ‘Good

Grief’: What Happened to Holy Saturday?” Death Stud- ies 13, no. 2 (1989): 103–117; quote p. 103.

92. Terry L. Martin and Kenneth J. Doka, Men Don’t Cry . . . Women Do: Transcending Gender Stereotypes of Grief (Philadelphia: Brunner/Mazel, 2000); see also, by

Martin and Doka, “Revisiting Masculine Grief,” in Liv- ing with Grief: Who We Are, How We Grieve, ed. Kenneth J. Doka and Joyce D. Davidson (Washington, D.C.:

Hospice Foundation of America, 1998), pp. 133–142;

and Judith M. Stillion and Susan B. Noviello, “Living

and Dying in Different Worlds: Gender Differences in

Violent Death and Grief,” Illness, Crisis & Loss 9, no. 3 (2001): 247–259.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 644des35465_notes_601-670.indd 644 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 9 645

118. John R. Jordan and Robert A. Neimeyer, “Does

Grief Counseling Work?” Death Studies 27 (2003): 765–786; quote p. 781.

119. Dale G. Larson and William T. Hoyt, “What Has

Become of Grief Counseling? An Evaluation of the

Empirical Foundations of the New Pessimism,” Profes- sional Psychology: Research and Practice 38, no. 4 (2007): 347–355; quote p. 354. See also Connor, Hospice and Palliative Care: The Essential Guide, 2 nd ed., p. 89.

120. Study by Task Force on Community Preventive

Services, published in American Journal of Preventive Medicine (September 2008) and reported by Bruce Bower, “Study Evaluates Kids’ Therapies,” Science News (September 27, 2008), p. 11.

121. Louis A. Gamino and R. Hal Ritter, Jr., Ethical Practice in Grief Counseling (New York: Springer, 2009), p. 215. See also Margaret S. Stroebe, Karolijne Van

Der Houwen, and Henk Schut, “Bereavement Support,

Intervention, and Research on the Internet: A Critical

Review,” in Handbook of Bereavement Research and Prac- tice: Advances in Theory and Intervention, ed. Stroebe and others, pp. 551–574.

122. Silverman, “Dying and Bereavement in Historical

Perspective,” p. 145.

123. David A. Crenshaw, “Life Span Issues and Assess-

ment and Intervention,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 239–244; p. 242.

124. Louis A. Gamino and R. Hal Ritter, Jr., Ethical Prac- tice in Grief Counseling (New York: Springer, 2009), p. 31.

125. Dennis Klass, “Religion and Spirituality in Loss,

Grief, and Mourning,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 127–134; pp. 128–129, 133.

126. Louis A. Gamino and R. Hal Ritter, Jr., Ethical Practice in Grief Counseling (New York: Springer, 2009), p. 38.

127. Margaret Stroebe, Mary M. Gergen, Kenneth J.

Gergen, and Wolfgang Stroebe, “Broken Hearts or

Broken Bonds: Love and Death in Historical Perspec-

tive,” in The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and Dying, ed. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland

(Mountain View, Calif.: Mayfi eld, 1995), pp. 231–241.

128. Mary Kawena Pukui, E. W. Haertig, and Cath-

erine A. Lee, Nana I Ke Kumu (Look to the Source), vol. 1 (Honolulu: Hui Hanai; Queen Lili’uokalani Chil-

dren’s Center, 1972), pp. 135–136, 141.

129. Quoted in Ari L. Goldman, “Confronting Grief,

Not Burying It,” The New York Times, September 7, 2003.

130. Quoted in Jane E. Brody, “Often, Time Beats

Therapy for Treating Grief,” The New York Times, January 27, 2004.

106. See J. William Worden, “Grieving a Loss from

AIDS,” Hospice Journal 7 (1991): 143–150.

107. Ruben Schindler, “Mourning and Bereavement

Among Jewish Religious Families: A Time for Refl ec-

tion and Recovery,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 33, no. 2 (1996): 121–129.

108. See Kenneth J. Doka, “Disenfranchised Grief,”

in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 271–275; and, edited by Doka, Disenfranchised Grief: Recognizing Hidden Sorrow (Lexington, Mass.: Lexing- ton, 1989); and Disenfranchised Grief: New Directions, Challenges, and Strategies for Practice (Champaign, Ill.: Research Press, 2002).

109. Darlene A. Kloeppel and Sheila Hollins, “Double

Handicap: Mental Retardation and Death in the Fam-

ily,” Death Studies 13, no. 1 (1989): 31–38.

110. Kemi Adamolekun, “In-Laws’ Behavior as a Social

Factor in Subsequent Temporary Upsurges of Grief in

Western Nigeria,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 31, no. 1 (1995): 23–34. See also M. A. Sossou, “Widow-

hood Practices in West Africa: The Silent Victims,”

International Journal of Social Welfare 11, no. 3 (2002): 201–209.

111. Phyllis R. Silverman, “Social Support and Mutual

Help for the Bereaved,” in Dying, Death, and Bereave- ment: A Challenge for Living, 2nd ed., ed. Inge Corless, Barbara B. Germino, and Mary A. Pittman (New York:

Springer, 2003), pp. 247–265.

112. Howard R. Winokuer and Darcy L. Harris, Princi- ples and Practice of Grief Counseling (New York: Springer, 2012), p. 15.

113. Glennys Howarth, “Dismantling the Boundaries

Between Life and Death,” Mortality 5, no. 2 (2000): 127–138.

114. Worden, Grief Counseling and Grief Therapy, 4th ed., p. 83.

115. David K. Meagher, “Grief Counseling for the

New Millennium: An Interview with J. William

Worden,” The Thanatology Newsletter 2, no. 4 (2002): 10–12. See also Lawrence G. Calhoun and Richard

G. Tedeshi, eds., Handbook of Posttraumatic Growth: Research and Practice (Mahwah, N.J.: Lawrence Erl- baum, 2006).

116. Henk Schut, Margaret S. Stroebe, Jan Van

Den Bout, and Maaike Terheggen, “The Effi cacy of

Bereavement Interventions: Determining Who Ben-

efi ts,” in Handbook of Bereavement Research: Consequences, Coping, and Care, ed. Stroebe and others, 705–737; p. 731.

117. Jane E. Brody, “Often, Time Beats Therapy for

Treating Grief,” The New York Times, January 27, 2004.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 645des35465_notes_601-670.indd 645 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

646 n o t e s

6. Marilyn J. Field and Richard E. Behrman, eds.,

When Children Die: Improving Palliative and End-of-Life Care for Children and Their Families (Washington, D.C.: National Academies Press, 2003), p. xv.

7. Zlata Filipovic, “Zlata’s Diary: A Child’s Life in Sara-

jevo,” in The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and Dying, ed. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland,

(Mountain View, Calif.: Mayfi eld, 1995); pp. 175–178;

quote p. 178.

8. Dorothy Morgos, J. William Worden, and Leila

Gupta, “Psychosocial Effects of War Experiences Among

Displaced Children in Southern Darfur,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 56, no. 3 (2008): 229–253.

9. Marian Tankink, “‘The Moment I Became Born-

Again the Pain Disappeared’: The Healing of Dev-

astating War Memories in Born-Again Churches in

Mbarara District, Southwest Uganda,” Transcultural Psychiatry 44, no. 2 (2007): 203–231.

10. James Garbarino, “Challenges We Face in Under-

standing Children and War: A Personal Essay,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, 169–174; quote p. 169.

11. Ice-T, “The Killing Fields,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 179–181.

12. Ronald Keith Barrett and Lynne Ann DeSpelder,

“Ways People Die: The Infl uence of Environment on a

Child’s View of Death” (paper presented at the annual

meeting of the Association for Death Education and

Counseling, Washington, D.C., June 26, 1997).

13. Task Force on Community Preventive Services,

“Recommendations to Reduce Psychological Harm

from Traumatic Events Among Children and Adoles-

cents,” American Journal of Preventive Medicine 35, no. 3 (2008): 314–316.

14. Albert Bandura, “Exploration of Fortuitous Deter-

minants of Life Paths,” Psychological Inquiry 9, no. 2 (1998): 95–115; quote p. 96.

15. Rukmini Callimachi, “Katrina’s Children Struggle

with Fears,” Santa Cruz Sentinel, April 23, 2006.

16. Kevin Ann Oltjenbruns, “Developmental Context

of Childhood: Grief and Regrief Pheonomena,” in

Handbook of Bereavement Research: Consequences, Coping, and Care, ed. Margaret S. Stroebe, Robert O. Hansson, Wolfgang Stroebe, and Henk Schut, 169–197 (Wash-

ington, D.C.: American Psyhological Association,

2001), pp. 176 –177.

17. Kevin Ann Oltjenbruns, “Lifespan Issues and Loss,

Grief, and Mourning: Childhood and Adolescence,”

in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk, 149–155 (New York: Rout-

ledge, 2013), p. 153.

131. Nissan Rubin, “Social Networks and Mourning:

A Comparative Approach,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 21, no. 2 (1990): 113–127. See also Jason Castle, “Grief Rituals: Aspects That Facilitate Adjustment to

Bereavement,” Journal of Loss & Trauma 8, no. 1 (2003): 41–71.

132. For more information, contact T.A.P.S., 2001 S

Street NW, Suite 300, Washington, DC 20009; (800)

959–8277.

133. Stephen J. Fleming and Leslie Balmer, “Bereaved

Families of Ontario: A Mutual-Help Model for Families

Experiencing Death,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 281–288; quote p. 288.

134. John Schneider, Stress, Loss, and Grief: Understand- ing Their Origins and Growth Potential (Baltimore: Uni- versity Park Press, 1984), pp. 66 –76.

135. Julie Fritsch with Sherokee Ilse, The Anguish of Loss (Maple Plain, Minn.: Wintergreen Press, 1988).

136. Simon Shimson Rubin, Ruth Malkinson, and

Eliezer Wiztum, “On Bereavement Interventions:

Controversy and Consensus,” in Handbook of Thanatol- ogy, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 263–272; p. 263. See also Margaret S. Stroebe, Robert O. Hansson, and

Henk Schut, “Bereavement Research: 21st Century

Prospects,” in Handbook of Bereavement Research and Practice: Advances in Theory and Intervention, ed. Stroebe and others, pp. 577–603.

C H A P T E R 1 0

1. See Linda Goldman, Breaking the Silence: A Guide to Helping Children with Complicated Grief—Suicide, Homi- cide, AIDS, Violence, and Abuse, 2nd ed. (New York: Brunner-Routledge, 2001).

2. International Work Group on Death, Dying, and

Bereavement, “Children, Adolescents, and Death:

Myths, Realities, and Challenges,” Death Studies 23 (1999): 443–463.

3. Mary Louise Branch and Sabrina A. Brinson,

“Gone But Not Forgotton: Children’s Experience with

Attachment, Separation, and Loss,” Reclaiming Children and Youth 16, no. 3 (Fall 2007): 41–45.

4. See David W. Adams and Eleanor J. Deveau, eds.,

Beyond the Innocence of Childhood. 3 vols. (Amityville, N.Y.: Baywood, 1995); and Phyllis Rolfe Silverman,

Never Too Young to Know: Death in Children’s Lives (New York: Oxford University Press, 2000).

5. See, for example, Fotini Bonoti, Angeliki Leondari,

and Adelais Mastora, “Exploring Children’s Under-

standing of Death: Through Drawings and the Death

Concept Questionnaire,” Death Studies 37 (2013): 47–60.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 646des35465_notes_601-670.indd 646 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 10 647

Bereavement, 2nd ed., ed. Corless, Germino, and Pittman, pp. 287–302. See also, by Davies, Shadows in the Sun: The Experience of Sibling Bereavement in Childhood (Washington, D.C.: Taylor & Francis, 1999).

29. Nancy S. Hogan and Lydia DeSantis, “Things That

Help and Hinder Adolescent Sibling Bereavement,”

Western Journal of Nursing Research 16, no. 2 (1994): 132–153.

30. David E. Balk, “Sibling Death, Adolescent Bereave-

ment, and Religion,” Death Studies 15, no. 1 (1991): 1–20.

31. Nancy Hogan and Lydia DeSantis, “Adolescent Sib-

ling Bereavement: An Ongoing Attachment,” Qualita- tive Health Research 2, no. 2 (1992): 159–177.

32. Field and Behrman, eds., When Children Die, p. xv.

33. William G. Bartholome, “Care of the Dying

Child: The Demands of Ethics,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, 133 –143; quote p. 136.

See also Judith M. Stillion and Danai Papadatou,

“Suffer the Children: An Examination of Psycho-

social Issues in Children and Adolescents with Ter-

minal Illness,” American Behavioral Scientist 46, no. 2 (2002): 299–315.

34. Marie-Bénédicte Dembour, “The Conscious Death

of a Two-Year-Old,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 38, no. 3 (1998–1999): 187–200.

35. Myra Bluebond-Langner, The Private Worlds of Dying Children (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1978).

36. Rebecca R. Kameny and David J. Bearison, “Can-

cer Narratives of Adolescents and Young Adults: A

Quantitative and Qualitative Analysis,” Children’s

Health Care 31, no. 2 (2002): 143–173; quote from

p. 144.

37. See Gregg M. Furth, The Secret World of Drawings: Healing Through Art (Boston: Sigo Press, 1988); and Maare E. Tamm and Anna Granqvist, “The Meaning

of Death for Children and Adolescents: A Phenom-

enographic Study of Drawings,” Death Studies 19, no. 3 (1995): 203–222.

38. Luisa M. Massimo and Daniela A. Zarri, “In

Tribute to Luigi Castagnetta—Drawings: A Narrative

Approach for Children with Cancer,” Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences 1089 (2006): xvi–xxiii.

39. Stan F. Whitsett and others, “Chemotherapy-

Related Fatigue in Childhood Cancer: Correlates,

Consequences, and Coping Strategies,” Journal of Pedi- atric Oncology Nursing 25, no. 2 (2008): 86 –96.

40. Field and Behrman,eds., When Children Die, p. 323.

41. Field and Behrman, eds., When Children Die, p. 180.

18. Illene C. Noppe and Lloyd D. Noppe, “Adolescent

Experiences with Death: Letting Go of Immortality,”

Journal of Mental Health Counseling 26, no. 2 (2004): 146 –167.

19. Illene C. Noppe, Lloyd D. Noppe, and Denise

Bartell, “Terrorism and Resilience: Adolescents’ and

Teachers’ Responses to September 11, 2001,” Death Studies 30 (2006): 41–60.

20. Russell C. Hurd, “A Teenager Revisits Her Father’s

Death During Childhood: A Study in Resilience and

Healthy Mourning,” Adolescence 39, no. 154 (2004): 337–354.

21. Celeste M. Johnson, “African-American Teen Girls

Grieve the Loss of Friends to Homicide: Meaning-

Making and Resilience,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 61, no. 2 (2010): 121–143.

22. See, for example, Jeffrey Lancaster, “Developmen-

tal Stages, Grief, and a Child’s Response to Death,”

Pediatric Annals 40, no. 5 (2011): 277–281.

23. See entry on death of parents, by Lynne Ann

DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland, in Encyclopedia of Death and Dying, ed. Glennys Howarth and Oliver Leaman, 346 –347 (New York: Routledge, 2001). See also Donna

Schuurman, Never the Same: Coming to Terms with the Death of a Parent (New York: St. Martin’s, 2003); and J. William Worden, Children and Grief: When a Parent Dies (New York: Guilford Press, 1996). Classic studies include Erna Furman, A Child’s Parent Dies: Studies in Childhood Bereavement (New Haven, Conn.: Yale Univer- sity Press, 1974); and Robert A. Furman, “The Child’s

Reaction to Death in the Family,” in Loss and Grief: Psy- chological Management in Medical Practice, ed. Bernard Schoenberg et al., 70–86 (New York: Columbia Univer-

sity Press, 1970).

24. Margo Requarth, After a Parent’s Suicide: Helping Children Heal (Sebastopol, Calif.: Healing Hearts, 2006).

25. Grace H. Christ, Karolynn Siegel, and Adolph E.

Christ, “It Never Really Hit Me . . . Until It Actually

Happened,” JAMA: Journal of the American Medical Asso- ciation 288, no. 10 (September 11, 2002): 1269–1278.

26. Phyllis R. Silverman and Madelyn Kelly, A Par- ent’s Guide to Raising Grieving Children: Rebuilding Your Family After the Death of a Loved One (New York: Oxford University Press, 2009), p. 89.

27. Phyllis R. Silverman, Steven Nickman, and J. Wil-

liam Worden, “Detachment Revisited: The Child’s

Reconstruction of a Dead Parent,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 260–270.

28. Betty Davies, “The Study of Sibling Bereave-

ment: An Historical Perspective,” in Dying, Death, and

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 647des35465_notes_601-670.indd 647 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

648 n o t e s

Network on the Social Environment of Children with

Life-Threatening Illnesses,” pp. 47–68; and Ruth T.

Brokstein, Susan O. Cohen, and Gary A. Walco, “Star-

bright World and Psychological Adjustment in Chil-

dren with Cancer: A Clinical Series,” pp. 29–45.

60. Sunshine Foundation, 1041 Mill Creek Drive,

Feasterville, PA 19052, (215) 396 – 4770 or (800) 767–

1976, w w w.sunshinefoundation.org ; Make-A-Wish

Foundation, Suite 400, 4742 24th Street, Phoenix,

A Z 85106, (602) 279 –9474 or (800) 722–9474;

w w w.wish.org .

61. Lori S. Wiener and others, “National Telephone

Support Groups: A New Avenue Toward Psychosocial

Support for HIV-Infected Children and Their Fami-

lies,” Social Work with Groups 16, no. 3 (1993): 55 –71.

62. Heather L. Servaty-Seib, “Death of a Friend Dur-

ing Adolescence,” in Adolescent Encounters with Death, Bereavement, and Coping, ed. David E. Balk and Charles A. Corr, 217–235 (New York: Springer, 2009), p. 218.

63. See the special issue of Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 48, no. 4 (2004) on death-related literature for children, esp. Carol F. Berns, “Bibliotherapy: The Use

of Literature in Working with Bereaved Children,”

pp. 321–336, and Donna Schuurman, “Literature for

Adults to Assist Them in Helping Bereaved Children,”

pp. 415–424.

64. See Myra Bluebond-Langner, In the Shadow of Illness: Parents and Siblings of the Chronically Ill Child (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1996), and

“Worlds of Dying Children and Their Well Siblings,”

Death Studies 13, no. 1 (1989): 1–16.

65. Robert Zucker, The Journey Through Grief and Loss: Helping Yourself and Your Child When Grief Is Shared (New York: St. Martin’s, 2009), p. 2.

66. Nancy L. Malcom, “Images of Heaven and the

Spiritual Afterlife: Qualitative Analysis of Children’s

Storybooks about Death, Dying, Grief, and Bereave-

ment,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 62, no. 1 (2010–2011): 51–76; quote p. 69.

67. This and the following anecdote from Jo-Eileen

Gyulay, The Dying Child (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1978), pp. 17–18.

68. See Mary A. Fristad and others, “The Role of Rit-

ual in Children’s Bereavement,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 42, no. 4 (2001): 321–339; and Phyllis R. Silverman and J. William Worden, “Children’s Under-

standing of Funeral Ritual,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 25, no. 4 (1992): 319–331.

69. Erik Erikson, Childhood and Society (New York: Nor- ton, 1950), p. 233.

42. Betty Davies and others, “Addressing Spirituality

in Pediatric Hospice and Palliative Care,” Journal of Palliative Care 18, no. 1 (2002): 59–67.

43. Field and Behrman, eds., When Children Die, p. 3.

44. Stephen R. Connor, Hospice and Palliative Care: The Essential Guide, 2nd ed. (New York: Routledge, 2009), p. 217.

45. Program Overview ( http://www.dhcs.ca.gov/

services/ppc/Pages/ProgramOverview.aspx#top ). See

also Children’s Hospice and Palliative Care Coalition

( www.childrenshospice.org).

46. Tiffany Hill, “Kid-Size Care,” Honolulu Magazine (November 2011), p. 48.

47. “Children’s Hospice: An Omega Interview [by

Robert Kastenbaum] with Ida M. Martinson,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 31, no. 4 (1995): 253–261.

48. Andrea C. Walker, “Life Span Issues and End-of-

Life Decision Making,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 81–89; p. 83.

49. Louis A. Gamino and R. Hal Ritter, Jr., Ethical Practice in Grief Counseling (New York: Springer, 2009), p. 142.

50. Gamino and Ritter, Ethical Practice in Grief Counseling, p. 143.

51. Andrew Newman, “Adolescent Consent to Routine

Medical and Surgical Treatment: A Proposal to Sim-

plify the Law of Teenage Medical Decision-Making,”

Journal of Legal Medicine 22 (2001): 501–532; quote p. 528.

52. Bartholome, “Care of the Dying Child,” p. 133.

53. Bartholome, “Care of the Dying Child,” p. 141.

54. Betty Davies and others, “Living in the Dragon’s

Shadow: Fathers’ Experiences of a Child’s Life-Limit-

ing Illness,” Death Studies 28 (2004): 111–135.

55. Dana Cable, Laurel Cucchi, Faye Lopez, and Terry

Martin, “Camp Jamie,” American Journal of Hospice and Palliative Care 9, no. 5 (1992): 18–21.

56. https://www.moyerfoundation.org/programs/

camperin.aspx .

57. HUGS Fact Sheet. Contact HUGS (Help, Under- standing, and Group Support for Hawaii’s Seriously Ill

Children and Their Families), 3636 Kilauea Avenue,

Honolulu, HI 96816; (808) 732–4846; www.hugslove.org .

58. Starlight Children’s Foundation International,

5900 Wilshire Blvd., Suite 2530, Los Angeles, CA

90036, (323) 634–0080; www.starlight.org .

59. See the following, published in Children’s Health Care 31, no. 1 (2002): Haven B. Battles and Lori S. Wiener, “Starbright World: Effects of an Electronic

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 648des35465_notes_601-670.indd 648 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 11 649

14. Marion Osterweis, Fredric Solomon, and Morris

Green, eds., Bereavement: Reactions, Consequences, and Care (Washington, D.C.: National Academy Press, 1984), p. 85.

15. Miriam S. Moss, Sidney Z. Moss, Robert Rubin-

stein, and Nancy Resch, “Impact of Elderly Mother’s

Death on Middle Aged Daughters,” International Jour- nal of Aging and Human Development 37, no. 1 (1992–1993): 1–22.

16. See Harold Ivan Smith, Grieving the Death of a Mother (Minneapolis: Augsburg, 2003).

17. Debra Umberson and Meichu D. Chen, “Effects

of a Parent’s Death on Adult Children: Relationship

Salience and Reaction to Loss,” American Sociological Review 59, no. 1 (1994): 152–168.

18. Laura R. Umphrey and Joanne Cacciatore, “Cop-

ing with the Ultimate Deprivation: Narrative Themes

in a Parental Bereavement Support Group,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 63, no. 2 (2011): 141–160.

19. Laura S. Smart, “Parental Bereavement in Anglo

American History,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 28, no. 1 (1993–1994): 49–61.

20. Dennis Klass, “Solace and Immortality: Bereaved

Parents’ Continuing Bond with Their Children,” in

The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and Dying, ed. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland, 246 –259

(Mountain View, Calif.: Mayfi eld, 1995); and Klass, The Spiritual Lives of Bereaved Parents (Philadelphia: Brun- ner/Mazel, 1999).

21. Paul C. Rosenblatt, “Protective Parenting After the

Death of a Child,” Journal of Personal and Interpersonal Loss 5 (2000): 343–360.

22. Exhibition note, “Native Peoples,” Glenbow

Museum, Calgary, Alberta, Canada.

23. See, for example, Harriett Sarnoff Schiff, The Bereaved Parent (New York: Crown, 1977); and Kay Talbot, What Forever Means After the Death of a Child: Transcending the Trauma, Living with the Loss (New York: Brunner-Routledge, 2002).

24. Dorland’s Illustrated Medical Dictionary, 26th ed. (Philadelphia: Saunders, 1985), p. 828.

25. Wendy Simonds and Barbara Katz Rothman,

Centuries of Solace: Expressions of Maternal Grief in Popu- lar Literature (Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1992), p. 252.

26. Dorland’s Illustrated Medical Dictionary, pp. 664, 1251.

27. Rose Cooper, “Unrecognized Losses in Child Adop-

tion,” in Disenfranchised Grief: New Directions, Challenges, and Strategies for Practice, ed. Kenneth J. Doka, Chapter 17 (Champaign, Ill.: Research Press, 2002).

C H A P T E R 1 1

1. See, for example, Catherine M. Sanders, Grief, the Mourning After: Dealing with Adult Bereavement, 2nd ed. (New York: Wiley, 1989).

2. Peter Marris, “Holding onto Meaning Through

the Life Cycle,” in Challenges of the Third Age: Meaning and Purpose in Later Life, ed. Robert S. Weiss and Scott A. Bass (New York: Oxford University Press, 2002).

Kindle edition.

3. Edwin S. Shneidman, Death and the College Student (New York: Behavioral Publications, 1972).

4. Sara J. Tedrick Parikh and Heather L. Servaty-Seib,

“College Students’ Beliefs about Supporting a Griev-

ing Peer,” Death Studies 37 (2013): 653–669; quote p. 653.

5. Heather L. Servaty-Seib and Lou Ann Hamil-

ton, “Educational Performance and Persistence of

Bereaved College Students,” Journal of College Student Development 47, no. 2 (2006): 225–234; see also Heather L. Servaty-Seib and Deborah J. Taub, “Bereavement

and College Students: The Role of Counseling Psy-

chology,” The Counseling Psychologist 38, no. 7 (2010): 947–975.

6. Leslie Williams Hale, “College Suicide: Second-

Leading Cause of Student Death Hits Home in South-

west Florida,” Naples Daily News ( January 1, 2012).

7. The Spiritual Life of College Students: A National Study of College Students’ Search for Meaning and Purpose (Higher Education Research Institute, University of

California, Los Angeles, n.d.).

8. Harold Ivan Smith, Friendgrief: An Absence Called Presence (Amityville, N.Y.: Baywood, 2000).

9. See Rosemary Blieszner, “‘She’ll Be on My Heart’:

Intimacy Among Friends,” Generations: Journal of the American Society on Aging 25, no. 2 (2001): 48–54.

10. Miriam S. Moss and Sidney Z. Moss, “Meaning

of the Death of an Elderly Father: Two Sisters’ Per-

spectives,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 66, no. 3 (2012–2013): 195–213; esp. p. 208.

11. See entry on death of parents, by Lynne Ann

DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland, in Encyclopedia of Death and Dying, ed. Glennys Howarth and Oliver Lea- man (New York: Routledge, 2001), pp. 346 –347.

12. Sharon Hines Smith, “‘Fret No More My Child . . .

For I’m All Over Heaven All Day’: Religious Beliefs

in the Bereavement of African American, Middle-

Aged Daughters Coping with the Death of an Elderly

Mother,” Death Studies 26 (2002): 309–323.

13. Smith, “‘Fret No More My Child’ . . . ,” p. 320.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 649des35465_notes_601-670.indd 649 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

650 n o t e s

Johnson and S. Marvin Johnson, with James H.

Cunningham and Irwin J. Weinfeld, A Most Important Picture: A Very Tender Manual for Taking Pictures of Still- born Babies and Infants Who Die (Omaha: Centering Corp., 1985).

42. Joanne Cacciatore, Stephen Schnebly, and J.

Frederik Frøen, “The Effects of Social Support on

Maternal Anxiety and Depression After Stillbirth,”

Health and Social Care in the Community 17, no. 2 (2009): 167–176; quote p. 167.

43. DeFrain and others, “Psychological Effects of a

Stillbirth,” p. 87.

44. Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary, 11th ed. (Springfi eld, Mass., 2003), p. 1248. Cf. Mark H. Beers

and others, eds., The Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, 18th ed. (Whitehouse Station, N.J.: Merck Research Laboratories, 2006), pp. 2402–2403.

45. See J. Rehmeyer, “Abated Breath: Serotonin Prob-

lems May Contribute to SIDS,” Science News 170, no. 19 (November 4, 2006): 294, and “Finding the Cause of

SIDS,” The Week (November 17, 2006), p. 22.

46. Judith A. Savage, Mourning Unlived Lives: A Psycho- logical Study of Childbearing Loss (Wilmette, Ill.: Chiron, 1989).

47. Savage, Mourning Unlived Lives, p. xiii.

48. Beverly Raphael, The Anatomy of Bereavement (New York: Basic Books, 1983), p. 229.

49. “Deaths by Age and Selected Causes: 2007,” Statisti- cal Abstract of the United States: 2012, 131st ed. (Washing- ton, D.C., 2011). http://www.census.gov/compendia/

statab/ .

50. Committee on Trauma Research, National

Research Council, Injury in America: A Continuing Public Health Problem (Washington, D.C.: National Academy Press, 1985).

51. Jerome L. Schulman, Coping with Tragedy: Success- fully Facing the Problem of a Seriously Ill Child (Chicago: Follett, 1976), p. 335. See also Marilyn McCubbin and

others, “Family Resiliency in Childhood Cancer,” Fam- ily Relations 51, no. 2 (2002): 103–111.

52. Kay Talbot, “Mothers Now Childless: Survival

After the Death of an Only Child,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 34, no. 3 (1996 –1997): 177–189. See also, by Talbot, What Forever Means After the Death of a Child.

53. Laura S. Smart, “The Marital Helping Relation-

ship Following Pregnancy Loss and Infant Death,”

Journal of Family Issues 13, no. 1 (1992): 81–98.

54. Dennis Klass, Parental Grief: Solace and Resolution (New York: Springer, 1988).

28. Leverett Millen and Samuel Roll, “Solomon’s

Mothers: A Special Case of Pathological Bereavement,”

American Journal of Orthopsychiatry 55, no. 3 (1985): 411–418.

29. Glen W. Davidson, “Death of a Wished-for Child: A

Case Study,” Death Education 1, no. 3 (1977): 265–275. See also Susan Roos, Chronic Sorrow: A Living Loss (New York: Brunner-Routledge, 2002).

30. Paul M. Insel and Walton T. Roth, Connect Core Concepts in Health, 13th ed. (New York: McGraw-Hill, 2013), p. 185.

31. Larry G. Peppers, “Grief and Elective Abortion:

Breaking the Emotional Bond?” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 18, no. 1 (1987–1988): 1–12.

32. Simonds and Rothman, Centuries of Solace, p. 259.

33. Kenneth J. Doka, “Disenfranchised Grief ” (paper

presented at the annual meeting of the Association

for Death Education and Counseling, Atlanta, Spring

1986); and, edited by Doka, Disenfranchised Grief: New Directions, Challenges, and Strategies for Practice (Cham- paign, Ill.: Research Press, 2002).

34. See William R. LaFleur, Liquid Life: Abortion and Buddhism in Japan (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton Univer- sity Press, 1992). See also Dennis Klass and Amy Olwen

Heath, “Grief and Abortion: Mizuko Kuyo, the Japanese Ritual Resolution,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 34, no. 1 (1996 –1997): 1–14; and Takada Yoshihito

and James M. Vardaman, Jr., Talking about Buddhism (Tokyo: Kodansha, 1997), pp. 183–185.

35. Joanne Cacciatore, “The Silent Birth: A Feminist

Perspective,” Social Work 54, no. 1 ( January 2009): 91–95.

36. John DeFrain and others, “The Psychological

Effects of a Stillbirth on Surviving Family Members,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 22, no. 2 (1990–1991): 81–108.

37. Joanne Cacciatore and Suzanne Bushfi eld, “Still-

birth: A Sociopolitical Issue,” Affi lia 23, no. 4 (2008): 378–387.

38. Joanne Cacciatore, Ingela Rådestad, and J.

Frederik Frøen, “Effects of Contact with Stillborn

Babies on Maternal Anxiety and Depression,” Birth 35, no. 4 (December 2008): 313–320; quote p. 313.

39. Irving G. Leon, “Perinatal Loss: Choreographing

Grief on the Obstetric Unit,” American Journal of Ortho- psychiatry 62, no. 1 (1992): 7–8.

40. Cacciatore, Rådestad, and Frøen, “Effects of Con-

tact with Stillborn Babies,” p. 319.

41. Jay Ruby, “Portraying the Dead,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 19, no. 1 (1988–1989): 1–20; and Joy

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 650des35465_notes_601-670.indd 650 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 11 651

Evaluation of Activity, Disengagement, and Continuity

Theories,” The Gerontologist 42, no. 4 (2002): 522–533; quote, p. 530.

67. See Karen L. Fingerman, “A Distant Closeness:

Intimacy Between Parents and Their Children in Later

Life,” Generations: Journal of the American Society on Aging 25, no. 2 (2001): 26 –33.

68. See Phyllis R. Silverman, Widow to Widow: How the Bereaved Help One Another, 2nd ed. (New York: Brun- ner-Routledge, 2004); and also by Silverman, “Widow-

hood as the Next Stage in the Life Cycle,” in Widows: North America, ed. Helena Z. Lopata (Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, 1987), and “The Widow-to-

Widow Program: An Experiment in Preventive Inter-

vention,” Mental Hygiene 53, no. 3 (1969), a landmark report by Silverman on her work at Harvard Medical

School’s Laboratory of Community Psychiatry. See

also Helena Z. Lopata, Widowhood in an American City (Cambridge, Mass.: Schenkman, 1973), Women as Widows: Support Systems (New York: Elsevier, 1979), and Current Widowhood: Myths and Realities (Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage, 1996).

69. Joanne Lynn and David M. Anderson, Living Well at the End of Life: Adapting Health Care to Serious Chronic Illness in Old Age, ” Rand Health White Paper (Santa Monica, Calif.: Rand, 2003), p. 4.

70. Lynn and Anderson, Living Well at the End of Life, pp. 4–5.

71. Julia Holmes and others, “Aging Differently:

Physical Limitations Among Adults Aged 50 Years and

Over: United States, 2001–2007,” National Center for Health Statistics Data Brief, no. 20 ( July 2009).

72. R. A. Hope and others, Oxford Handbook of Clinical Medicine, 3rd ed. (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1994), p. 64.

73. Insel and Roth, Connect Core Concepts in Health, pp.623–626.

74. F. David Martin, “Facing Death at 80: Memory and

the Holy,” Soundings: An Interdisciplinary Journal 83, no. 2 (Summer 2000): 301–330; quote p. 304.

75. Balk, “Life Span Issues and Loss, Grief, and

Mourning: Adulthood,” p. 168.

76. Martin, “Facing Death at 80,” p. 304. See also

Sharon R. Kaufman, The Ageless Self: Sources of Meaning in Later Life (Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1995).

77. Stedman’s Medical Dictionary, 26th ed. (Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins, 1995), p. 492; and Insel and Roth,

Connect Core Concepts in Health, p. 630.

78. Beers et al., The Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, p. 1815.

55. Joanne Cacciatore, John DeFrain, Kara L. C.

Jones, and Hawk Jones, “Stillbirth and the Couple:

A Gender-Based Exploration,” Journal of Family Social Work 11, no. 4 (2008): 351–372; esp. p. 354.

56. Kathleen R. Gilbert, “Interactive Grief and Cop-

ing in the Marital Dyad,” Death Studies 13, no. 6 (1989): 605–626. See also Kathleen R. Gilbert and Laura S.

Smart, Coping with Infant or Fetal Loss: The Couple’s Heal- ing Process (New York: Brunner/Mazel, 1992).

57. When a Child Dies: A Survey of Bereaved Parents (Oak Brook, Ill.: The Compassionate Friends, 2006).

58. Gordon Riches and Pam Dawson, “Communities

of Feeling: The Culture of Bereaved Parents,” Mortality 1, no. 2 (1996): 143–161.

59. Raphael, Anatomy of Bereavement, p. 177.

60. Savine Gross Weizman and Phyllis Kamm, About Mourning: Support and Guidance for the Bereaved (New York: Human Sciences, 1985), p. 130.

61. See Ira O. Glick, Robert S. Weiss, and Colin

Murray Parkes, The First Year of Bereavement (New York: Wiley, 1974), and its follow-up by Colin Murray Parkes

and Robert S. Weiss, Recovery from Bereavement (New York: Basic Books, 1983).

62. David E. Balk, “Life Span Issues and Loss, Grief,

and Mourning: Adulthood,” Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk,

157–169 (New York: Routledge, 2013), p.168.

63. Richard A. Settersten, Jr., “Social Sources of Mean-

ing in Later Life,” in Challenges of the Third Age, ed. Weiss and Bass.

64. Sara Wilcox and others, “The Effects of Widow-

hood on Physical and Mental Health, Health Behav-

iors, and Health Outcomes: The Women’s Health

Initiative,” Health Psychology 22, no. 5 (2003): 1–10.

65. Judith M. Stillion, Death and the Sexes: An Examination of Differential Longevity, Attitudes, Behaviors, and Coping Skills (Washington, D.C.: Hemisphere, 1985). See also Scott Campbell and Phyllis R. Silverman, Widower: When Men Are Left Alone (Amityville, N.Y.: Baywood, 1996); Luann M. Daggett, “Living with Loss: Middle-Aged Men

Face Spousal Bereavement,” Qualitative Health Research 12, no. 5 (2002): 625–639; Geraldine P. Mineau, Ken R.

Smith, and Lee L. Bean, “Historical Trends of Survival

Among Widows and Widowers,” Social Science & Medicine 54, no. 2 (2002): 245–254; and John M. O’Brien, Linda

M. Forrest, and Ann E. Austin, “Death of a Partner: Per-

spectives of Heterosexual and Gay Men,” Journal of Health Psychology 7, no. 3 (2002): 317–328.

66. Rebecca L. Utz and others, “The Effect of Wid-

owhood on Older Adults’ Social Participation: An

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 651des35465_notes_601-670.indd 651 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

652 n o t e s

97. Rosenberg, Thinking Clearly About Death, pp. 211–212.

98. Allan Kellehear, “Dying Alone—and Preferably Alone? Agency, Resistance, and Dissent at the End of

Life,” International Journal of Ageing and Later Life 4, no. 1 (2009): 5–21.

99. Jane W. Peterson, “Age of Wisdom: Elderly Black

Women in Family and Church,” in The Cultural Context of Aging: Worldwide Perspectives, ed. Jay Sokolovsky (New York: Bergin & Garvey, 1990), pp. 213–227.

100. See, for example, Cesare Marino, “Honor the

Elders: Symbolic Associations with Old Age in Tradi-

tional Eastern Cherokee Culture,” Journal of Cherokee Studies 13 (1988): 3–18.

101. Robert N. Butler, Why Survive? Being Old in America (New York: Harper & Row, 1975); quote p. 421. See also Robert N. Butler. The Longevity Revolution: The Benefi ts and Challenges of Living a Long Life. New York: Public Affairs, 2008.

102. Butler, Why Survive?, p. 422.

C H A P T E R 1 2

1. Judith M. Stillion, “Premature Exits: Understand-

ing Suicide,” in The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and Dying, ed. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland, 182–197 (Mountain View, Calif.: Mayfi eld,

1995), p. 182.

2. Kay Redfi eld Jamison, Night Falls Fast: Understanding Suicide (New York: Knopf, 1999), p. 292.

3. Mark H. Beers and others, eds., The Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, 18th ed. (Whitehouse Station, N.J.: Merck Research Laboratories, 2006), p. 1741.

4. Donna L. Hoyert and Jiaquan Xu, “Deaths: Pre-

liminary Data for 2011,” National Vital Statistics Reports 61, no. 6 (Hyattsville, Md.: National Center for Health

Statistics, 2012), p. 4.

5. “Deaths and Death Rates by Leading Causes of

Death and Age: 2007,” Statistical Abstract of the United States: 2012, 131st ed. (Washington, D.C., 2011). http:// www.census.gov/compendia/statab/ .

6. Beers and others, eds., The Merck Manual of Diagno- sis and Therapy, p. 1741.

7. News Release, Substance Abuse and Mental Health

Services Administration, September 17, 2009, www

.samha.gov .

8. Edwin S. Shneidman, Comprehending Suicide: Land- marks in 20th Century Suicidology (Washington, D.C.: American Psychological Association, 2001), p. 154.

79. Betzaida Tejada-Vera, “Mortality from Alzheimer’s

Disease in the United States: Data for 2000 and 2010,”

NCHS Data Brief, no. 116 (Hyattsville, Md.: National Center for Health Statistics, 2013), p. 1.

80. Stedman’s Medical Dictinoary, p. 492.

81. Leon Kass, Chairman, President’s Council on

Bioethics, “Letter of Transmittal,” Taking Care: Ethical Caregiving in Our Aging Society, September 2005. http:// bioethics.georgetown.edu/pcbe/reports/taking_care/

taking_care.pdf .

82. Gary R. VanderBos, ed., APA Dictionary of Psychol- ogy (Washington, D.C.: American Psychological Asso- ciation, 2007), p. 408.

83. Chris Wilson, “The Century Ahead,” Daedalus 135, no. 1 (Winter 2006): 5–8.

84. James M. Henslin, Sociology: A Down-to-Earth Approach, 9th ed. (Boston: Pearson, 2008), p. 377.

85. See Stanley Brandes, Forty: The Age and the Symbol (Nashville: University of Tennessee Press, 1985).

86. Bernice L. Neugarten, “Growing as Long as We

Live,” Second Opinion 15 (November 1990): 42–51.

87. James F. Fries, Lawrence W. Green, and Sol

Levine, “Health Promotion and the Compression of

Morbidity,” Lancet (March 4, 1989): 481–483; see also, by Fries, “The Compression of Morbidity,” Milbank Memorial Fund Quarterly 61 (1983): 397–419.

88. Insel and Roth, Connect Core Concepts in Health, p. 632.

89. Bert Hayslip, Jr., Julie Hicks Patrick, and Paul E.

Panek, Adult Development and Aging, 5th ed. (Malabar, Fla.: Krieger, 2011), p. 15.

90. Neugarten, “Growing as Long as We Live.”

91. Sandra L. Bertman, “Aging Grace: Treatment of

the Aged in the Arts,” Death Studies 13, no. 6 (1989): 517–535. See also Pamela T. Amoss and Steven

Harrell, eds., Other Ways of Growing Old: Anthropologi- cal Perspectives (Palo Alto, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1981).

92. Robert C. Atchley, Spirituality and Aging (Balti- more: Johns Hopkins University Press, 2009), p. 4.

93. Diana Athill, Somewhere Towards the End: A Memoir (New York: Norton, 2009), p. 177.

94. Athill, Somewhere Towards the End, p. 180.

95. Daniel Callahan, “Can Old Age Be Given a Public

Meaning?” Second Opinion 15 (November 1990): 12–23.

96. Jay F. Rosenberg, Thinking Clearly About Death (Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1983), p. 208.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 652des35465_notes_601-670.indd 652 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 12 653

Autopsy: Clinical and Legal Perspectives”; and Charles

C. Thompson II, A Glimpse of Hell: The Explosion on the USS Iowa and Its Cover-Up (New York: Norton, 1999).

22. Quoted material from Poythress and others,

“APA’s Expert Panel.”

23. See David A. Brent, “The Psychological Autopsy:

Methodological Considerations for the Study of Ado-

lescent Suicide,” Suicide and Life-Threatening Behavior 19 (Spring 1989): 43–57; and Mohammad Shafi and

others, “Psychological Autopsy of Completed Suicide

in Children and Adolescents,” American Journal of Psy- chiatry 142 (1985): 1061–1064.

24. Heidi Hjelmeland and others, “Psychological

Autopsy Studies as Diagnostic Tools: Are They Meth-

odologically Flawed?” Death Studies 36, no. 7 (2012): 605–626.

25. David Lester, “Theories of Suicide,” in Suicide Among Racial and Ethnic Minority Groups: Theory, Research, and Practice, ed. Frederick T. L. Leong and Mark M. Leach, pp. 39–53 (New York: Routledge);

quote p. 44.

26. Roy F. Baumeister, “Suicide as Escape from Self,”

Psychological Review 97 (1990): 90–113; and Lester, “Theories of Suicide,” p. 51

27. Emile Durkheim, Suicide: A Study in Sociology (New York: Free Press, 1951).

28. Thomas Joiner, Why People Die by Suicide (Cam- bridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 2005), p. 34.

29. Norman Farberow, “The History of Suicide,” in

Evans and Farberow, Encyclopedia of Suicide, p. viii.

30. Jack Seward, Hara-Kiri: Japanese Ritual Suicide (Rutland, Vt.: Charles E. Tuttle, 1968). See also Robert

Jay Lifton, Shuichi Kato, and Michael R. Reich, Six Lives, Six Deaths: Portraits from Modern Japan (New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1979).

31. See Jerome Young, “Morals, Suicide, and Psychia-

try: A View from Japan,” Bioethics 16, no. 5 (2002): 412–424.

32. See Catherine Weinberger-Thomas, Ashes of Immor- tality: Widow-Burning in India (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1999).

33. Jeffrey W. Riemer, “Durkheim’s ‘Heroic Suicide’

in Military Combat,” Armed Forces & Society 25, no. 1 (1998): 103–120. See also Albert Axell, “The Kamikaze

Mindset,” History Today 52, no. 9 (2002): 3–4; and Bernard Millot, Divine Thunder: The Life and Death of the Kamikazes (New York: McCall, 1971).

34. Iginia Mancinelli and others, “Mass Suicide: His-

torical and Psychodynamic Considerations,” Suicide and Life-Threatening Behavior 32, no. 1 (2002): 91–100.

9. Jamison, Night Falls Fast, p. 291.

10. Stefan Timmermans, Postmortem: How Medical Examiners Explain Suspicious Deaths (Chicago: Univer- sity of Chicago Press, 2006), p. 92.

11. Quoted in Timmermans, Postmortem, p. 96.

12. Glen Evans and Norman L. Farberow, The Encyclo- pedia of Suicide (New York: Facts on File, 1988), p. 268.

13. See Robert J. Homant and Daniel B. Kennedy,

“Suicide by Police: A Proposed Typology of Law

Enforcement Offi cer-Assisted Suicide,” Policing: An International Journal of Police Strategies & Management 23, no. 3 (2000): 339–355; and Vivian B. Lord, “Law

Enforcement-Assisted Suicide,” Criminal Justice and Behavior 27, no. 3 (2000): 401–419.

14. Julia Dahl, “How to Stop Suicide by Cop,” Miller- McCune (March-April 2011), pp. 66 –73.

15. Katherine Van Wormer and Chuk Odiah, “The

Psychology of the Suicide-Murder and the Death

Penalty,” Journal of Criminal Justice 27, no. 4 (1999): 361–370.

16. Timmermans, Postmortem, p. 185.

17. Edwin S. Shneidman, “Suicide,” in Death: Current Perspectives, 2nd ed., ed. Shneidman (Mountain View, Calif.: Mayfi eld, 1980), p. 432.

18. James R. P. Ogloff and Randy K. Otto, “Psychologi-

cal Autopsy: Clinical and Legal Perspectives,” Saint Louis University Law Journal 37, no. 3 (Spring 1993): 607–646. See also Edwin S. Shneidman, Clues to Suicide (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1957); and, by Avery D. Weisman, The Psychological Autopsy (New York: Human Sciences Press, 1968) and The Realization of Death: A Guide for the Psycho- logical Autopsy (Northvale, N.J.: Aronson, 1974).

19. For an example of the data-gathering approach

used in psychological autopsies, see Tracy L. Cross,

Karyn Gust-Brey, and P. Bonny Ball, “A Psychological

Autopsy of the Suicide of an Academically Gifted Stu-

dent: Researchers’ and Parents’ Perspectives,” Gifted Child Quarterly 46, no. 4 (2002): 247–264.

20. Thomas J. Young, “Procedures and Problems in

Conducting a Psychological Autopsy,” International Journal of Offender Therapy and Comparative Criminology 36, no. 1 (Spring 1992): 43–52.

21. See Norman Poythress and others, “APA’s Expert

Panel in the Congressional Review of the USS ‘Iowa’

Incident,” American Psychologist 48, no. 1 ( January 1993): 8–15; Randy K. Otto and others, “An Empirical

Study of the Reports of APA’s Peer Review Panel in the

Congressional Review of the U.S.S. IOWA Incident,”

Journal of Personality Assessment 61, no. 3 (December 1993): 425–442; Ogloff and Otto, “Psychological

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 653des35465_notes_601-670.indd 653 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

654 n o t e s

Based Assessment of Suicide Risk,” in Suicidal Behavior: Assessment of People-at-Risk, ed. Updesh Kumar and Manas K. Mandel, 20–41 (Los Angeles: Sage, 2010), p. 25.

51. See, for example, Danny Nugus, “Choosing Life,”

Counseling Children and Young People (March 2009): 32–37.

52. Ronald W. Maris, Pathways to Suicide: A Survey of Self- Destructive Behaviors (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins Univer- sity Press, 1981), and Understanding and Preventing Suicide (New York: Guilford Press, 1988). On the ambiguity

concerning the degree of self-harm intended in suicide

attempts, see Barry M. Wagner, Steven A. Wong, and

David A. Jobes, “Mental Health Professionals’ Determi-

nations of Adolescent Suicide Attempts,” Suicide and Life- Threatening Behavior 32, no. 3 (2002): 284–300.

53. Evans and Farberow, Encyclopedia of Suicide, p. 21.

54. Edwin S. Shneidman, Deaths of Man (New York: Quadrangle Books, 1973), pp. 81–90.

55. Kathleen Erwin, “Interpreting the Evidence: Com-

peting Paradigms and the Emergence of Lesbian and

Gay Suicide as a ‘Social Fact,’” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 211–220.

56. Kevin E. Early and Ronald L. Akers, “‘It’s a White

Thing’—An Exploration of Beliefs About Suicide in

the African-American Community,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 198–210. See also

Kevin E. Early, Religion and Suicide in the African-Ameri- can Community (Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1992).

57. Brian Barry, “Suicide: The Ultimate Escape,” Death Studies 13, no. 2 (1989): 185–190; quote p. 188.

58. See Alfred Alvarez, The Savage God: A Study of Sui- cide (New York: Random House, 1971).

59. Susan L. Ruth, “Suicide Rates Among Military

Family Members Are On the Rise,” Washington Times ( June 17, 2013).

60. Ann Scott Tyson and Greg Jaffe, “Generals Find

Suicide a Frustrating Enemy,” The Washington Post (May 23, 2009).

61. Committee on the Assessment of Readjustment

Needs of Military Personnel, Veterans, and Their

Families, Returning Home from Iraq and Afghanistan (Washington, D.C.: National Academies Press, 2013),

pp. 110, 120.

62. Committee, Returning Home from Iraq and Afghani- stan, p. 111.

63. Douglas MacArthur, “Duty, Honor, Country”

(speech upon receipt of the Sylvanus Thayer Award for

outstanding service to the nation, United States

Military Academy, West Point, May 12, 1962). http://

www.nationalcenter.org/MacArthurFarewell.html .

35. See David Chidester, Salvation and Suicide: An Inter- pretation of Jim Jones, the Peoples Temple, and Jonestown (Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1988); Jose I.

Lasaga, “Death in Jonestown: Techniques of Political

Control by a Paranoid Leader,” Suicide and Life-Threat- ening Behavior 10, no. 4 (1980): 210–213; and Richard H. Seiden, “Reverend Jones on Suicide,” Suicide and Life-Threatening Behavior 9, no. 2 (1979): 116 –119. For an overview of mass suicide, see Iginia Manci-

nelli, Anna Comparelli, Paolo Girardi, and Roberto

Tatarelli, “Mass Suicide: Historical and Psychodynamic

Considerations,” Suicide and Life-Threatening Behavior 32, no. 1 (2002): 91–100.

36. Susan Raine, “Reconceptualizing the Human

Body: Heaven’s Gate and the Quest for Divine Trans-

formation,” Religion 35 (2005): 98–117.

37. Andrew Selsky and Jennifer Loven, “3 Gitmo

Inmates Hanged Themselves,” Associated Press Online, June 10, 2006.

38. Edwin S. Shneidman, “Suicide,” Encyclopedia Bri- tannica, vol. 21 (Chicago: William Benton, 1973), p. 385.

39. Erwin Stengel, “A Matter of Communication,” in

On the Nature of Suicide, ed. Edwin S. Shneidman (San Francisco: Jossey-Bass, 1969), pp. 78–79.

40. Sam Silverman, “The Death of Socrates: A Holistic

Re-Examination,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 61, no. 1 (2010): 71–84.

41. Edwin S. Shneidman, “Suicide as Psychache,” Jour- nal of Nervous and Mental Disease 181, no. 3 (1993): 147– 149, and “Some Controversies in Suicidology: Toward

a Mentalistic Discipline,” Suicide and Life-Threatening Behavior 23, no. 4 (1993): 292–298.

42. Shneidman, Comprehending Suicide, p. 200.

43. Edwin S. Shneidman, personal communication.

44. Shneidman, Comprehending Suicide, pp. 202–203.

45. Thomas Joiner, Why People Die By Suicide (Cam- bridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 2005), p. 201.

46. J. John Mann and others, “The Neurobiology of

Suicide Risk: A Review for the Clinician,” Journal of Clinical Psychiatry 60, Supplement 2 (1999): 7–11.

47. C. G. Prado, The Last Choice: Preemptive Suicide in Advanced Age, 2nd ed. (Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1998), p. 6.

48. “Suicide Epidemic,” The Week, August 5, 2005.

49. Roy F. Baumeister, “Suicide as Escape from Self,”

Psychological Review 97 (1990): 90–113.

50. Quoted material from Chad E. Morrow, Craig J.

Bryan, and Kathryn Kanzler Appolonio, “Empirically

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 654des35465_notes_601-670.indd 654 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 12 655

76. Lennings, “A Cognitive Understanding of Adoles-

cent Suicide.”

77. See M. S. Gould, S. Wallenstein, and L. David-

son, “Suicide Clusters: A Critical Review,” Suicide and Life-Threatening Behavior 19 (Spring 1989): 17–29; and James A. Mercy and others, “Is Suicide Contagious?

A Study of the Relation Between Exposure to the Sui-

cidal Behavior of Others and Nearly Lethal Suicide

Attempts,” American Journal of Epidemiology 154, no. 2 (2001): 120–127.

78. Examples from Evans and Farberow, Encyclopedia of Suicide, pp. 26 –27, 72, 254.

79. Bruce L. Danto, Mark L. Taff, and Lauren R.

Boglioli, “Graveside Deaths,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 33, no. 4 (1996): 265–278.

80. Ayumi Naito, “Internet Suicide in Japan: Impli-

cations for Child and Adolescent Mental Health,”

Clinical Child Psychology and Psychiatry 12, no. 4 (2007): 583–597.

81. Jason B. Luoma and Jane L. Pearson, “Suicide and

Marital Status in the United States, 1991–1996: Is Wid-

owhood a Risk Factor?” American Journal of Public Health 92, no. 9 (2002): 1518–1522.

82. Benjamin N. Shain and the Committee on Adoles-

cence, “Suicide and Suicide Attempts in Adolescents,”

Pediatrics 120 (2007): 669–676.

83. Y. Conwell and J. L. Pearson, “Suicidal Behaviors

in Older Adults,” American Journal of Geriatric Psychiatry 10, no. 4 (2002): 359–361; and, in the same issue, C. L.

Turvey and others, “Risk Factors for Late-Life Suicide:

A Prospective, Community-Based Study,” pp. 398–406.

84. Susanne S. Carney and others, “Suicide over 60:

The San Diego Study,” Journal of the American Geriatrics Society 42 (1994): 174–180.

85. J. Conrad Glass, Jr., and Susan E. Reed, “To Live

or Die: A Look at Elderly Suicide,” Educational Gerontol- ogy 19 (1993): 767–778.

86. Judith M. Stillion, Eugene E. McDowell, and

Jacque H. May, Suicide Across the Life Span: Premature Exits (New York: Hemisphere, 1989), pp. 180–181.

87. Antoon A. Leenaars and David Lester, “The

Signifi cance of the Method Chosen for Suicide in

Understanding the Psychodynamics of the Suicidal

Individual,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 19, no. 4 (1988–1989): 311–314.

88. Edwin S. Shneidman, “Self-Destruction: Suicide

Notes and Tragic Lives,” in Death: Current Perspectives, 2nd ed., ed. Shneidman, p. 467; and, by Shneidman,

“A Bibliography of Suicide Notes: 1856 –1979,” in Sui- cide and Life-Threatening Behavior 9, no. 1 (Spring 1979): 57–59.

64. Tara Bahrampour, “Baby Boomers Are Killing

Themselves at an Alarming Rate, Raising Question:

Why?” Washington Post. http://www.washingtonpost .com/local/baby-boomers-are-killing-themselves-at-

an-alarming-rate-begging-question-why/2013/06/03/

d98acc7a-c41f-11e2-8c3b-0b5e9247e8ca_story.html .

65. See Julie A. Phillips and others, “Understanding

Recent Changes in Suicide Rates Among the Middle-

Aged: Period or Cohort Effects?” Public Health Reports 125, no. 5 (2010): 680–688.

66. Louise B. Andrew, “Physician Suicide,”

eMedicine, July 10, 2008, http://emedicine.medscape. com/article/806779-overview .

67. Donald H. Rubinstein, “Epidemic Suicide Among

Micronesian Adolescents,” Social Science & Medicine 17 (1983): 657–665, and “Suicide in Micronesia,” in Cul- ture, Youth and Suicide in the Pacifi c: Papers from an East- West Center Conference, ed. Francis X. Hezel, Donald H. Rubinstein, and Geoffrey M. White (Honolulu: Pacifi c

Islands Study Program, University of Hawaii, 1985),

pp. 88–111.

68. Thomas Joiner, Lonely at the Top: The High Cost of Men’s Success (New York: Palgrave Macmillan, 2011), p. 45

69. Cynthia R. Pfeffer and others, “Suicidal Children

Grow Up: Suicidal Episodes and Effects of Treatment

During Follow-Up,” Journal of the American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry 33, no. 2 (1994): 225–230.

70. See Brian L. Mishara, “Conceptions of Death and

Suicide in Children Ages 6 –12 and Their Implications

for Suicide Prevention,” Suicide and Life-Threatening Behavior 29, no. 2 (1999): 105–118.

71. C. J. Lennings, “A Cognitive Understanding of

Adolescent Suicide,” Genetic, Social, and General Psychol- ogy Monographs 120, no. 3 (1994): 289–307.

72. David A. Brent and others, “Stressful Life Events:

Psychopathology and Adolescent Suicide: A Case Con-

trol Study,” Suicide and Life-Threatening Behavior 23, no. 3 (1993): 179–187. See also Stephen Briggs, “Working

with the Risk of Suicide in Young People,” Journal of Social Work Practice 16, no. 2 (2002): 135–148.

73. Kristi Kendrick and others, “Bullying, Cyberbully-

ing, and Teen Suicidality: Results from the 2011 Youth

Risk Behavior Survey,” APA 2013, Abstract NR7-13.

74. Herbert Hendin, “Psychodynamics of Suicide, with

Particular Reference to the Young,” American Journal of Psychiatry 148, no. 9 (1991): 1150–1158.

75. Paulina F. Kernberg, “Psychological Interventions

for the Suicidal Adolescent,” American Journal of Psycho- therapy 48, no. 1 (1994): 52–63.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 655des35465_notes_601-670.indd 655 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

656 n o t e s

106. Jack D. Douglas, The Social Meanings of Suicide (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1967),

pp. 324ff.

107. Stillion, McDowell, and May, Suicide Across the Life Span, p. 24.

C H A P T E R 1 3

1. From Letters of E. B. White, collected and edited by Dorothy Lobrano Guth (New York: Harper & Row,

1976), p. 558.

2. Anthony Giddens, Runaway World: How Globalization Is Reshaping Our Lives (New York: Routledge, 2000), p. 52.

3. See Jerome Rosenberg and Dennis L. Peck, “Mega-

deaths,” in Handbook of Death & Dying, 223–235, edited by Clifton D. Bryant (Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage,

2003).

4. Paul M. Insel and Walton T. Roth, Connect Core Concepts in Health, 13th ed. (New York: McGraw-Hill, 2013), p. 592.

5. Insel and Roth, Connect Core Concepts in Health, p. 593.

6. Insel and Roth, Connect Core Concepts in Health, p. 259.

7. “Auto Club Analysis Shows that California Teens

15–17 at Fault in 68 Percent of Fatal Crashes,” Santa Cruz Sentinel, January 19, 2006.

8. Louis A. Gamino and R. Hal Ritter, Jr., Ethical Practice in Grief Counseling (New York: Springer, 2009), p. 286.

9. Robert Kastenbaum and Ruth Aisenberg, The Psy- chology of Death: Concise Edition (New York: Springer, 1976), p. 319. See also Alan E. Stewart and Janice

Harris Lord, “Motor Vehicle Crash Versus Accident: A

Change in Terminology Is Necessary,” Journal of Trau- matic Stress 15, no. 4 (2002): 333–335.

10. Giddens, Runaway World, p. 40.

11. Garance Burke, “Hip-Hop Car Stunt Leaves Two

Dead,” Santa Cruz Sentinel, December 29, 2006.

12. Kawahito Hiroshi, “Death and the Corporate War-

rior,” Japan Quarterly 38 (April–June 1991): 149–157.

13. Reinhold Messner, quoted in Caroline Alexander,

“Greatest Mountaineer,” National Geographic 210, no. 5 (November 2006): 44.

14. James A. Thorson and F. C. Powell, “To Laugh in

the Face of Death: The Games That Lethal People

Play,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 21, no. 3 (1990): 225–239.

89. Beers and others, eds., The Merck Manual of Diagno- sis and Therapy, p. 1741.

90. Stephen T. Black, “Comparing Genuine and

Simulated Suicide Notes: A New Perspective,” Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 61, no. 4 (1993): 699–702.

91. Shneidman, Comprehending Suicide, pp. 167, 170.

92. Evans and Farberow, Encyclopedia of Suicide, p. 187.

93. Stillion, McDowell, and May, Suicide Across the Life Span, p. 13.

94. Stillion, McDowell, and May, Suicide Across the Life Span, p. 194.

95. D. Lizardi and R. E. Golding, “Religion and Sui-

cide: Buddhism, Native American and African Reli-

gions, Atheism, and Agnosticism,” Journal of Religion and Health 49 (2010): 377–384.

96. Patrick W. O’Carroll, Morton M. Silverman, and

Alan L. Berman, “Community Suicide Prevention:

The Effectiveness of Bridge Barriers,” Suicide and Life- Threatening Behavior 24, no. 1 (Spring 1994): 89–99.

97. Antoon A. Leenaars, “Crisis Intervention with

Highly Lethal Suicidal People,” Death Studies 18, no. 4 (1994): 341–360.

98. Robert A. Neimeyer and Angela M. Pfeiffer, “The

Ten Most Common Errors of Suicide Interventionists,”

in Treatment of Suicidal People, ed. Antoon A. Leenaars, John T. Maltsberger, and Robert A. Neimeyer, 207–224

(Washington, D.C.: Taylor & Francis, 1994), pp. 210, 212.

99. Kenneth J. Doka, Counseling Individuals with Life- Threatening Illness (New York: Springer, 2009), p. 206.

100. Shneidman, Comprehending Suicide, p. 203.

101. See Alison Wertheimer, A Special Scar: The Experi- ences of People Bereaved by Suicide, 2nd ed. (Philadelphia: Brunner-Routledge, 2001).

102. Joan Wickersham, The Suicide Index: Putting My Father’s Death in Order (New York: Harcourt, 2008), p. 158.

103. See Charles P. McDowell, Joseph M. Rothberg,

and Ronald J. Koshes, “Witnessed Suicides,” Suicide and Life-Threatening Behavior 24, no. 3 (1994): 213–223.

104. Evans and Farberow, Encyclopedia of Suicide, pp. 58–59, 63.

105. Adam H. Beasley, David Smiley, and Evan S.

Benn, “Pembroke Pines Teen Broadcasts Suicide on

Webcam,” Miami Herald Online (November 21, 2008); and Fred Tasker, “Teen’s Webcam Suicide Raises Red

Flags for Copycats, Experts Say,” Miami Herald Online (November 22, 2008).

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 656des35465_notes_601-670.indd 656 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 13 657

Christopher Cooper and Robert Block, Disaster: Hur- ricane Katrina and the Failure of Homeland Security (New York: Times Books, 2006).

31. U.S. Senate, Hurricane Katrina, p. 2.

32. Neil Thompson, “The Ontology of Disaster,”

Death Studies 19, no. 5 (1995): 501–510. See also Inter- national Work Group on Death, Dying, and Bereave-

ment, “Assumptions and Principles about Psychosocial

Aspects of Disasters,” Death Studies 26, no. 6 (2002): 449–462.

33. Jennifer L. Matheson, “Assessment and Interven-

tion in the Family and Larger Systems,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk, 245–254 (New York: Routledge, 2013),

p. 251.

34. Mark Creamer, Director of Australian Center for

Posttraumatic Mental Health, “An Initial Focus on the

Trauma May Damage the Recovery Process,” The Age, http://www.theage.com.au/federal-politics/counsel-

ling-must-hit-the-right-targets-20090209-8287.html .

35. Pan American Health Organization, Management of Dead Bodies in Disaster Situations (Washington, D.C.: PAHO, 2004), p. xi.

36. Fran H. Norris, Matthew J. Friedman, and Patricia

J. Watson, “60,000 Disaster Victims Speak, Parts I and

II,” Psychiatry 65, no. 3 (2002): 207–260.

37. Pan American Health Organization, Management of Dead Bodies in Disaster Situations; see also Oliver Morgan, ed., Management of Dead Bodies After Disasters: A Field Manual for First Responders (Washington, D.C.: PAHO, 2006).

38. Bruce Jennings, “Disaster Planning and Public

Health,” The Hastings Center Bioethics Briefi ng Book, 41–44 (Garrison, N.Y.: The Hastings Center, 2009).

39. David K. Meagher, “Ethical and Legal Issues in

Traumatic Death,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 311–320; p. 315.

40. Beverly McLeod, “In the Wake of Disaster,” Psychol- ogy Today, October 1984, pp. 54–57.

41. “Murder Victims—Circumstances and Weapons

Used or Cause of Death,” Statistical Abstract of the United States: 2012, 131st ed. (Washington, D.C., 2011). http:// www.census.gov/compendia/statab/ .

42. “‘Vietnam Style’ Triage Techniques Used to Treat

Urban Assault Weapon Injuries,” Bulletin of the Park Ridge Center (May 1989): 11–12.

43. See Ronald K. Barrett, “Urban Adolescent Homi-

cidal Violence: An Emerging Public Health Concern,”

Urban League Review 16, no. 2 (1993): 67–75.

15. Baruch Fischhoff and John Kadvany, Risk: A Very Short Introduction (New York: Oxford University Press, 2011), p. 90.

16. Kenneth J. Doka, Eric C. Schwartz, and Catherine

Schwarz, “Risky Business: Observations on the Nature

of Death in Hazardous Sports,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 21, no. 3 (1990): 215–223.

17. Highlighting Japan (March 2013), p. 6.

18. National Police Agency of Japan. http://www.npa

.go.jp/archive/keibi/biki/higaijokyo_e.pdf .

19. Lucille Craft, “Japan’s Nuclear Refugees,” National Geographic (December 2011): 92–111

20. “Hot Spots and Blind Spots,” The Economist (December 8, 2011), p. 54. See also Evan Osnos, “The

Fallout,” The New Yorker (October 17, 2011), pp. 46 –61.

21. Compiled from Edward Wong, “China Begins

Burying Its Unknown Quake Victims,” International Herald Tribune, February 12, 2009; and Brian Hen- nessy, “Earthquake in Sichuan, China: The After-

math,” On Line Opinion, http://www.onlineopinion .com.au/view.asp?article 5 8437 .

22. Compiled from Australian news reports provided

by Rose Cooper, who provides grief support services in

Ocean Grove, Australia.

23. Carl Lindahl, “Legends of Hurricane Katrina: The

Right to Be Wrong, Survivor-to-Survivor Storytelling,

and Healing,” Journal of American Folklore 125 (2012): 139–176; esp. p. 171.

24. William Greider, Introduction: “Who Will Protect

the Working Girl,” in The Triangle Fire, by Leon Stein, v–xvi (Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 2001).

25. Charles Perrow, Normal Accidents: Living with High- Risk Technology (New York: Basic Books, 1984).

26. Malcolm Gladwell, “Blowup,” The New Yorker, January 22, 1996, pp. 32–36.

27. John Maurice, “Mitigating Disasters—A Promis-

ing Start,” The Lancet 381, issue 9878 (May 11, 2913): 1611–1613.

28. Robert I. Tilling, U.S. Geological Survey, Eruptions of Mount St. Helens: Past, Present, and Future (Washing- ton, D.C.: Government Printing Offi ce, n.d.).

29. Philip Sarre, “Natural Hazards,” in Key Ideas in Human Thought, ed. Kenneth McLeish, 502–504 (New York: Facts on File, 1993).

30. U.S. Senate, Committee on Homeland Secu-

rity and Governmental Affairs, Hurricane Katrina: A Nation Still Unprepared (Washington, D.C.: Gov- ernment Printing Offi ce, 2006), p. 21. See also

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 657des35465_notes_601-670.indd 657 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

658 n o t e s

55. See International Work Group on Death, Dying,

and Bereavement, “Breaking the Cycles of Violence,”

Death Studies 29, no. 7 (2005): 585–600; and “Armed Confl ict: A Model for Understanding and Interven-

tion,” Death Studies 37, no. 1 (2013): 61–88.

56. Robert J. Sampson, Stephen W. Raudenbush, and

Felton Earls, “Neighborhoods and Violent Crime: A

Multilevel Study of Collective Effi cacy,” Science 277 (August 15, 1997): 918–923.

57. Cohen and Swift, “A Public Health Approach to

the Violence Epidemic in the United States.”

58. Arnold Toynbee, “Death in War,” in Death and Dying: Challenge and Change, ed. Robert Fulton and oth- ers (Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1978), p. 367.

59. James Lachlan Macleod, “‘Greater Love Hath No

Man Than This’: Scotland’s Confl icting Religious

Reponses to Death in the Great War,” Scottish Historical Review 81, no. 211 (April 2002): 70–96; quote p. 70.

60. Dalton Trumbo, Johnny Got His Gun (New York: Bantam Books, 1970), pp. 214, 224.

61. United Nations Population Fund, “Overview of

Adolescent Life,” State of World Population 2003, http:// www.unfpa.org/swp/2003/english/ch1/index.htm.

62. Sam Keen, Faces of the Enemy: Refl ections of the Hostile Imagination (San Francisco: Harper & Row, 1986), p. 71.

63. Gil Elliot, “Agents of Death,” in Death: Current Per- spectives, 3rd ed., ed. Edwin S. Shneidman (Mountain View, Calif.: Mayfi eld, 1984), pp. 422–440.

64. Gus Martin, Understanding Terrorism: Challenges, Perspectives, and Issues, 3rd ed. (Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage, 2010), p. 31.

65. Andrea Fontana and Jennifer Reid Keene, Death and Dying in America (Malden, Mass.: Polity, 2009), p. 131.

66. Elliot, “Agents of Death,” pp. 422–440.

67. Quoted in Shono Naomi, “Mute Reminders

of Hiroshima’s Atomic Bombing,” Japan Quarterly ( July–September 1993): 267–272. See also Robert Jay

Lifton, “Psychological Effects of the Atomic Bomb

in Hiroshima: The Theme of Death,” in The Threat of Impending Disaster: Contributions to the Psychology of Stress, ed. George H. Grosser, Henry Wechsler, and Milton

Greenblatt (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1964),

pp. 152–193.

68. Robert Jay Lifton and Eric Olson, Living and Dying (New York: Praeger, 1974), p. 32.

69. Ward Wilson, Five Myths about Nuclear Weapons (Boston: Houghton Miffl in, 2013), p. 32.

44. American Medical Association, Council on Scien-

tifi c Affairs, “Firearms Injuries and Deaths: A Critical

Public Health Issue,” Public Health Reports 104 (1989): 111–120. See also Leland Ropp and others, “Death in

the City: An American Childhood Tragedy,” Journal of the American Medical Association 267, no. 21 (1992): 2905–2910.

45. Ice-T, “The Killing Fields,” in The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and Dying, ed. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland, 178–181 (Mountain View,

Calif.: Mayfi eld, 1995).

46. Mitch Albom, “Random Shooting Paralyzes

Football Player,” Detroit Free Press, December 28, 1994, p. C1.

47. Bruce L. Danto, Mark L. Taff, and Lauren R.

Boglioli, “Graveside Deaths,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 33, no. 4 (1996): 265–278.

48. Quoted in Drew Leder, “Guns and Voices,” Second Opinion 20, no. 2 (1994): 83–89.

49. Betsy McAlister Groves and others, “Silent Victims:

Children Who Witness Violence,” Journal of the Ameri- can Medical Association 269, no. 2 (1993): 262–264.

50. Larry Cohen and Susan Swift, “A Public Health

Approach to the Violence Epidemic in the United

States,” Environment and Urbanization 5, no. 2 (1993): 50–66. See also Mary R. Jackman, “Violence in Social

Life,” Annual Review of Sociology 28 (2002): 387–415; and Stephen J. Morewitz, Death Threats and Violence: New Research and Clinical Perspectives (New York: Springer, 2008).

51. Dana D. DeHart and John M. Mahoney, “The

Serial Murderer’s Motivations: An Interdisciplinary

Review,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 29, no. 1 (1994): 29–45. See also T. D. Dogra and others, “A

Psychological Profi le of a Serial Killer: A Case Report,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 65, no. 4 (2012): 299–316.

52. Discussion based on Albert Lee Strickland, “Famil-

icide,” in The A-Z of Death & Dying: Social, Medical, and Cultural Aspects, ed. Michael John Brennan (Santa Barbara, Calif.: ABC-Clio/Greenwood, 2014). See also

George B. Palermo, “Murderous Parents,”

International Journal of Offender Therapy and Comparative Criminology 46, no. 2 (2002): 123–143.

53. Kastenbaum and Aisenberg, Psychology of Death, pp. 281–282.

54. Lula M. Redmond, Surviving When Someone You Love Was Murdered: A Professional’s Guide to Group Grief Therapy for Families and Friends of Murder Victims (Clear- water, Fla.: Psychological Consultation and Education

Services, 1989), p. 37.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 658des35465_notes_601-670.indd 658 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 13 659

article/20130308/BENEFITS05/303080301/

Report-details-fl aws-in-Army-s-handling-of-PTSD .

85. Jessie L. Bonner, “Iraq Veterans Use Fly Fishing

as Therapy, Finding Comfort on the Water,” AP News, October 18, 2009.

86. “A Tough Homecoming,” p. 11.

87. Marian Faye Novak, Lonely Girls with Burning Eyes: A Wife Recalls Her Husband’s Journey Home from Vietnam (Boston: Little, Brown, 1991), p. 3.

88. Lee Woodruff and Bob Woodruff, In an Instant: A Family’s Journey of Love and Healing (New York: Random House, 2007), p. 140.

89. From an account by Barbara Carton, Washington

Park Service, in the Honolulu Star-Bulletin & Advertiser, August 11, 1985.

90. Wilton S. Dillon, “Refl ections on Coping: Then,

Now, and Tomorrow,” Cosmos Journal (Washington, D.C.: The Cosmos Club, 2001).

91. John Horgan, The End of War (San Francisco: McSweeney’s, 2012), p. 102.

92. Keen, Faces of the Enemy, pp. 10–14.

93. Dennis Klass, “Grief, Religion, and Spirituality,”

in Death and Religion in a Changing World, 283–304, edited by Kathleen Garces-Foley (Armonk, N.Y.: M. E.

Sharpe, 2006), p. 301, slightly edited.

94. Debra Umberson and Kristin Henderson, “The

Social Construction of Death in the Gulf War,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 25, no. 1 (1992): 1–15.

95. Keen, Faces of the Enemy, pp. 180–181.

96. Horgan, The End of War, p. 165.

97. Keen, Faces of the Enemy, p. 137.

98. Ervin Staub, The Roots of Evil: The Origins of Geno- cide and Other Group Violence (New York: Cambridge University Press, 1989). See also, by Staub, “Genocide

and Mass Killing: Origins, Prevention, Healing, and

Reconciliation,” Political Psychology 21 (2000): 367–382.

99. Robert Kastenbaum, “Grieving in Contemporary

Society,” in Handbook of Bereavement Research and Prac- tice: Advances in Theory and Intervention, ed. Margaret S. Stroebe, Robert O. Hansson, Henk Schut, and Wolf-

gang Stroebe, 67–85 (Washington, D.C.: American

Psychological Association, 2008), p. 79.

100. Paul Rosenblatt, “Grief Across Cultures: A Review

and Research Agenda,” in Handbook of Bereavement Research and Practice, ed. Stroebe and others, 207–222; quote p. 214. See also, in the same volume, Colin Mur-

ray Parkes, “Bereavement Following Disasters,”

pp. 463–484.

70. Gail Holst-Warhaft, The Cue for Passion: Grief and Its Political Uses (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 2000), p. 174.

71. World Campaign for the Protection of Victims

of War, International Red Cross and Red Crescent

Movement. See also James Garbarino, “Challenges We

Face in Understanding Children and War: A Personal

Essay,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 169–174.

72. Glenn M. Vernon, Sociology of Death: An Analysis of Death-Related Behavior (New York: Ronald Press, 1970), p. 46.

73. Toynbee, “Death in War,” p. 367.

74. Anthony Swofford, Jarhead: A Marine’s Chronicle of the Gulf War and Other Battles (New York: Scribner, 2003), p. 7.

75. Joel Baruch, “Combat Death,” in Death: Current Perspectives, ed. Shneidman, pp. 92–93. Reprinted from Suicide and Life-Threatening Behavior 2, no. 3 (1972): 209–216.

76. Interview with military veteran, n.d.

77. Quoted in Trish Wood, What Was Asked of Us: An Oral History of the Iraq War by the Soldiers Who Fought It (New York: Little, Brown, 2006), p. 127.

78. See Robert Jay Lifton, Home from the War: Vietnam Veterans, Neither Victims Nor Executioners (New York: Basic Books, 1985); and Harvey J. Schwartz, “Fear of

the Dead: The Role of Social Ritual in Neutralizing

Fantasies from Combat,” in Psychotherapy of the Combat Veteran, ed. H. J. Schwartz (New York: SP Medical & Scientifi c Books, 1984), pp. 253–267.

79. See Harold A. Widdison and Howard G. Salis-

bury, “The Delayed Stress Syndrome: A Pathological

Delayed Grief Reaction?” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 20, no. 4 (1989–1990): 293–306.

80. Quoted in Michael Browning, “Homer’s ‘Iliad’

Has Lessons for Vietnam Nightmare,” Honolulu Adver- tiser, February 12, 1995, pp. B1, B4. See also Jonathan Shay, Achilles in Vietnam: Combat Trauma and the Undoing of Character (New York: Atheneum, 1994).

81. Paul Recer, “A Different Johnny,” Associated Press

wire story, March 3, 1991.

82. Timothy Kudo, “What War Does to Soldiers,” The Week (February 8, 2013); from a story originally pub- lished in The Washington Post.

83. “A Tough Homecoming,” The Week ( January 27, 2012), p. 11.

84. Gene Johnson, “Report Details Flaws in Army’s

Handling of PTSD,” http://www.armytimes.com/

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 659des35465_notes_601-670.indd 659 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

660 n o t e s

See also Brian Doyle, “Leap,” The American Scholar 71, no. 1 (2002): 69–70.

115. Friend, Watching the World Change, p. 35.

116. William Langewiesche, American Ground: Unbuild- ing the World Trade Center (New York: North Point, 2002), p. 45.

117. Lynne Ann DeSpelder, “September 11, 2001, and

the Internet,” Mortality 8, no. 1 (2003): 88–89.

118. Craig Calhoun, Paul Price, and Ashley Timmer,

“Introduction,” in Calhoun, Price, and Timmer, Under- standing September 11, p. 4. See also Shashi Tharoor, “The Global Century,” The American Scholar 71, no. 1 (2002): 66 –68.

119. See Marita Sturken, “Memorializing Absence,” in

Calhoun, Price, and Timmer, Understanding September 11, pp. 374–384, esp. 378–381.

120. Langewiesche, American Ground, p. 99.

121. Loolwa Khazzoom, “For ZAK A Rescue Volun-

teers, Grisly Deaths Are a Part of Life.” loolwa.com/

for-zaka-rescue-volunteers-grisly-deaths-are-a-part-of-

life/.

122. Michael Schudson, “What’s Unusual About Cov-

ering Politics as Usual,” in Journalism After September 11, ed. Barbie Zelizer and Stuart Allan (New York: Routledge, 2002), pp. 38–39; see also introduction by

Zelizer and Allan, pp. 8–9.

123. Philip Jenkins, Images of Terror: What We Can and Can’t Know About Terrorism (New York: Aldine de Gruyter, 2003), pp. 82–83.

124. Combs and Slann, Encyclopedia of Terrorism, p. 166.

125. Bruce D. Berkowitz, The New Face of War: How War Will Be Fought in the 21st Century (New York: Free Press, 2003), pp. 16 –17; see also Philip Bobbitt, The Shield of Achilles: War, Peace, and the Course of History (New York: Knopf, 2002), pp. 811, 821.

126. G. W. Bowersock, Martyrdom and Rome (Cam- bridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995), pp. 17–18,

25, 59, 61.

127. Mark Juergensmeyer, “Religious Terror and

Global War,” in Understanding September 11, ed. Calhoun, Price, and Timmer, pp. 27–49; quote p. 29.

See also Kelton Cobb, “Violent Faith,” in 11 September: Religious Perspectives on the Causes and Consequences, ed. Ian Markham and Ibrahim M. Abu-Rabi (Oxford:

OneWorld, 2002), pp. 136 –163; and Bruce Lincoln,

Holy Terrors: Thinking About Religion After September 11 (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2003).

128. Laqueur, No End to War, pp. 71, 91.

101. Colin Murray Parkes, “Genocide in Rwanda: Per-

sonal Refl ections,” Mortality 1, no. 1 (1996): 95–110.

102. Anonymous epigraph in Aref M. Al-Kattar, Reli- gion and Terrorism: An Interfaith Perspective (Westport, Conn.: Praeger, 2003), p. 3.

103. See Philip Jenkins, Images of Terror: What We Can and Can’t Know About Terrorism (New York: Aldine de Gruyter, 2003), p. 28; and Walter Laqueur, No End to War: Terrorism in the Twenty-First Century (New York: Continuum, 2003), p. 233.

104. See, for example, Caleb Carr, The Lessons of Terror: A History of Warfare Against Civilians, Why It Has Always Failed and Why It Will Fail Again (New York: Random House, 2002), pp. 7, 9, 12–14.

105. Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary, 11th ed. (Springfi eld, Mass.: Merriam-Webster, 2003), p. 1049.

106. Walter Laqueur, The Age of Terrorism (Boston: Little, Brown, 1987), p. 72.

107. Cindy C. Combs and Martin Slann, Encyclopedia of Terrorism (New York: Facts on File, 2002), pp. 208–211.

108. Joseph S. Tuman, Communicating Terror: The Rhetorical Dimensions of Terrorism, 2nd ed. (Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage, 210), p. xiii.

109. Tom Pyszczynski, Sheldon Solomon, and Jeff

Greenberg, In the Wake of 9/11: The Psychology of Terror (Washington, D.C.: American Psychological Associa-

tion, 2003), pp. 8, 16, 127.

110. On September 17, 1862, in the Battle of Antie-

tam, 6,000 were killed outright or mortally wounded,

and another 16,000 were wounded and survived. At

least 620,000 died during the course of the Civil War.

See James M. McPherson, “The Lesson of Antietam,”

The American Scholar 71, no. 1 (2002): 64–65.

111. Harold Dow, quoted in Cathy Trost and Alicia

C. Shepard, Running Toward Danger: Stories Behind the Breaking News of 9/11 (Lanham, Md.: Rowman & Little- fi eld, 2002) , p. 247.

112. David Friend, Watching the World Change: The Sto- ries Behind the Images of 9/11 (New York: Farrar, Straus & Giroux, 2006), p. 32.

113. Nilüfer Göle, “Close Encounters, Islam, Moder-

nity, and Violence,” in Understanding September 11, ed. Craig Calhoun, Paul Price, and Ashley Timmer

(New York: New Press, 2002), pp. 332–344. See also

CBS News, What We Saw: The Events of September 11 in Words, Pictures, and Video (New York: Simon & Schuster, 2002).

114. Richard Bernstein and Staff of The New York

Times, Out of the Blue: The Story of September 11, 2001, From Jihad to Ground Zero (New York: Times Books, 2002), p. 3.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 660des35465_notes_601-670.indd 660 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 13 661

142. Robert Kastenbaum, “Reconstructing Death in

Postmodern Society,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 7–18.

143. Mitchell Duneier, Slim’s Table: Race, Respectability, and Masculinity (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1992), p. 75.

144. Margaret A. Chesney, “Health Psychology in the

21st Century: Acquired Immunodefi ciency Syndrome

as a Harbinger of Things to Come,” Health Psychology 12, no. 4 (1993): 259–268.

145. See Laurie Garrett, The Coming Plague: Newly Emerging Diseases in a World Out of Balance (New York: Farrar, Straus & Giroux, 1994). See also Robert

Berkow, ed., The Merck Manual of Diagnosis and Therapy, 16th ed. (Rahway, N.J.: Merck Research Laboratories,

1992), pp. 211–220.

146. Bernard Le Guenno, “Emerging Viruses,” Scien- tifi c American (October 1995): 56 –64.

147. See Gunjan Sinha and Burkhard Bilger, “Skeletons in

the Attic: Has the Scourge of Athens Returned to Haunt

Us?” The Sciences 36, no. 5 (September–October 1996): 11; and Matt Crenson, “Researcher: Plague Sparked Ebola,”

Associated Press Online (January 20, 1997).

148. Brian Vastag, “Virtual Worlds, Real Science:

Epidemiologists, Social Scientists Flock to the Online

World,” Science News 172, no. 17 (October 27, 2007): 264–265.

149. Rodrick Wallace and Deborah Wallace, “Inner-

City Disease and the Public Health of the Suburbs:

The Sociogeographical Dispersion of Point-Source

Infection,” Environment and Planning Abstracts 25 (1993): 1707–1723; and “The Coming Crisis of Public

Health in the Suburbs,” Milbank Quarterly 71, no. 4 (1993): 543–564. See also Rodrick Wallace and others,

“Will AIDS Be Contained Within U.S. Minority Urban

Populations?” Social Science & Medicine 39, no. 8 (1994): 1051–1062.

150. Rodrick Wallace and John Pittman, “Recurrence

of Contagious Urban Desertifi cation and the Social

Thanatology of New York City,” Environment and Plan- ning Abstracts 24 ( June 1992): 1–6.

151. Wallace and Pittmann, “Recurrence of Conta-

gious Urban Desertifi cation,” p. 1.

152. Richard Rothenberg, “Chronicle of an Epidemic

Foretold: A Response to the Wallaces,” Milbank Quar- terly 71, no. 4 (1993): 565–574.

153. Paul Recer, “Origin of 1918 Flu Pandemic

Found,” Associated Press Online (March 20, 1997).

154. William R. Clark, Sex and the Origins of Death (New York: Oxford University Press, 1996), p. 177.

129. Aaron T. Beck, “Prisoners of Hate,” Behaviour Research and Therapy 40, no. 3 (2002): 209–216, and Prisoners of Hate: The Cognitive Basis of Anger, Hostility, and Violence (New York: HarperCollins, 1999).

130. Tharoor, “Global Century,” p. 68.

131. Daniel Leviton, “Horrendous Death: Improv-

ing the Quality of Global Health,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 165–168; see also,

edited by Leviton, Horrendous Death, Health, and Well- Being (New York: Hemisphere, 1991), and Horrendous Death and Health: Toward Action (New York: Taylor and Francis, 1991). See also Richard A. Pacholski, “Teach-

ing Nuclear Holocaust, the Basic Thanatological

Topic,” Death Studies 13, no. 2 (1989): 175–183.

132. Daniel Leviton and William Wendt, “Death Edu-

cation: Toward Individual and Global Well-Being,”

Death Education 7, no. 4 (1983): 369–384; quote p. 301.

133. Daniel Leviton, “Horrendous Death,” in Death and the Quest for Meaning: Essays in Honor of Herman Feifel, ed. Stephen Strack (Northvale, N.J.: Jason Aronson, 1997), pp. 301–327; quote p. 303.

134. Leviton, “Horrendous Death,” p. 309.

135. Stephen M. Younger, The Bomb: A New History (New York: HarperCollins, 2009), p. 10.

136. J. Travis, “New Drugs Beat Old Flu,” Science News 162 (September 28, 2002): 196.

137. Travis, “New Drugs Beat Old Flu.” See also

Monica Schoch-Spana, “‘Hospital’s Full-Up’: The 1918

Infl uenza Pandemic,” Public Health Reports 116 (2001): 32–33.

138. UN World Health Organization, Global Alert

and Response (GAR); http://www.who.int/csr/en/ .

139. Joint United Nations Programme on HIV/

AIDS (UNAIDS); www.unaids.org/en/dataanalysis/

datatools/aidsinfo/ .

140. See Mary Catherine Bateson and Richard

Goldsby, Thinking AIDS: The Social Response to the Bio- logical Threat (Reading, Mass.: Addison-Wesley, 1988); Douglas Crimp, ed., AIDS: Cultural Analysis, Cultural Activism (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1988); Albert R. Jonsen and Jeff Stryker, eds., The Social Impact of AIDS (Washington, D.C.: National Academy Press, 1993); Eve K. Nichols, Mobilizing Against AIDS, rev. ed. (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1989);

and Randy Shilts, And the Band Played On: Politics, People, and the AIDS Epidemic (New York: Viking Penguin, 1988).

141. Charles E. Rosenberg, “What Is an Epidemic?

AIDS in Historical Perspective,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 29–32.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 661des35465_notes_601-670.indd 661 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

662 n o t e s

12. Stephen J. Vicchio, “Against Raising Hope of Rais-

ing the Dead: Contra Moody and Kübler-Ross,” Essence: Issues in the Study of Ageing, Dying and Death 3, no. 2 (1979): 63.

13. See Lou H. Silberman in “Death in the Hebrew

Bible and Apocalyptic Literature,” in Perspectives on Death, ed. L. O. Mills (Nashville: Abingdon Press, 1969), pp. 13–32. The “Samuel” story is told in the fi rst

book of Samuel (28:3–25).

14. H. Wheeler Robinson, “Hebrew Psychology,” in

The People and the Book, ed. Arthur S. Peake (London: Oxford University Press, 1925), pp. 353–382.

15. See, for example, Leon Wieseltier, Kaddish (New York: Knopf, 1998).

16. Earl A. Grollman, “The Ritualistic and Theologi-

cal Approach of the Jew,” in Explaining Death to Chil- dren, ed. Grollman (Boston: Beacon Press, 1967), pp. 223–245; and Jonathan Boyarin, “Death and the Min- yan, ” Cultural Anthropology 9, no. 1 (1994): 3–22.

17. See Jasper Griffi n, Homer on Life and Death (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1980).

18. See C. Fred Alford, “Greek Tragedy and the Place

of Death in Life: A Psychoanalytic Perspective,” Psy- choanalysis and Contemporary Thought 15, no. 2 (1992): 129–159.

19. Carol Zaleski, “In Defense of Immortality,” First Things (August–September 2000): 36 –42; quote p. 40.

20. Oscar Cullman, Immortality of the Soul or Resurrec- tion of the Dead? The Witness of the New Testament (London: Epworth Press, 1958), pp. 26 –27.

21. Cullman, Immortality of the Soul or Resurrection of the Dead?, p. 27.

22. Boniface Ramsey, Beginning to Read the Fathers (New York: Paulist Press, 1985), p. 218.

23. William Barclay, Introducing the Bible (Nashville: Abingdon Press, 1972), p. 123.

24. Anderson, Theology, Death and Dying, p. 59. See also Murray J. Harris, Raised Immortal: Resurrection and Immortality in the New Testament (Grand Rapids, Mich.: Eerdmans, 1985).

25. John D. Zizioulas, “The Early Christian Com-

munity,” in Christian Spirituality: Origins to the Twelfth Century, ed. Bernard McGinn and John Meyendorff, 23–43 (New York: Crossroad, 1992), p. 31.

26. Milton McC. Gatch, Death: Meaning and Mortality in Christian Thought and Contemporary Culture (New York: Seabury Press, 1969), p. 78.

27. Richard P. McBrien, The HarperCollins Encyclopedia of Catholicism (San Francisco: HarperCollins, 1995),

155. Jeffrey Kauffman, “Culture, Socialization, and

Traumatic Death,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 275–284; quote p. 275. See also

Jeffrey Kauffman, Loss of the Assumptive World: A Theory of Traumatic Loss (New York: Routledge, 2002).

156. Lillian M. Range, “Historical and Contemporary

Perspectives on Traumatic Death,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. Meagher and Balk, 291–296; p. 291.

157. Range, “Historical and Contemporary Perspec-

tives on Traumatic Death,” p. 273.

C H A P T E R 1 4

1. This account is based on “Coffi ns and Sarcophagi,”

exhibition note, Metropolitan Museum of Art, New

York; Henri Frankfort, Ancient Egyptian Religion: An Interpretation (New York: Harper & Row, 1948, 1961); Manfred Lurker, The Gods and Symbols of Ancient Egypt (New York: Thames & Hudson, 1980); A. J. Spencer,

Death in Ancient Egypt (New York: Penguin, 1982); and Barbara Watterson, The Gods of Ancient Egypt (New York: Facts on File, 1984).

2. Quoted in Jeffery L. Sheler, “Heaven in the Age of

Reason,” U.S. News & World Report 122, no. 12 (1997): 65–66; italics added.

3. Interview with Mikal Gilmore, Rolling Stone (December 22, 2001).

4. Bertrand Russell, Unpopular Essays (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1950), p. 141.

5. See “The Problem of Immortality,” in Jacques

Choron, Death and Modern Man (New York: Collier, 1964).

6. Geddes MacGregor, Images of Afterlife: Beliefs from Antiquity to Modern Times (New York: Paragon House, 1992), p. 209.

7. Mary Kawena Pukui, E. W. Haertig, and Catherine

A. Lee, Nana I Ke Kumu (Look to the Source), vols. 1 and 2 (Honolulu: Hui Hanai; Queen Lili’uokalani Chil-

dren’s Center, 1972). See also E. S. Craighill Handy

and Mary Kawena Pukui, The Polynesian Family System in Ka-’u, Hawai’i (Rutland, Vt.: Charles E. Tuttle, 1972).

8. Ray S. Anderson, Theology, Death and Dying (New York: Basil Blackwell, 1986), p. 38.

9. Ellen Levine, “Jewish Views and Customs on

Death,” in Death and Bereavement Across Cultures, ed. Colin Murray Parkes, Pitti Laungani, and Bill Young

(New York: Routledge, 1997), pp. 98–130.

10. Job 7:9, The Jerusalem Bible. See also Job 14:7–12.

11. Daniel 12:2, The Jerusalem Bible.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 662des35465_notes_601-670.indd 662 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 14 663

from the History and Anthropology of Religions, ed. Frank E. Reynolds and Earle H. Waugh (University Park:

Pennsylvania State University Press, 1977), p. 184. See

also Shahzad Bashir, “Deciphering the Cosmos from

Creation to Apocalypse: The Hurufi yya Movement and

Medieval Islamic Esotericism,” in Imagining the End: Visions of Apocalypse from the Ancient Middle East to Modern America, ed. Abbas Amanat and Magnus Bernhardsson (London: I. B. Tauris, 2002),

pp. 168–184; and “Enshrining Divinity: The Death and

Memorialization of Fazlallah Astarabadi in Hurufi

Thought,” Muslim World 90, nos. 3–4 (2000): 289–308.

39. Huston Smith, The Religions of Man (New York: New American Library, 1958), p. 215.

40. See J. I. Smith and Y. Haddad, The Islamic Under- standing of Death and Resurrection (Albany: State Univer- sity of New York Press, 1981).

41. Esposito, Islam: The Straight Path, p. 35.

42. Welch, “Death and Dying in the Qur’an,” p. 193.

43. D. S. Roberts, Islam: A Concise Introduction (San Francisco: Harper and Row, 1981), p. 128.

44. Roberts, Islam, p. 128. See also Suzanne Evans, “The Scent of a Martyr,” Numen: International Review for the History of Religions 49, no. 2 (2002): 193–211.

45. Abdul Latif Al Hoa, Islam (New York: Bookwright Press, 1987), p. 20.

46. Hend Yasien-Esmael and Simon Shimson Rubin,

“The Meaning Structures of Muslim Bereavements

in Israel: Religious Traditions, Mourning Practices,

and Human Experience,” Death Studies 29 (2005): 495–518.

47. Chuang Tzu, Basic Writings, trans. Burton Watson (New York: Columbia University Press, 1964), p. 76.

48. Mario Poceski, Introducing Chinese Religions (New York: Routledge, 2009), p. 76.

49. T. N. Madan, “Dying with Dignity,” Social Science & Medicine 35, no. 4 (1992): 425–432.

50. Bhagavad-Gita II.27, trans. Swami Nikhilananda (New York: Ramakrishna-Vivekananda Center, 1952),

p. 79.

51. Smith, Religions of Man, p. 34.

52. E. M. Jackson, “Moksha,” in Key Ideas in Human Thought, ed. Kenneth McLeish (New York: Facts on File, 1993), pp. 482–483.

53. Bhagavad-Gita II.22, trans. Nikhilananda, p. 77.

54. J. Bruce Long, “Death as a Necessity and a Gift

in Hindu Mythology,” in Religious Encounters with Death, ed. Reynolds and Waugh, p. 92; see also pp. 73 –96.

p. 1070. See also Alan E. Bernstein, The Formation of Hell: Death and Retribution in the Ancient and Early Christian Worlds (Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1993); Stephen Greenblatt, Hamlet in Purgatory (Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 2001); and

Jacques Le Goff, The Birth of Purgatory (Chicago: Uni- versity of Chicago Press, 1984).

28. Purgatory is not to be confused with limbo, “a place or state where unbaptized persons enjoy a natural hap-

piness, though they remain excluded from the Beatifi c

Vision.” See McBrien, The HarperCollins Encyclopedia of Catholicism, p. 771.

29. Jerry L. Walls, Purgatory: The Logic of Total Trans- formation (New York: Oxford University Press, 2012), p. 25.

30. Jacques Le Goff, The Birth of Purgatory, trans. Arthur Goldhammer (Chicago: The University of

Chicago Press, 1984), p. 58.

31. Anthony C. Thiselton, The Last Things: A New Approach (London: SPCK, 2012), p. 1.

32. Zaleski, “In Defense of Immortality,” quote p.

41. See also Alister E. McGrath, “Last Things: The

Christian Hope” (Chapter 18), in Christian Theology: An Introduction, 3rd ed. (Malden, Mass.: Blackwell, 2001), pp. 553–577.

33. Vicchio, “Against Raising Hope,” p. 62. See also

Gordon E. Geddes, Welcome Joy: Death in Puritan New England (Ann Arbor, Mich.: UMI Research Press, 1981); and David E. Stannard, The Puritan Way of Death: A Study of Religion, Culture, and Social Change (New York: Oxford University Press, 1977).

34. Constantine Callinicos, Beyond the Grave: An Orthodox Theology of Eschatology, trans. George Dimo- poulos and Leslie Jerome Newville (Scranton, Penn.:

Christian Orthodox Editions, 1969), p. 158. See also

Stanley Samuel Harakas, Health and Medicine in the Eastern Orthodox Tradition: Faith, Liturgy, and Wholeness (New York: Crossroad, 1990), esp. pp. 151–159.

35. Peter C. Phan, Responses to 101 Questions on Death and Eternal Life (New York: Paulist Press, 1997), pp. 18, 129. See also Douglas Connelly, Bible Prophecy for Block- heads: A User-Friendly Look at the End Times (Grand Rapids, Mich.: Zondervan, 2002), pp. 164–166; and

Regis Martin, The Last Things: Death, Judgment, Heaven, Hell (San Francisco: Ignatius, 1998), p. 118.

36. John L. Esposito, Islam: The Straight Path (New York: Oxford University Press, 1988), p. 22.

37. Frithjof Schuon, Understanding Islam (Baltimore: Penguin, 1972), p. 16.

38. Alfred T. Welch, “Death and Dying in the

Qur’an,” in Religious Encounters with Death: Insights

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 663des35465_notes_601-670.indd 663 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

664 n o t e s

Walter, 325–348 (Honolulu: University of Hawaii

Press, 2008), p. 328.

71. Tanabe, “The Orthodox Heresy of Buddhist

Funerals,” p. 345.

72. W. Y. Evans-Wentz, The Tibetan Book of the Dead: or, the After-Death Experiences on the Bardo Plane, According to Lama Kazi Dawa-Samup’s English Rendering (New York: Oxford University Press, 1960).

73. Quoted in Kapleau, Zen: Dawn in the West, p. 68.

74. Quoted in William R. Clark, Sex and the Origins of Death (New York: Oxford University Press, 1996), p. 159.

75. See Robert E. Goss and Dennis Klass, “Tibetan

Buddhism and the Resolution of Grief: The Bardo-

Thodol for the Dying and Grieving,” Death Studies 21 (1997): 377–395.

76. Francesca Fremantle and Chögyam Trungpa, eds.,

The Tibetan Book of the Dead: The Great Liberation Through Hearing in the Bardo, by Guru Rinpoche According to Karma Lingpa (Boulder, Colo.: Shambhala, 1975).

77. Christopher Carr, “Death and Near-Death: A Com-

parison of Tibetan and Euro-American Experiences,”

Journal of Transpersonal Psychology 25, no. 1 (1993): 59–110. See also Uwe P. Gielen, “A Death on the Roof

of the World,” in Death and Bereavement Across Cultures, pp. 73–97.

78. See Paul Badham and Linda Badham, eds., Death and Immortality in the Religions of the World (New York: Paragon House, 1987).

79. Karolynn Siegel, Stanley J. Anderman, and Eric

W. Schrimshaw, “Religion and Coping with Health-

Related Stress,” Psychology and Health 16 (2001): 631–653.

80. Lucy Bregman, “The Roles of Religions in the

Death Awareness Movement,” The Forum 32, no. 2 (2006): 4–5, quote p. 4.

81. Vernon Reynolds and Ralph Tanner, The Social Ecology of Religion (New York: Oxford University Press, 1995), p. 211.

82. Phil Zuckerman, “The Sociology of Religion of

W. E. B. Du Bois,” Sociology of Religion 63, no. 2 (2002): 239–253.

83. Ruth A. Tanyi, “Towards Clarifi cation of the

Meaning of Spirituality,” Journal of Advanced Nursing 39, no. 5 (2002): 500–509; quote, p. 506.

84. Ralph L. Piedmont, “Does Spirituality Represent

the Sixth Factor of Personality? Spiritual Transcen-

dence and the Five-Factor Model,” Journal of Personality 67, no. 6 (1999): 987–1013; quoted material 988–989.

55. David R. Kinsley in “The ‘Death That Conquers

Death’: Dying to the World in Medieval Hinduism,”

in Religious Encounters with Death, ed. Reynolds and Waugh, pp. 97–108. See also Pittu Laungani, “Death

in a Hindu Family,” in Death and Bereavement Across Cul- tures, pp. 52–72.

56. Philip Kapleau, Zen: Dawn in the West (Garden City, N.Y.: Anchor Press/Doubleday, 1979), p. 296. See also,

ed. Kapleau, The Wheel of Death: A Collection of Writings from Zen Buddhist and Other Sources on Death-Rebirth- Dying (New York: Harper and Row, 1971), and The Wheel of Life and Death: A Practical and Spiritual Guide (New York: Doubleday, 1989).

57. “Awakening to the Bodhi-Mind (Hotsu Bodai-

shin),” from the Shobo-Genzo, in Zen Master Dogen, trans. Yuho Yokoi, p. 109.

58. Kapleau, Zen: Dawn in the West, pp. 67–68.

59. Carl B. Becker, Breaking the Circle: Death and the Afterlife in Buddhism (Carbondale: Southern Illinois University Press, 1993), p. 7.

60. Ronald L. Grimes, Deeply into the Bone: Re-Inventing Rites of Passage (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2000), p. 225.

61. Grimes, Deeply into the Bone , p. 224.

62. “The Meaning of Practice-Enlightenment (Susho-

gi),” in Zen Master Dō gen: An Introduction with Selected Writings, trans. Yuho Yokoi (New York/Tokyo: Weath- erhill, 1976), p. 58.

63. Susan Orpett Long, Final Days: Japanese Culture and Choice at the End of Life (Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 2005), p. 69.

64. “The Meaning of Practice-Enlightenment

(Shusho-gi),” p. 58.

65. The Zen Master Hakuin: Selected Writings, trans. Philip B. Yampolsky (New York: Columbia University

Press, 1971), p. 219.

66. Long, Final Days, p. 69.

67. Jonathan S. Watts, “Introduction,” in Buddhist Care for the Dying and Bereaved, 1–17, ed. Jonathan S. Watts and Yosiharu Tomatsu (Boston: Wisdom, 2012),

pp. 4–5.

68. Kapleau, Zen: Dawn in the West, p. 69.

69. For more on Pure Land Buddhism, see “The After-

life in Pure Land Buddhism,” Chapter 3, pp. 46 –62,

in Becker, Breaking the Circle: Death and the Afterlife in Buddhism.

70. George J. Tanabe, Jr., “The Orthodox Heresy of

Buddhist Funerals,” in Death and the Afterlife in Japanese Buddhism, ed. Jacqueline I. Stone and Mariko Namba

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 664des35465_notes_601-670.indd 664 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 14 665

97. Carol Zaleski, Otherworld Journeys: Accounts of Near- Death Experience in Medieval and Modern Times (New York: Oxford University Press, 1987).

98. Paul Badham, “Religious and Near-Death Experi-

ence in Relation to Belief in a Future Life,” Mortality 2, no. 1 (1997): 7–21.

99. Bruce Greyson, “Near-Death Experiences,” in

Varieties of Anomalous Experience: Examining the Scientifi c Evidence, ed. Etzel Cardeña, Steven Jay Lynn, and Stanley Krippner (Washington, D.C.: American Psy-

chological Association, 2000), pp. 315–352; defi nition

pp. 315–316.

100. Kenneth Ring, Life at Death: A Scientifi c Investiga- tion of the Near-Death Experience (New York: Coward, McCann & Geoghegan, 1980), and Heading Toward Omega: In Search of the Meaning of the Near-Death Experi- ence (New York: Morrow, 1984). See also Bruce Greyson, “Varieties of Near-Death Experience,” Psychiatry 56 (1993): 390–399; and Raymond A. Moody, Jr., Life After Life, and its sequel, Refl ections on Life After Life (various editions).

101. Bruce Greyson, “Reduced Death Threat in

Near-Death Experiencers,” in Death Anxiety Handbook: Research, Instrumentation, and Application, ed. Robert A. Neimeyer (Washington, D.C.: Taylor & Francis, 1994),

pp. 169–179, esp. pp. 169, 177.

102. H. J. Irwin, An Introduction to Parapsychology ( Jefferson, N.C.: McFarland, 1989), pp. 188–190.

103. William J. Serdahely, “The Near-Death Experi-

ence: Is the Presence Always the Higher Self?” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 18, no. 2 (1987–1988): 129–134.

104. William J. Serdahely, “A Pediatric Near-Death

Experience: Tunnel Variants,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 20, no. 1 (1989–1990): 55–62. See also William J. Serdahely and Barbara A. Walker, “A Near-

Death Experience at Birth,” Death Studies 14, no. 2 (1990): 177–183.

105. See Bruce Greyson and Nancy Evans Bush, “Dis-

tressing Near-Death Experiences,” Psychiatry 55 (February 1992): 95–110; and P. M. H. Atwater, “Is

There a Hell? Surprising Observations About the

Near-Death Experience,” Journal of Near-Death Studies 10, no. 3 (Spring 1992): 149–160.

106. Brendan I. Koerner, “Is There Life After Death?”

U.S. News & World Report 122, no. 12 (1997): 59–64.

107. Ian Stevenson, Emily W. Cook, and Nicholas

McClean-Rice, “Are Persons Reporting ‘Near-Death

Experiences’ Really Near Death? A Study of Medical

Records,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 20, no. 1 (1989–1990): 45–54.

85. Norman Goodman, Introduction to Sociology (New York: HarperCollins, 1992), p. 215.

86. Ira R. Byock, “To Life! Refl ections on Spirituality,

Palliative Practice, and Politics,” American Journal of Hospice & Palliative Medicine 23, no. 6 (2007): 436 –438; quote, p. 436.

87. Davina A. Allen, “Secularization,” in Key Ideas in Human Thought, ed. McLeish, p. 668. See also Charles Taylor, A Secular Age (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard Uni- versity Press, 2007); and James Turner, Without God, Without Creed: The Origins of Unbelief in America (Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1985).

88. Colin Murray Parkes, “Conclusions II: Attach-

ments and Losses in Cross-Cultural Perspective,” in

Death and Bereavement Across Cultures, pp. 233–243; quote p. 234.

89. E. M. Jackson and Kenneth McLeish, “Human-

ism,” in Key Ideas in Human Thought, ed. McLeish, pp. 355–356.

90. Kenneth McLeish, “Existentialism,” in Key Ideas in Human Thought, ed. McLeish, pp. 265–266; quote p. 265. See also William Barrett, Irrational Man: A Study in Existential Philosophy (New York: Doubleday, 1958), and Death of the Soul: From Descartes to the Computer (New York: Anchor/Doubleday, 1986).

91. See Robert J. Lifton, The Future of Immortality and Other Essays for a Nuclear Age (New York: Basic Books, 1987), and The Broken Connection: On Death and the Continuity of Life (New York: Basic Books, 1983; reprint, Washington, D.C.: American Psychiatric

Press, 1996).

92. Sheler, “Heaven in the Age of Reason”; see also Jef-

fery L. Sheler, “Hell’s Sober Comeback,” U.S. News & World Report, March 25, 1991, pp. 56 –57; and Daniel J. Klenow and Robert C. Bolin, “Belief in an Afterlife: A

National Survey,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 20, no. 1 (1989–1990): 63–74.

93. Andrew M. Greeley and Michael Hout, “Ameri-

cans’ Increasing Belief in Life After Death: Religious

Competition and Acculturation,” American Sociological Review 64, no. 6 (1999): 813–835.

94. David Lester and others, “What Is the Afterlife

Like? Undergraduate Beliefs about the Afterlife,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 44, no. 2 (2001–2002): 113–126.

95. Quoted in David Cockburn, “Simone Weil on

Death,” Mortality 2, no. 1 (1997): 63–72.

96. The Meditations of Marcus Aurelius, trans. George Long, The Harvard Classics, vol. 2, ed. Charles W. Elliot, pp. 193–301; see especially section II, 5 and 11,

pp. 201–202.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 665des35465_notes_601-670.indd 665 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

666 n o t e s

the Age of Reason”; Greeley and Hout, “Americans’

Increasing Belief in Life After Death”; and Klenow

and Bolin, “Belief in an Afterlife: A National Survey.”

115. Louis Appleby, British Medical Journal 298 (April 15, 1989): 976 –977. See also Michael Potts, “Sensory Expe-

riences in Near-Death Experiences and the Thomistic

View of the Soul,” International Journal for Philosophy of Religion 49, no. 2 (2001): 85–100.

116. Zaleski, Otherworld Journeys, p. 182.

117. Raymond A. Moody, Jr., “An Omega Interview

[by Robert Kastenbaum],” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 31, no. 2 (1995): 87–97.

118. From a conversation between Herman Feifel and

John Morgan, “Humanity Has to Be the Model,” Death Studies 10, no. 1 (1986): 1–9.

119. Robert Kastenbaum, “Happily Ever After,” in

Between Life and Death, ed. Kastenbaum, pp. 17, 19. See also Bruce Greyson, “Near-Death Experiences and

Deathbed Visions,” in The Study of Dying: From Autonomy to Transformation, ed. Allan Kellehear, 253–275 (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2009).

120. Charles A. Garfi eld, “The Dying Patient’s Con-

cern with ‘Life After Death,’” in Between Life and Death, ed. Kastenbaum, pp. 52–57.

121. Kelly Bulkeley and Patricia Bulkley, Dreaming Beyond Death: A Guide to Pre-Death Dreams and Visions (Boston: Beacon Press, 2005), p. 12.

122. Marie-Louise von Franz, On Death and Dreams: A Jungian Interpretation (Boston: Shambhala, 1986), pp. viii–ix.

123. Franz, On Death and Dreams, p. 156.

124. Franz, On Death and Dreams, pp. 66 –67.

125. Some evidence suggests that LSD may interfere

with the transfer of oxygen on the enzymatic level.

Anoxia, or diminished levels of oxygen in the bodily

tissues, is also found in dying patients as well as in

conjunction with certain yogic techniques involving

breath control. Thus, anoxia may activate transper-

sonal matrices in the unconscious, giving rise to

experiences associated with near-death experiences,

certain yogic states, and LSD sessions. See Grof and

Halifax, The Human Encounter with Death, pp. 183ff; and Thomas J. Riedlinger and June R. Riedlinger,

“Psychedelic and Entactogenic Drugs in the Treatment

of Depression,” Journal of Psychoactive Drugs 26, no. 1 (1994): 41–55.

126. Stanislav Grof, Realms of the Human Unconscious: Observations from LSD Research (New York: E. P. Dutton, 1976). See also Robert B. Millman and Ann Bordwine

Beeder, “The New Psychedelic Culture: LSD, Ecstasy,

108. For an introduction to the main points of view,

see Stephen J. Vicchio, “Near-Death Experiences: A

Critical Review of the Literature and Some Questions

for Further Study,” Essence: Issues in the Study of Ageing, Dying and Death 5, no. 1 (1981): 77–89. See also James E. Alcock, “Psychology and Near-Death Experiences,”

The Skeptical Inquirer 3, no. 3 (Spring 1979): 25–41; Michael B. Sabom, Recollections of Death: A Medical Investigation (New York: Harper and Row, 1981); and Stephen J. Vicchio, “Near-Death Experiences: Some

Logical Problems and Questions for Further Study,”

Anabiosis: The Journal of the International Association for Near-Death Studies (1981): 66 –87. The history of research into NDEs is traced in Stanislav Grof and

Joan Halifax, The Human Encounter with Death (New York: E. P. Dutton, 1978), Chapter 7, “Consciousness

and the Threshold of Death,” pp. 131–157.

109. See Handy and Pukui, The Polynesian Family System in Ka-’u, Hawai’i; Donald D. Kilolani Mitchell, Resource Units in Hawaiian Culture (Honolulu: Kamehameha Schools Press, 1982); and Pukui, Haertig, and Lee,

Nana I Ke Kumu (Look to the Source), vols. 1 and 2.

110. Pukui, Haertig, and Lee, Nana I Ke Kumu (Look to the Source), vol. 1, p. 40.

111. See Roy Kletti and Russell Noyes, Jr., “Mental

States in Mortal Danger,” which includes a translation

of Oskar Pfi ster’s 1930 paper commenting on Heim’s

observations, in Essence: Issues in the Study of Ageing, Dying and Death 5, no. 1 (1981): 5–20.

112. See Russell Noyes, Jr., “Dying and Mystical Con-

sciousness,” Journal of Thanatology I (1971): 25–41; Russell Noyes, Jr., and Roy Kletti, “Depersonalization

in the Face of Life-Threatening Danger: An Interpreta-

tion,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 7, no. 2 (1976): 103–114, and “Panoramic Memory: A Response to the

Threat of Death,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 8, no. 3 (1977): 181–194; Russell Noyes, Jr., “Near-Death

Experiences: Their Interpretation and Signifi cance,”

in Between Life and Death, ed. Robert Kastenbaum (New York: Springer, 1979), pp. 73–78; and Russell Noyes,

Jr., “The Encounter with Life-Threatening Danger: Its

Nature and Impact,” Essence: Issues in the Study of Age- ing, Dying and Death 5, no. 1 (1981): 21–32.

113. Karlis Osis and Erlendur Haraldsson, “Deathbed

Observations of Physicians and Nurses: A Cross-

Cultural Survey,” in The Signet Handbook of Parapsychol- ogy, ed. Martin Ebon (New York: Signet/NAL, 1978); and, by Osis and Haraldsson, At the Hour of Death (New York: Avon Books, 1977). See also, by Haraldsson, “Sur-

vey of Claimed Encounters with the Dead,” Omega: Jour- nal of Death and Dying 19, no. 2 (1988–1989): 103–113.

114. George Gallup, Jr., Adventures in Immortality (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1982). See also Sheler, “Heaven in

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 666des35465_notes_601-670.indd 666 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 15 667

2. Donald Keene, The Pleasures of Japanese Literature (New York: Columbia University Press, 1988), p. 86.

3. David Clark, ed., The Sociology of Death: Theory, Cul- ture, Practice (Cambridge, Mass.: Blackwell, 1993), p. 3.

4. Thomas Attig, “Coping with Mortality: An Essay on

Self-Mourning,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 337–341. See also Herman Feifel and

Steven Strack, “Thanatologists View Death: A 15-Year

Perspective,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 43, no. 2 (2001): 97–111; and, in the same issue, Jeanne Quint

Benoliel, “Commentary: Thanatologists View Death”

(117–118).

5. Darrell Crase, “Black People Do Die, Don’t They?”

Death Studies 11, no. 3 (1987): 221–228. The role of gender in shaping attitudes and behaviors relative to

dying and death is similarly underrepresented; see,

for example, Felicity Allen, “Where Are the Women

in End-of-Life Research?” Behaviour Change 19, no. 1 (2002): 39–51.

6. Ronald K. Barrett, “Contemporary African-Ameri-

can Funeral Rites and Traditions,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 80–92.

7. Ronald K. Barrett, “Sociocultural Considerations

for Working with Blacks Experiencing Loss and Grief,”

in Kenneth Doka and Joyce D. Davidson, eds., Living with Grief: Who We Are, How We Grieve, 83–96 (Phila- delphia: Brunner/Mazel, 1998), pp. 88–91; and Lynne

Ann DeSpelder and Ronald K. Barrett, “Developing

Multicultural Competence,” The Director 64 (December 1997): 66 –68; esp. p. 68.

8. Elizabeth J. Clark, “The Future of Social Work in

End-of-Life Care: A Call to Action,” in Joan Berzoff

and Phyllis R. Silverman, Living with Dying: A Handbook for End-of-Life Care Practitioners (New York: Columbia University Press, 2004), pp. 838–847; quote p. 841.

See also Rita Chi-Ying Chung and Fred Bemak,

“The Relationship of Culture and Empathy in Cross-

Cultural Counseling,” Journal of Counseling and Devel- opment 80, no. 2 (2002): 154 –159; Irene Papadopoulos and Shelley Lees, “Developing Culturally Competent

Researchers,” Journal of Advanced Nursing 37, no. 3 (2002): 258–264; and Jeanne-Marie R. Stacciarini,

“Experiencing Cultural Differences: Refl ections on

Cultural Diversity,” Journal of Professional Nursing 18, no. 6 (2002): 346 –349.

9. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland,

“Culture, Socialization, and Death Education,” in

Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk, 323–331 (New York:

Routledge, 2013), pp. 323, 324–325, 331.

10. DeSpelder and Barrett, “Developing Multicultural

Competence.”

‘Rave’ Parties, and the Grateful Dead,” Psychiatric Annals 24, no. 3 (1994): 148–150; and Susanna Pre- peliczay, “Socio-Cultural and Psychological Aspects of

Contemporary LSD Use in Germany,” Journal of Drug Issues 32, no. 2 (2002): 431–458.

127. See Stanislav Grof, LSD Psychotherapy (Pomona, Calif.: Hunter House, 1980), pp. 252ff; Grof and

Halifax, The Human Encounter with Death, pp. 16ff; and Peter Stafford, Psychedelics Encyclopedia (Berkeley, Calif.: And/Or Press, 1977), pp. 23–39.

128. Grof and Halifax, The Human Encounter with Death, pp. 120–121.

129. Stanislav Grof and Christina Grof, Beyond Death: The Gates of Consciousness (New York: Thames & Hud- son, 1980), p. 24.

130. David M. Wulff, “Mystical Experience,” in Variet- ies of Anomalous Experience: Examining the Scientifi c Evi- dence, ed. Etzel Cardeña, Steven Jay Lynn, and Stanley Krippner (Washington, D.C.: American Psychological

Association, 2000), pp. 397–440.

131. Stanislav Grof and Joan Halifax, “Psychedelics

and the Experience of Dying,” in Life After Death, ed. Arnold Toynbee and others (New York: McGraw-Hill,

1976), pp. 192–193.

132. Grof, LSD Psychotherapy, p. 294. See also, by Grof, Psychology of the Future: Lessons from Modern Consciousness Research (Albany: State University of New York, 2000).

133. Grimes, Deeply into the Bone, p. 237.

134. Herman Feifel, The Meaning of Death (New York: McGraw-Hill, 1959), p. xiv.

135. International Work Group on Death, Dying, and

Bereavement, “Assumptions and Principles of Spiritual

Care,” Death Studies 14, no. 1 (1990): 75–81.

136. See Thomas Attig, “Respecting the Spiritual

Beliefs of the Dying and the Bereaved,” in Dying, Death, and Bereavement: A Challenge for Living, 2nd ed., ed. Inge Corless, Barbara B. Germino, and Mary A. Pitt-

man (New York: Springer, 2003), pp. 61–75.

137. Clyde M. Nabe, “‘Seeing As’: Death As Door or

Wall,” in Priorities in Death Education and Counseling, ed. Richard A. Pacholski and Charles A. Corr (Arlington,

Va.: Forum for Death Education and Counseling,

1982), pp. 161–169.

C H A P T E R 1 5

1. Allan B. Chinen, “The Mortal King,” in The Path Ahead: Readings in Death and Dying, ed. Lynne Ann DeSpelder and Albert Lee Strickland, 335–336

(Mountain View, Calif.: Mayfi eld, 1995).

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 667des35465_notes_601-670.indd 667 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

668 n o t e s

ed. Robert A. Neimeyer, Darcy L. Harris, Howard R.

Winokuer, and Gordon Thornton, 403–418 (New York:

Routledge, 2011), pp. 404–405 (slightly edited).

23. See Bridging Work Group, “Bridging the Gap

Between Research and Practice in Bereavement:

Report from the Center for the Advancement of

Health,” Death Studies 29 (2005): 93–122.

24. John R. Jordan, “Research That Matters: Bridging

the Gap Between Research and Practice in Thanatology,”

Death Studies 24 (2000): 457–467; quote pp. 461, 463.

25. David E. Balk, “Scholarship, Students, and Practi-

tioners: Bringing Scholarship into the Expectations of

Practitioners,” Death Studies 29 (2005): 123–144.

26. Allan Kellehear, Compassionate Cities: Public Health and End of Life Care (New York: Routledge, 2005), p. x.

27. Helen Youngelson-Neal, Arthur G. Neal, and Jacob

Fried, “Global and Local Culture in the 21st Century,”

Journal of American and Comparative Cultures 24, nos. 3–4 (Fall 2001): 31–36, esp. 33–35.

28. Youngelson-Neal, Neal, and Field, “Global and

Local Culture.”

29. Kellehear, Compassionate Cities, p. x.

30. Ira Byock, The Best Care Possible: A Physician’s Quest to Transform Care Through the End of Life (New York: Avery, 2012), pp. 250–271.

31. Kellehear, Compassionate Cities, p. 16.

32. Kellehear, Compassionate Cities, p. 162.

33. See Phyllis Silverman and others, “The 2004 Tucson

IWG (International Work Group) Charter for the Nor-

malization of Dying, Death, and Loss,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 50 (2004–2005): 331–336, esp. 332.

34. Silverman and others, p. 46.

35. Allan Kellehear, “Public Health Approaches to

Palliative Care: Developments in Australia,” Rikkyo Social Work Review 23 (2003): 27–35; quote p. 32.

36. See http://webpages.scu.edu/ftp/fow/pages/fow-

courseindex.html .

37. Robert E. Goss and Dennis Klass, Dead but Not Lost: Grief Narratives in Religious Traditions (Walnut Creek, Calif.: AltaMira Press, 2005), p. 279.

38. Ronald L. Grimes, Deeply into the Bone: Re-Inventing Rites of Passage (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2000), p. 221.

39. Herman Feifel, “Psychology and Death: Meaning-

ful Rediscovery,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 19–28; quote p. 27.

11. Wolfgang Stroebe and Margaret Stroebe, “Is Grief

Universal? Cultural Variations in the Emotional Reac-

tion to Loss,” in Death and Identity, 3rd ed., ed. Robert Fulton and Robert Bendiksen, 177–209 (Philadelphia:

Charles Press, 1993), p. 201.

12. Fritz Roth, Einmal Jenseits und Zurück: Ein Koffer für die Letzte Reise (Gütersloh: Gütersloher Verlagshaus, 2006).

13. Sinéad Donnelly, “Give Me Your Hands, or

Meitheal, ” Mortality 10 (Suppl., September, 2005): 24.

14. Dolores M. Dooley, “End-of-Life Decision Making:

An Irish Perspective,” in Handbook of Thanatology, 2nd ed., ed. David K. Meagher and David E. Balk, 111–118

(New York: Routledge, 2013), p. 111.

15. Amy Chow, Cecilia Chan, and Samuel Ho, “Social

Sharing of Bereavement Experience by Chinese

Bereaved Persons in Hong Kong,” Death Studies 31, no. 7 (2007): 601–618.

16. Isa Fonnegra de Jaramillo, Morir Bien: Un Compro- miso Personal [Dying Well: A Personal Commitment] (Barcelona: Planeta, 2006).

17. Alfons Deeken, “Evolving Japanese Perspectives on

Death and Dying,” Budhi (1999): 215–232. Published by Offi ce of Research and Publications School of Arts

and Sciences, Ateneo de Manila University, Philip-

pines. See also Lynne Ann DeSpelder, “Desu Edyuke-

syon no Shimei [The Mission of Death Education],”

trans. Keiji Takeuchi, in Otono no Inochi no Kyoiku [The Death Education for Adults], edited by Shigeaki

Hinohara, Alfons Deeken, and Jitaro Mizuno (Tokyo:

Kawadeshobo Shinsha, 2006).

18. K. Takeuchi, Reitaku University, Chiba, personal

communication, January, 2006.

19. Lynne Ann DeSpelder, “A World View: Interna-

tional Thanatology,” The Forum: Newsletter of the Associa- tion for Death Education and Counseling 34, no. 1 (2008): 1, 3–4.

20. Robert Kastenbaum, “Theory, Research, and

Application: Some Critical Issues for Thanatology,”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 18, no. 4 (1987–1988): 397–410; quote p. 408.

21. Myra Bluebond-Langner, “Wither Thou Goest?”

Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 18, no. 4 (1987–1988): 257–263. See also James A. Thorson, “Qualitative

Thanatology,” Mortality 1, no. 2 (1996).

22. Robert A. Neimeuyer and Darcy L. Harris, “Build-

ing Bridges in Bereavement Research and Practice:

Some Concluding Refl ections,” in Grief and Bereavement in Contemporary Society: Bridging Research and Practice,

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 668des35465_notes_601-670.indd 668 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

Chapter 15 669

51. Avery Weisman, On Dying and Denying: A Psychiatric Study of Terminality (New York: Behavioral Publica- tions, 1972), pp. 39–40; see also, by Weisman, The Cop- ing Capacity: On the Nature of Being Mortal (New York: Human Sciences, 1984).

52. Edwin Shneidman, “Criteria for a Good Death,”

Suicide and Life-Threatening Behavior 37, no. 3 (2007): 245–247; quote p. 247.

53. This account of Lindbergh’s death draws from

various sources, including a description by Dr. Milton

H. Howell, one of Lindbergh’s physicians, reported by

Ernest H. Rosenbaum, “The Doctor and the Cancer

Patient,” in A Hospice Handbook, ed. Michael P. Hamilton and Helen F. Reid (Grand Rapids, Mich.:

Eerdmans, 1980), pp. 19–43.

54. Yoshida Kenkō, quoted by Donald Keene, “Kenkō:

Essays in Idleness ( Tsurezureguswa),” in Approaches to the Asian Classics, edited by Wm. Theodore de Bary and Irene Bloom (New York: Columbia University Press,

1990), p. 313.

55. Sharon R. Kaufman, And a Time to Die: How Ameri- can Hospitals Shape the End of Life (New York: Scribner, 2005), p. 323.

56. Stephen S. Hall, “On Beyond 100,” National Geo- graphic 223, no. 5 (May 2013): 28–49; p. 46.

57. Elizabeth Arias, Melonie Heron, and Betzaida

Tejada-Vera, “United States Life Tables Eliminating

Certain Causes of Death, 1999–2001,” National Vital Statistics Report 61, no. 9 (2013).

58. Kaufman, And a Time to Die, p. 324.

59. “Resident Population Projections by Sex and Age:

2010 to 2050,” Statistical Abstract of the United States: 2009, 128th ed. (Washington, D.C.: Government Print- ing Offi ce, 2008), p. 14.

60. Stewart Brand, Whole Earth Discipline: An Ecoprag- matist Manifesto (New York: Viking, 2009), p. 61.

61. Ron Crocombe, The South Pacifi c: An Introduction (Auckland, New Zealand: Longman Paul, 1983).

62. Crocombe, South Pacifi c, p. 73.

63. See Carla J. Sofka, “Social Support ‘Internet-

works,’ Caskets for Sale, and More: Thanatology and

the Information Superhighway,” Death Studies 21, no. 6 (1997): 553–574.

64. Damon Knight, “Masks,” in A Pocketful of Stars, ed. Knight (New York: Doubleday, 1971).

65. Reported in Dick Teresi, The Undead: Organ Har- vesting, the Ice-Water Test, Beating-Heart Cadavers—How Medicine is Blurring the Line Between Life and Death (New York: Pantheon, 2012), p. 173.

40. Feifel, "Psychology and Death: Meaningful Redis-

covery," p. 28.

41. Robert Fulton and Greg Owen, “Death and Soci-

ety in Twentieth-Century America,” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 18, no. 4 (1987–1988): 390. On the many key contributions by women to both clinical

and academic approaches in the fi eld, see the special

issue focusing on “Women in Thanatology,” edited by

Inge B. Corless, in Illness, Crisis & Loss 9, no. 1 (2001), which includes articles by Jeanne Quint Benoliel,

David Clark (on Cicely Saunders), Thelma Bates, Zelda

Foster, Catherine Sanders, Doris A. Howell, Ida M.

Martinson, Sandra Bertman, Hannelore Wass, Phyllis

R. Silverman, and Mary L. S. Vachon.

42. Alfred G. Killilea, “The Politics of Being Mortal,”

in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 342–347.

43. J. Eugene Knott and Richard W. Prull, “Death

Education: Accountable to Whom? For What?” Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 7, no. 2 (1976): 178; see also Joseph A. Durlak, “Changing Death Attitudes

Through Death Education,” in Death Anxiety Handbook: Research, Instrumentation, and Application, ed. Robert A. Neimeyer (Washington, D.C.: Taylor & Francis, 1993),

pp. 243–259.

44. Christopher Alexander, Sara Ishikawa, and Mur-

ray Silverstein, A Pattern Language: Towns, Building, Construction (New York: Oxford University Press, 1977), p. 354.

45. See Daniel Callahan, “Defi ning a Peaceful Death,”

in The Troubled Dream of Life: Living with Mortality (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1993), pp. 195–196.

46. Allan Kellehear, A Social History of Dying (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2007), p. 232.

47. Grimes, Deeply into the Bone, p. 223.

48. Vernon Reynolds and Ralph Tanner, The Social Ecology of Religion (New York: Oxford University Press, 1995), p. 204. For an engaging account of how indi-

viduals sustained this concept of a good death despite

distressing and unusual circumstances, see Drew Gilin

Faust, “The Civil War Soldier and the Art of Dying,”

Journal of Southern History 67, no. 1 (2001): 3–38.

49. Robert Kastenbaum, On Our Way: The Final Passage Through Life and Death (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2004), pp. 131–135.

50. Stu Farber, Thomas Egnew, and Annalu Farber,

“What is a Respectful Death?” in Living with Dying: A Handbook for End-of-Life Care Practitioners, ed. Joan Berzoff and Phyllis R. Silverman (New York: Columbia

University Press, 2004), pp. 102–127; quote p. 103.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 669des35465_notes_601-670.indd 669 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

670 n o t e s

69. Odenwald, Back to the Astronomy Cafe, p. 88.

70. Gary Snyder, The Practice of the Wild: Essays (San Francisco: North Point Press, 1990), p. 176.

71. Sandra L. Bertman, “Bearing the Unbearable:

From Loss, the Gain,” in The Path Ahead, ed. DeSpelder and Strickland, pp. 348–354; quote p. 353.

72. Doris M. Schoenhoff, The Barefoot Expert: The Inter- face of Computerized Knowledge Systems and Indigenous Knowledge Systems (Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1993), p. 100.

66. Clifford Simak, “Death Scene,” in The Worlds of Clifford Simak (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1960); Robert A. Heinlein, “Life-Line,” in The Man Who Sold the Moon: Harriman and the Escape from the Earth to the Moon! ed. Heinlein (New York: Shasta, 1950).

67. Kit Reed, “Golden Acres,” in Social Problems Through Science Fiction, ed. John W. Miestead and oth- ers (New York: St. Martin’s, 1975).

68. Sten Odenwald, Back to the Astronomy Café (Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 2003), p. 39.

des35465_notes_601-670.indd 670des35465_notes_601-670.indd 670 2/13/14 4:43 PM2/13/14 4:43 PM

Final PDF to printer

671

Credits and Sources

Pages 4, 101, & 276: Courtesy of the Center for Creative Photography. Used by permission.

Page 10: Language Log Blog, “Kim Jong Il: Did he “die” or “pass away?,” blog entry by Harlow Wilcox, December 20, 2011; http://languagelog. ldc.upenn.edu/nll/?p 5 3643 .

Page 17: From Jean Lipman-Blumen, “Our Existential Vulnerability to Toxic Leaders”; Death and Denial: Interdisciplinary Perspectives on the Legacy of Ernest Becker, ed. Daniel Liechty, 161–172; Praeger, 2002, p. 162. John O’Hara’s Appointment in Samarra was published in 1982.

Page 19: Quote by Suse Lowenstein from Ann F. de Jong Hodgson, “Interviews and Issues: Dark Elegy,” Illness, Crises and Loss 4, nos. 3–4 (1995): 18–38; quote, p. 21.

Pages 21, 24, 79, 169, 202, 254, 294, 325, 329, 343, 349, 427, 429, 443, 549 & 568: Courtesy of Albert Lee Strickland. Used by permission.

Page 25: From The Kitchen Chronicles: 1001 Lunches with J. Krishnamurti by Michael Krohnen; Edwin House, 1997, p. 292.

Pages 30, 52, 193: Courtesy of Nick Downes. Used by permission.

Page 35: From “Death in Cades Cove” by A. Crosby, in Appalachia: When Yesterday Is Today, ed. students at the University of Tennessee, Knoxville, 1965, pp. 1–3; quoted in Death and Dying in Central Appalachia: Changing Attitudes and Practices by James K. Crissman; University of Illinois Press, 1994.

Pages 36 & 37: U.S. Census Bureau, Historical Statistics of the United States, Colonial Times to 1970; Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Offi ce, 1975, pp. 55, 59; and Donna L. Hoyert and Jiaquan Xu, “Deaths: Preliminary Data for 2011,” National Vital Statistics Reports 61, no. 6; Hyattsville, Md.: National Center for Health Statistics, 2012, pp. 1, 26.

Page 38: Donna L. Hoyert and Jiaquan Xu, “Deaths: Preliminary Data for 2011,” National Vital Statistics Reports 61, no. 6; Hyattsville, Md.: National Center for Health Statistics, 2012, p. 4.

Page 40: From the Los Angeles Times (December 21, 1990).

Pages 45, 152 & 304: Courtesy of Edward C. and Gail R. Johnson.

Pages 48, 320 & 575: Courtesy of Robin Van Doren, Open Doors.

Pages 54 & 277: From Mortality by Christopher Hitchens; Twelve, 2012, pp. 6, 101.

Page 55: Based on Erik H. Erikson, Childhood and Society, 2nd ed.; Norton, 1964, pp. 247–274.

Page 58: Tammy Maas, Reader’s Digest ( July 2009), p. 57.

Pages 60, 335, 336 & 398: Used with permission of Joe Allen, Brooks Allen, and Janice Laurent.

Pages 61, 138, 197, 250, 258, 582 & 591: Courtesy of Carol A. Foote. Used by permission.

Page 72: Courtesy of William M. Lamers, Jr., “The Little Sounds of Grief: Poetry and Grief,” a presentation to the 21st International Death, Grief, and Bereavement Conference, Univer- sity of Wisconsin, LaCross, May 28, 2003.

Page 73: From Journeys Through Bookland, Vol. 1, ed. Charles H. Sylvester; Bellows-Reeve Company, Publishers, Chicago, 1922.

Page 74: Courtesy of Christine DeVault. Used by permission.

Page 81: From Shifting Interludes: Selected Essays by Willie Morris, edited by Jack Bales; University Press of Mississippi, 2002, p. 173.

Pages 88, 126, & 136: Courtesy of Patrick Dean. Used by permission.

Page 93 (bottom): From Death Customs by E. Bendann; Knopf, 1930.

Page 94: “When Hare Heard of Death” excerpted from pp. 23–24 of The Road of Life and Death: A Ritual Drama of the American Indians by Paul Radin, Bollingen Series V. Copyright © 1945, renewed 1973, by Princeton University Press. Reprinted by permission of Princeton Univer- sity Press and Doris Woodward Radin.

Page 95: Aesop’s “Eros and Death” reworked by Steve Sanfi eld, from Death: An Anthology of Ancient Texts, Songs, Prayers, and Stories, ed. David Meltzer; North Point Press, 1984.

Pages 96–97: Based on A Social History of Dying by Allan Kellehear; Cambridge University Press, 2007. Used with permission.

Page 110: Papago song by Juana Manwell. By permission of Smithsonian Institution Press from Papago Music by Frances Densmore;

des35465_cre_671-676.indd 671des35465_cre_671-676.indd 671 2/21/14 6:58 PM2/21/14 6:58 PM

Final PDF to printer

672

Page 162: President’s Commission for the Study of Ethical Problems in Medicine and Biomedi- cal and Behavioral Research, Defi ning Death: A Report on the Medical, Legal, and Ethical Issues in the Determination of Death; Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Offi ce, 1981, p. 73.

Page 170: From Postmortem: How Medical Examiners Explain Suspicious Deaths by Stefan Timmermans; University of Chicago Press, p.103.

Page 177: From Dying and Death: A Clinical Guide for Caregivers, ed. David Barton; Williams & Wilkins, 1977, p. 181.

Page 178: Adapted from Taming the Beloved Beast: How Medical Techinology Costs are Destroying Our Health Care System by Daniel Callahan; Princeton University Press, 2009, pp. 47–48.

Page 180: From The Week ( June 26, 2009), p. 3. Page 182: From the Honolulu Star-Bulletin

( October 20, 1985). Page 184: From “Dying Words: How Should

Doctors Deliver Bad News?” by Jerome Groop- man; New Yorker (October 28, 2002), p. 62–70; quote, p. 66.

Page 186: Reprinted with permission of Simon & Schuster from To Live Until We Say Good-Bye, text by Elisabeth Kübler-Ross and photographs by Mal Warshaw. Copyright © 1978 by Ross Medical Associates, S.C., and Mal Warshaw. Photograph copyright © 1978 by Mal Warshaw.

Page 187: From “Medicine and the Question of Suffering” by Richard B. Gunderman; Second Opinion: Health, Faith, and Ethics 14 ( July 1990).

Page 189: Adapted from “Referring a Patient and Family to High-Quality Palliative Care at the Close of Life,” by Joan M. Teno and Stephen R. Connor; JAMA 301, no. 6 (February 11, 2009): 651–659; p. 653.

Page 190: Provided courtesy of Maurizio Marinelli by Fondazione Hospice MariaTeresa Chiantore Seràgnoli Onlus, Bologna, Italy.

Pages 199 & 422: From You Don’t Miss Your Water by Cornelius Eady, © 1995 by Cornelius Eady; Henry Holt, 1995; fi rst published in Pequod, no. 35 (1993), p. 114. Reprinted by permission of the author and Henry Holt and Co.

Page 201: Adapted from Our Aging Parents: A Practical Guide to Eldercare, ed. Colette Browne and Roberta Onzuka-Anderson; University of Hawaii Press, 1985, pp. 204–209.

Page 203: From On Fire: A Personal Account of Life and Death and Choices by Larry Brown; Algonquin, 1994, pp. 47–48.

Page 206: From Passing On: The Social Organiza- tion of Dying by David Sudnow; Prentice-Hall, 1967.

Bureau of American Ethnology Bulletin 90; Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C. 1929.

Page 110: Dakota song from The Primal Mind: Vision and Reality in Indian America by Jamake Highwater; Harper and Row, 1981.

Page 111: Burial oration (Wintu) from “Wintu Ethnography” by Cora Du Bois, in University of California Publications in American Archaeology and Ethnology 36 (1935). Reprinted by permis- sion of the University of California Press.

Page 113: From Religions of Africa: A Pilgrimage into Traditional Religions by Noel Q. King; Harper and Row, 1970.

Page 121: Courtesy of Shmuel Thaler. Used by permission.

Page 122: Reprinted from Phnom Penh Post ( October 21, 2001). From Under the Dragon: California’s New Culture by Lonny Shavelson and Fred Setterberg; co-published by Heyday Books and the Oakland Museum of California, p. 120.

Page 124: From Chuang Tzu: Basic Writings, trans. Burton Watson; Columbia University Press, 1964, p. 113.

Page 128: Courtesy of Andy Hau Yan Ho. Used by permission.

Page 145: Courtesy of David Rodriguez. Used by permission.

Page 146: Adapted from “Low-Tech Autopsies in the Era of HighTech Medicine: Continued Value for Quality Assurance and Patient Safety” by George D. Lundberg; JAMA 280, no. 14 (October 14, 1998), pp. 1273–1274.

Page 153: Used by permission of Elizabeth Bradbury.

Page 155: From “Clarifying the Paradigm for the Ethics of Donation and Transplantation: Was ‘Dead’ Really So Clear Before Organ Donation?” by Sam D. Shemie; Philosophy, Ethics, and Humanities in Medicine 2 (August 24, 2007), p. 18.

Page 161: From “Dying As a Social Relationship: A Sociological Review of Debates on the Deter- mination of Death” by Allan Kellehear; Social Science & Medicine 66 (2008), pp. 1533, 1544.

des35465_cre_671-676.indd 672des35465_cre_671-676.indd 672 2/21/14 6:58 PM2/21/14 6:58 PM

Final PDF to printer

673

St. Louis, 1982. Used with permission of The C. V. Mosby Company.

Page 279: From There is a Rainbow Behind Every Dark Cloud, The Center for Attitudinal Healing; Celestial Arts, 1978, p. 71.

Page 283: From “Pain Management on Trial” by Maureen Cushing; American Journal of Nursing 7 (February 1992): 21–22.

Page 287: Adapted from Living Well at the End of Life by Joanne Lynn and David M. Adamson; R AND, 2003, p. 8.

Page 288: Adapted from “Preparing for the Death of a Loved One,” American Journal of Hospice and Palliative Care 9, no. 4 (1992): 14–16; The Merck Manual of Medical Information: Home Edition, ed. Robert Berkow, Merck Research Laboratories, 1997, p. 21; and “The Last Few Days,” by Robert E. Enck, American Journal of Hospice and Palliative Care 9, no. 4 (1992): 11–13.

Page 292: From The End of Life Advisor: Personal, Legal, and Medical Considerations for a Peaceful, Dignifi ed Death by Susan Dolan and Audrey Vizzard; Kaplan, 2009, p. 75.

Page 299 (bottom): From The County Journal, Bayfi eld County, Cable, Wis. (April 25, 1991).

Page 303: Used by permission of Edgar N. Jackson.

Page 306: From “Take Only As Directed” by Wayne Delk; U. S. Gospel News (September 1999). Reprinted by permission of the author.

Page 314: Adapted from General Price List Sur- vey, National Funeral Directors Association.

Page 316: Athenaeum of Philadelphia Collection.

Page 321: From The History of American Funeral Directing by Robert W. Habenstein and William M. Lamers; Bulfi n Printers, Milwaukee, 1962.

Pages 327 & 561: Courtesy of P. S. Mueller. Used by permission.

Page 331: From Traversing the Minefi eld—Best Prac- tice: Reducing Risk in Funeral-Cremation Service by Michael Kubasak and William M. Lamers, Jr.; LMG Publishing, 2007, p. 233.

Page 332 (bottom): Adapted from “Dying to Be Green,” by Neil Shea, National Geographic ( July 2008).

Page 333: From The Secret Cemetery by Doris Fran- cis, Leonie Kellaher, and Georgina Neophytou; Oxford: Berg, 2005, p. 1.

Page 338: Courtesy of Fritz and Inge Roth, Pütz-Roth, Bergisch Gladbach, Germany.

Page 342: From Living Your Dying by Stanley Keleman; Random House, 1974.

Page 344: From Playboy interview by Eric Spitznagel (October 16, 2012).

Page 216: President’s Commission for the Study of Ethical Problems in Medicine and Biomedi- cal and Behavioral Research, Making Health Care Decisions, A Report on the Ethical and Legal Implications of the Patient-Practitioner Relation- ship; Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Offi ce, 1982, pp. 64–65.

Page 220: From Care of the Dying by Richard Lamerton; Technomic Publishing, 1976.

Page 223: Adapted from Connect Core Concepts in Health, 13th ed., by Paul M. Insel and Walton T. Roth; McGraw-Hill, 2013, p. 446.

Page 225: From Journeys ( July 2006), Hospice Foundation of America, p. 3.

Page 240: James Scott, e-mail message to authors, July 11, 2013.

Page 241: From To A God Unknown by John Steinbeck; R. O. Ballou, 1933.

Page 245: From News from Native California 4 (August–October 1990).

Pages 246–247: Will of Tomás Antonio Yorba, trans. H. Noya [HM26653]. Reproduced by permission of The Huntington Library, San Marino, California.

Page 255: From the Honolulu Star-Bulletin & Advertiser (August 26, 1990).

Page 262: From Enjoy Every Sandwich: Living Each Day As If It Were Your Last by Lee Lipsenthal; Crown Archetype, 2012, page 14.

Page 263: Adapted from “A Task-Based Approach to Coping with Dying,” by Charles A. Corr; Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 24, no. 2 (1991–1992): 81–94.

Page 265: “But You Look So Good” from No Pain, No Gain. Reprinted by permission of Judith L. Ellsworth.

Page 267: Adapted from “Coping with Life- Threatening Illness: A Task Model,” by Ken- neth J. Doka; Omega: Journal of Death and Dying 32, no. 2 (1995–1996): 111–122.

Page 268: From the Register-Pajaronian, Watsonville, Calif. (March 11, 1981).

Page 270: Used by permission of Joan J. Conn. Page 271: From “Love Bade Me Welcome” by

Christian Wiman in The Best American Spiri- tual Writing 2008; Houghton Miffl in, 2008. Originally published in The American Scholar ( Summer 2007).

Pages 274–275: Adapted from Living with Cancer by Ernest H. Rosenbaum; The Mosby Medical Library series, The C. V. Mosby Company,

des35465_cre_671-676.indd 673des35465_cre_671-676.indd 673 2/21/14 6:58 PM2/21/14 6:58 PM

Final PDF to printer

674

Oxford University Press, 1961. Reprinted by permission of Oxford University Press.

Page 411: Courtesy of Francesco and Sofi a Campione.

Page 418: From “Scream of Consciousness” by Ruth Kramer Ziony; Neworld (1977).

Page 425: From The Undertaking: Life Studies from the Dismal Trade by Thomas Lynch; W. W. Norton, 1997, pp. 82–83, 51.

Page 431: From The Journey Through Grief and Loss: Helping Yourself and Your Child When Grief Is Shared by Robert Zucker; St. Martins Griffi n, 2009, p.70.

Page 433: Transcribed by the authors from an inscription at the National Civil Rights Museum in Memphis, Tennessee.

Page 440: From The Warming of Winter by Maxine Dowd Jensen; Abingdon Press, 1977.

Page 441: Adapted from Last Chapters: A Sociol- ogy of Aging and Dying, by Victor W. Marshall; Brooks/Cole, 1980, pp. 169–177.

Page 444: From Chipping Bone: Collected Poems by Maude Meehan; Embers Press, 1985. Courtesy of Maude Meehan.

Page 448: From (a) Merriam-Webster’s Collegiate Dictionary, Eleventh Edition, © 2003 by Merriam-Webster, Inc., publisher of the Merriam-Webster® Dictionaries; used by permission. (b) Pathways to Suicide: A Survey of Self-Destructive Behaviors, by Ronald W. Maris, Johns Hopkins University Press, 1981, p. 290. (c) Suicide, by Jean Baechler, Basic, 1979, p. 11. (d) Death: Current Perspectives, 2nd ed., ed. Edwin S. Shneidman, Mayfi eld, 1980, p. 416.

Page 451: Adapted from “Procedures and Prob- lems in Conducting a Psychological Autopsy,” by Thomas J. Young; International Journal of Offender Therapy and Comparative Criminology 36, no. 1 (Spring 1992): 43–52.

Page 452: Adapted from “Psychological Autopsy: Clinical and Legal Perspectives,” by James R. P. Ogloff and Randy K. Otto, Saint Louis University Law Journal 37, no. 3 (Spring 1993): 610–614; and “Procedures and Problems in Conducting a Psychological Autopsy,” by Thomas J. Young, International Journal of Offender Therapy and Comparative Criminology 36, no. 1 (Spring 1992): 47–48.

Pages 456, 464, 468, 472 & 480: Suicide notes courtesy of Edwin S. Shneidman.

Page 347: From A Death in the Sanchez Family by Oscar Lewis; Random House, 1969.

Page 349 (left): From Victorian Cemetery Art by Edward V. Gillon, Jr.; Dover, 1972. Reproduced by permission of Edward V. Gillon, Jr.

Page 352: Adapted from “The Two-Track Model of Bereavement: Overview, Retrospect, and Prospect,” by Simon Shimshon Rubin, Death Studies 23 (1999): 681–714, p. 685; and “The Two-Track Model of Bereavement Question- naire (TTBQ): Development and Validation of a Relational Measure,” by Simon Shimson Rubin and others, Death Studies 33 (2009): 305–333, p. 309.

Page 361: Reprinted from “Mourning and Meaning,” by Robert A. Neimeyer, Holly G. Prigerson, and Betty Davies; American Behavioral Scientist 46, no. 2 (October 2002): 235–251, p. 244.

Page 364: From Class: A View from Middle England by Jilly Cooper; Methuen, 1979.

Page 368: From A Harvest Yet to Reap: A History of Prairie Women by Linda Rasmussen and others; Women’s Press, Toronto, Ontario, 1976.

Page 378: From Ethical Practice in Grief Counseling, by Louis A. Gamino and R. Hal Ritter, Jr.; Springer, 2009, p. 213.

Page 382: “Anguish of Loss,” “Sharing the Grief,” and “Collapsing” from The Anguish of Loss, 2nd ed. Copyright © 1992 by Julie Fritsch and Sherokee Ilse. Photographs by Paul Schraub. Reprinted by permission of Wintergreen Press and Julie Fritsch.

Page 389 (bottom): Drawing by Dominic Horath created in Mrs. Bronwyn Luffman’s classroom at Salesian Sisters School and provided by Linda DaValle. Reprinted by permission of Mary and Frank Horath.

Pages 394 & 449: From Never the Same: Coming to Terms with the Death of a Parent by Donna Schuurman; St. Martin’s Press, 2003.

Page 395: Used with permission of Christine and Donovan Longaker.

Page 396: Courtesy of Karen Saltzman. Used by permission.

Page 400: Adapted from Approaching Death: Improvimg Care at the End of Life, ed. Marilyn J. Field and Christine K. Cassel; National Academy Press, 1997, p. 65.

Page 408: “Peanuts” reprinted by permission of United Features Syndicate, Inc.

des35465_cre_671-676.indd 674des35465_cre_671-676.indd 674 2/21/14 6:58 PM2/21/14 6:58 PM

Final PDF to printer

675

Page 506: Adapted from The Psychology of Death: Concise Edition, by Robert Kastenbaum and Ruth Aisenberg; Springer, 1976, pp. 291–294.

Page 509: From “Down at the Cross: Letter from a Region in My Mind,” by James Bald- win, in The Fire Next Time, © 1963 James Baldwin, Vintage Press. Reprinted in James Baldwin, Collected Essays; Library of America, 1998, p. 330.

Page 513: From A Journal for Jordan: A Story of Love and Honor by Dana Canedy; Crown, 2008, p. 247.

Page 516: Adapted from Faces of the Enemy: Refl ec- tions of the Hostile Imagination by Sam Keen; Harper and Row, 1986.

Page 522: Adapted from Understanding Terrorism: Challenges, Perspectives, and Issues, 3rd ed., by Gus Martin; Sage, 2010, p. 6.

Page 528: From “Back to a Future: One Man’s AIDS Tale Shows How Quickly Epidemic Has Turned” by David Sanford; The Wall Street Jour- nal (November 8, 1996).

Page 541: From “Go Down Death—A Funeral Sermon,” in God’s Trombones by James Weldon Johnson. Copyright 1927 by Viking Press, Inc. Copyright renewed 1955 by Grace Nail Johnson. Reprinted by Permission of Viking Penguin Inc.

Page 542: From Religious Encounters with Death: Insights from the History and Anthropology of Religions, ed. Frank E. Reynolds and Earle H. Waugh; Pennsylvania State University Press, 1977.

Page 546: From Mahabharata, 3.314.118, W. S. Merwin’s translation, from J. Moussaieff Masson, “Introduction,” in Sanskrit Love Poetry, trans. W. S. Merwin and J. Moussaieff Masson; Columbia University Press, 1977, p. 20.

Page 547: From Zen Mind, Beginner’s Mind by Shunryu Suzuki; 1970. Reprinted by permis- sion of John Weatherhill, Inc.

Page 548: Courtesy of Bodhidharma Inc. Page 565: From The Gospel at Colonus. Music by

Bob Telson, lyrics by Lee Breuer. Page 577: From Einmal Jenseits und Zurück:

Ein Koffer für die Letzte Reise, by Fritz Roth;

Page 458: Edwin Arlington Robinson, “Richard Cory,” in The Children of the Night; Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1897. Copyright under the Berne Convention. Reprinted with the permission of Charles Scribner’s Sons.

Page 460: Adapted from Death, Society, and Human Experience, 2nd ed., by Robert J. Kasten- baum; The C. V. Mosby Company, St. Louis, 1981. Used with permission of The C. V. Mosby Company and Robert J. Kastenbaum.

Page 462: Kim Bridgeford, Department of En- glish, Fairfi eld University, Fairfi eld, Conn.

Page 465: Adapted from Deaths of Man by Edwin S. Shneidman; Quadrangle Books, 1973, pp, 82–90. Courtesy of Edwin S. Shneidman.

Page 467: Adapted from “Suicide: The Ultimate Escape” by Brian Barry; Death Studies 13, no. 2 (1989): 185–190.

Page 474: From The Savage God: A Study of Suicide by A. Alvarez; Random House, 1972.

Pages 477–478: Courtesy of Magaret Macro. Page 478: “Resume” by Dorothy Parker, from The

Portable Dorothy Parker, revised and enlarged edition, ed. Brendan Gill. Copyright 1926 by Dorothy Parker. Reprinted by permission of Viking Penguin, Inc., and from The Collected Dorothy Parker by permission of Gerald Duck- worth, Ltd.

Page 479: From The Suicide Index: Putting My Father’s Death in Order by Joan Wickersham; Harcourt, 2008, p. 303.

Page 484: Used by permission of Maude Meehan. Page 490: From Life in the Fast Lane: Selected Works

of Stephen St. Croix, by Stephen St. Croix; Mix Books, 2008, p. 210. Originally published in Mix (December 2003), p. 22.

Page 493: From “Groundfall” by William G. Higgins; Sierra (November–December 1979).

Page 497: Drawing by Haruna Sato, age 7. Used by permission of Mie Sato. Reprinted from the book, Tsunami: The Complete Essays by Children from the Disaster Areas edited by Ken Mori. Courtesy of Ken Mori and Bungeis- hunju Ltd., Chiyoda, Tokyo, 2012, published by Yasushi Toriyama (w w w.bunshun, co.jp). With thanks to Makiko Matsumoto and Jitaro Mizuno, as well as to Mie Sato and her daughter Haruna.

Page 499: From Salvage the Bones, by Jesmyn Ward; Bloomsbury, 2011, pp. 216–217.

Page 501: From Life, Sex, and Ideas: The Good Life Without God, by A. C. Grayling; Oxford Univer- sity Press, 2003, p. 125.

des35465_cre_671-676.indd 675des35465_cre_671-676.indd 675 2/21/14 6:58 PM2/21/14 6:58 PM

Final PDF to printer

676

Page 588: Adapted from “In Search of a Good Death: Observations of Patients, Families, and Providers,” by Karen E. Steinhauser and others; Annals of Internal Medicine 132, no. 10 (2002): 825–832.

Page 590: Adapted from “Criteria for a Good Death,” by Edwin Shneidman; Suicide and Life- Threatening Behavior 37, no. 3 (2007): 245–247.

Gütersloher Verlagshaus, 2006, pp. 84–85. Courtesy of Pütz-Roth.

Page 583: From an advertisement for Sex Money Kiss by Gene Simmons in Publishers Weekly (April 28, 2003).

Page 585: Courtesy of Rolling Stone magazine. Page 586: Reprinted by permission. Advertising

agency: Robaire and Hogshead, Venice, Calif. Photography: Michael Ruppert Studios, Los Angeles, Calif.

des35465_cre_671-676.indd 676des35465_cre_671-676.indd 676 2/21/14 6:58 PM2/21/14 6:58 PM

Final PDF to printer

677

Abraham (patriarch), 534 Achte, Kalle, 611 Ackerman, F., 624 Acocella, Joan, 610 Adagio for Strings (Barber), 296 Adamolekun, Kemi, 375, 645 Adams, David W., 646 Adams, James Luther, 624 Adams, Maurice, 257 Adamson, Sue, 637 Aesculapius (Greco-Roman god

of medicine), 181 Afi fi , Walid A., 621 Agee, Margaret, 576 Aging with Dignity, 237 Ahuile, Leylha, 615 Aiba, Toshiaki, 630 Ainsworth, Mary, 360 Aisenberg, Ruth, 151, 620,

656, 658 Akers, Ronald L., 466, 654 Al Hoa, Abdul Latif, 663 Alali, A. Odasuo, 615 Alanez, Tonya, 607 Albert (prince consort of Queen

Victoria), 99 Albom, Mitch, 658 Albright, Cheryl L., 621 Alcock, Janes E., 666 Alexander, Christopher, 587, 669 Alexander the Great (356 –323

BCE), 295 Alford, C. Fred, 662 Algeo,Katie, 618 Al-Kattar, Aref M., 660 Allah (Islamic deity), 542 Allan, Stuart, 660 Allen, Davina A., 611, 612, 665 Allen, Felicity, 667 Allen, Gillian, 625 al-Qaeda (terrorist network),

519, 522 Altman, Patricia B., 616 Alvarez, Alfred, 474, 654 Alvord, Lori Arviso, 280, 634 Ambros, Barbara, 79, 611 Ameche, Yvonne K., 371, 644 Amelang, James S., 602 American Academy of

Neurology, 160 American Board of Medical

Specialties, 192 American Medical Association,

229, 658 Ames, Roger T., 636 Ammah-Tagoe, Aku, 609

Anderson, David M., 651 Anderson, Ray S., 614, 662 Anderson, Reb, 292, 636 Andrade, Mary J., 616 Andrew, Louise B., 655 Andrews, Ian, 606 Ansari, Humayun, 617 Anthony, Sylvia, 32, 54, 609 Antonius, Marcus Aurelius

(Roman emperor and Stoic philosopher), 554, 665

Apolone, G., 635 Appleby, Louis, 561, 666 Appolonio, Kathryn Kanzler, 654 Aquinas, Thomas, 539 Arcaro, Tom, 604 Arias, Elizabeth, 669 Ariès, Philippe, 99, 100, 102,

103–104, 613, 640 Arikawa, Hiroko, 635 Arlington National Cemetery,

22, 77, 308, 324 Armstrong, Janice Gray, 603 Arnett, Jeffrey Jensen, 610, 612 Arnold, Robert M., 173 Ars Moriendi (thanatology

organization), 33 Ascent into the Empyrean

(Bosch), 557 Ashcroft, John, 228 Ashford, Marguerite K., 602 Association for Death Education

and Counseling (ADEC), 33 Atchley, Robert C., 445, 652 Athill, Diana, 443, 652 Atkinson, Rick, 639 Attig, Thomas A., 231, 382, 570,

606, 630, 640, 667 Atwater, P. M. H., 665 Au, Kathryn H., 618 Ault, A. Brian, 607 Austin, Ann E., 651 Austin, Hilary Mac, 637 Australian Centre for Grief

and Bereavement, 579 Axell, Albert, 653 Azzaro, Vince, 305, 637

Babb, James R., 617 Badham, Linda, 664 Badham, Paul, 664, 665 Baechler, Jean, 448 Bagdikian, Ben H., 637 Bahr, Donald, 614 Bahrampour, Tara, 655 Bailey, Leonard L., 621

Baily, Mary Ann, 625 Baines, Barry K., 631 Baker, John E., 641 Baldwin, James, 509 Balk, David E., 399, 415, 581, 597,

609, 647, 651, 668 Ball, P. Bonnie, 653 Balmer, Leslie, 380, 646 Baloğlu, Mustafa, 627 Bance, Sheena, 616 Bandura, Albert, 82, 612, 646 Banner, Stuart, 173 Barclay, William, 662 Bardo Thödol (Tibetan Book of the

Dead), 550 Barker, Jonathan, 529 Barnard, Christiaan, 165 Barnard, David, 627 Barnason, Susan, 635 Baron-Sorenson, Jane, 611 Barrett, Justin I., 611 Barrett, Ronald Keith, 116, 117,

300, 615, 625, 637, 646, 657, 667 Barrett, William, 665 Barry, Brian, 467, 654 Barry, Rob, 619 Bartell, Denise, 647 Bartholome, William G., 400, 406,

647, 648 Baruch, Joel, 510, 659 Bashir, Shahzad, 663 Bashō, Matsuo ( Japanese

poet), 548 Bataille, Georges, 640 Bates, Thelma, 669 Bateson, Mary Catherine, 661 Battles, Haven B., 648 Bauer, Jack J., 641 Baugher, Robert J., 636 Baumeister, Roy F., 653, 654 Bean, Lee L., 651 Bearison, David J., 647 Beasley, Adam H., 656 Bebey, Francis, 113, 615 Beck, Aaron T., 523, 661 Beck, Ulrich, 44–45, 608 Becker, Carl B., 547, 628, 664 Becker, Ernest, 30, 33, 612 Bedau, Hugo Adam, 619, 620 Beeder, Ann Bordwine, 666 Beers, Mark H., 621, 624, 650, 651,

652, 656 Behrman, Richard E., 415, 646,

647, 648 Beimler, Rosalind Rosoff, 616 Bellanger, Patricia, 621

Name Index

des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 677des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 677 2/21/14 4:05 PM2/21/14 4:05 PM

Final PDF to printer

678

Bellomo, R., 620, 621 Belth, Joseph M., 631 Bemak, Fred, 667 Bend It Like Beckham (motion

picture), 136 Bendiksen, Robert, 612 Benford, Jennie, 606 Benito, Gary, 305, 637 Benkard, Ernst, 614 Benn, Evan S., 656 Bennett, Diane O., 639 Benoliel, Jeanne Quint, 33, 184,

623, 667, 669 Bensoni, John A., Jr., 634 Bereaved Families of Ontario,

380 Bereavement Care Centre

(Australia), 579 Berger, Candace, 604 Berger, Joy S., 12, 602 Bering, Jesse M., 609 Berkow, Robert, 621, 628, 633,

634, 635, 661 Berkowitz, Bruce D., 660 Berman, Alan L., 656 Bernat, James L., 620 Berns, Carol F., 648 Bernstein, Alan E., 663 Bernstein, Barton E., 631 Bernstein, Richard, 660 Bertman, Sandra L., 23, 597, 604,

611, 623, 642, 652, 669, 670 Berzoff, Joan, 293 Berzosa, Miguel, 635 Beshai, J. A., 605 Bessinger, C. D., 623 Best, Elizabeth Kirkley, 639 Bhagavad-Gita (Hindu religious

text), 546, 550, 663 Bilger, Burkhard, 661 Binsky, Paul, 613 Birnbacher, Dieter, 623 Bishop, Jeffrey P., 256, 631 Bishop, Jerry E., 643 Bjorklund, David F., 609 Black, Stephen T., 656 Black Hills National Cemetery,

254 Blackhall, Leslie J., 625 Blaisdell, William, 201 Blanche, Tony, 619 Blasco, Ana, 635 Blasi, Carol Hernández, 609 Blauner, Robert, 612 Blevins, Dean, 257 Blieszner, Rosemary, 649 Block, Robert, 657 Bloom, Mia, 529 Bluebond-Langner, Myra, 400,

581, 647, 648, 668 Boase, T. S. R., 613

Bobbitt, Philip, 660 Bode, Sabine, 640 Bodenheimer, Thomas S., 622 Body Worlds (exhibition), 44 Boelen, Paul A., 641, 643 Boersma, Frederic J., 640 Bogac, L. Pauahi, 618 Boglioli, Lauren R., 655, 658 Bolin, Robert C., 665, 666 Bonanno, George A., 641, 642 Bonde, Niels, 638 Bonner, Jessie L., 659 Bonnichsen, Robson, 614 Bonoti, Fontini, 646 Book of Changes (Yijing), 543 Bordere, Tashel C., 637 Boroditsky, Lera, 602 Bosch, Hieronymus, 557 Boss, Judith A., 256 Boss, Pauline, 644 Boston, Patricia, 627 Boswell, James, 532 Bourbonniere, Meg, 622 Bower, Bruce, 609, 633, 645 Bowersock, G. W., 660 Bowker, John, 566 Bowlby, John, 347, 360, 640 Bowman, Kerry W., 616 Bowman, LeRoy, 306, 637 Bowman, Pierre, 182 Bowman, Ted, 16, 603 Boyarin, Jonathan, 662 Boyd, Kirsty, 635 Boyé, Lafayeete De Mente, 622 Brabant, Sarah, 606, 642 Bradley, Ben, 566 Brakenhielm, Carl-Rheinhold,

635 Branch, Mary Louise, 646 Branch Davidians (religious

group), 455 Brand, Stewart, 593, 669 Brandes, Stanley, 120, 616, 652 Brannigan, Michael C., 256 Brase, Gary L., 623 Braun, Kathryn I., 618 Breaux, Brooke O., 606 Breen, John, 603 Bregman, Lucy, 551, 664 Brenneis, Don, 612 Brent, David A., 653, 655 Brent, Sandor B., 51, 52–53,

81–82, 608, 612 Bressers, Bonnie, 638 Brice, Charles W., 610 Bridgeford, Kim, 462 Briggs, Stephen, 655 Brinson, Sabrina A., 646 Brock, Dan W., 623 Brock, Timothy C., 644 Brodkey, Harold, 266, 632

Brody, B. A., 628 Brody, Howard, 623 Brody, Jane E., 611, 645 Brokstein, Ruth T., 648 Brosius, J. Peter, 613 Brown, Larry, 203 Brown, Pam, 626 Brown, Peter, 613 Brown & Alexander (funeral

home), 316 Browning, Michael, 659 Bruner, Jerome, 350, 641 Brunn, Ole, 617 Bryan, Craig J., 654 Bryant, Clifton D., 606 Bryson, Bill, 602 Buchholtz, Mary, 612 Buddha, 547, 550 Buenteo, Russell, 607 Buetow, Stephen, 623 Bugen, Larry A., 367, 644 Bulkeley, Kelly, 666 Bulkley, Patricia, 666 Bull, M. A., 642 Bullock, Karen, 627 Burke, Briani L., 605 Burke, Garance, 656 Bush, George W., 224 Bush, Jeb, 224 Bush, Nancy Evans, 665 Bushfi eld, Suzanne, 650 Butler, Robert N., 445, 652 Byock, Ira, 175, 190, 210, 227, 262,

263, 290, 355, 552, 581, 622, 624, 625, 629, 632, 633, 636, 642, 665, 668

Cable, Dana, 648 Cacciatore, Joanne, 649, 650, 651 Calcedo, Juan Carlos, 621 Calhoun, Craig, 660 Calhoun, Lawrence G., 645 Callahan, Daniel, 46, 178, 179,

180, 181, 210, 217, 365, 443, 608, 622, 627, 644, 652, 669

Callahan, Maggie, 632 Callimachi, Rukmini, 646 Callinicos, Constantine, 663 Caminiti, Caterina, 634 Campbell, Scott, 651 Campione, Francesco, 26, 578,

604, 634 Campo, Shelly, 623 Camps, Carlos, 635 Candlelighters Childhood Cancer

Foundation, 435 Canto, Angela I., 641 Canton, Norman F., 614 Canuck Place (pediatric palliative

care program), 403 Capital Caring (hospice), 291

des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 678des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 678 2/21/14 4:05 PM2/21/14 4:05 PM

Final PDF to printer

679

Caplan, Arthur L., 621, 629 Capron, Alexander Morgan, 627 Cardenas, Jose, 603 Cardoza y Arogón, Luis, 616 Carey, Susan, 608 Carmichael, Elizabeth, 616 Carney, Susanne S., 655 Carr, Arthur C., 644 Carr, Caleb, 660 Carr, Christopher, 550, 664 Carrasco, David, 121, 616 Carson, Ute, 611 Carter, Gregory T., 635 Carton, Barbara, 659 Casarett, David J., 625 Cassel, Christine K., 211, 627, 631 Cassell, Dana K., 606, 612, 614 Cassell, Eric J., 289, 636 Castle, Jason, 646 Caswell, Glenys, 637 Cathedral of Our Lady of the

Angels (Calif.), 325 Cave, Roderick, 617 Cavuoti, Corinne, 607 CBS News, 660 Census Bureau (U.S.), 606, 607 Center for Military History (U.S.

Army), 22 Centers for Disease Control and

Prevention (CDC), 528 Central Identifi cation Laboratory

(U.S. Army), 146 Cerminara, Kathy L., 225, 629 Certifi cate of Death (U.S.), 141 Chadwick, Nora K., 617 Chan, Cecilia Lan Wan, 125, 597,

617, 633, 668 Chapman, Tony, 626 Chapple, Helen, 211 Char, Walter F., 618 Charles C. Carson Center for

Mortuary Affairs, 146 Charmaz, Kathy, 612 Chatterton, Thomas, 468, 473 Chavira, Juan Antonio, 634 Chelf, Jane Harper, 641 Chen, Meichu D., 649 Chen, Pauline W., 293 Chen, Shih-Fen, 612 Cheney, Annie, 621 Cherry, Katie E., 610 Cheshire, Ashley, 638 Chesney, Margaret A., 661 Chew, G., 602 Chidester, David, 566, 654 Childs, Robert, 616 Chinen, Allan B., 667 Chiu, Wai Tat, 623 Chochinov, Harvey Max, 272, 633 Choron, Jacques, 33, 613, 662 Chow, Amy, 578, 668

Christ, Adolph E., 647 Christ, Grace H., 61, 647 Christakis, Nicholas A., 193, 631 Christensen, Arne Emil, 638 Chuang Tzu (Chinese

philosopher), 124, 544, 663 Chung, Rita Chi-Ying, 667 Cimbolic, Peter, 644 Clancy, John, 636 Clark, David, 87, 570, 635,

667, 669 Clark, Elizabeth J., 667 Clark, Jennifer, 638 Clark, Lynn Schofi eld, 87, 602,

609, 611 Clark, Peter A., 630 Clark, S., 642 Clark, William R., 528, 620,

661, 664 Clarkson, Amy, 602 Clausewitz, Karl von, 515 Clifford, Denis, 256 Cobb, Keltoni, 660 Cochrane, Feargal, 529 Cockburn, David, 665 Cohen, John, 614 Cohen, Larry, 502, 658 Cohen, Susan O., 648 Cohen-Almagor, Raphael, 630 Cohler, Bertram J., 641 Colbert, Stephen, 344 Colby, William, 629 Coler, Margo Simon, 615 Coler, Maria Adriana Felix, 615 Collins, Charles O., 638 Colón, Yvette, 283, 284, 635 Colt, George Howe, 487 Combs, Cindy C., 518, 660 Comelles, Josep M., 634 Committee on Homeland

Security (U.S. Senate), 657 Committee on the Assessment of

Readjustment Needs of Military Personnel, Veterans, and Their Families, 654

Committee on Trauma Research, National Research Council, 650

Comparelli, Anna, 654 Compassionate Friends, The,

380, 435 Congress (U.S.), 167, 224, 238 Conn, Joan, 270 Connelly, Douglas, 663 Connelly, R. J., 630 Connelly, Robert, 632 Connor, Stephen R., 187, 188,

211, 291, 365, 403, 622, 623, 624, 625, 626, 628, 636, 644, 645, 648

Controlled Substances Act, 228 Conwell, Y., 655

Cook, Alicia Skinner, 644 Cook, Emily W., 665 Cook, Robin, 595 Cook County Hospital (Chicago),

201 Cooper, Christopher, 657 Cooper, Jilly, 364 Cooper, Martha, 638 Cooper, Rose, 578, 649, 657 Coren, Stanley, 611 Corless, Inge B., 195, 624, 626,

634, 635, 667, 669 Corr, Charles A., 263, 415, 632 Corr, Donna M., 632 Cosh, Roderick, 636 Costa, Richard, 631 Cousins, Norman, 184, 282,

623, 635 Cowley, R. Adams, 201 Cox, Gerry R., 280, 615, 634 Cox, Meredith, 610 Cox, Ted, 604 CPR Annie, 107 Craft, Lucille, 657 Cramer, Phoebe, 633 Cranford, Ronald E., 620, 629 Crase, Darrell, 572, 606, 667 Creamer, Mark, 657 Creightmore, Richard, 617 Crenner, Christopher, 625 Crenshaw, David A., 377, 645 Crenson, Matt, 661 Crimp, Douglas, 661 Crissman, James K., 606, 626 Crissman, Mary A., 626 Crocoombe, Ron, 593–594, 669 Cross, Tracy L., 653 Cruzan, Nancy Beth, 222,

223–224, 240 Cucchi, Laurel, 648 Cullen, Lisa Takaeuchi, 339 Cullman, Oscar, 538, 662 Cunliffe, Barry, 617 Cunningham, James H., 650 Cupit, Illene Noppe, 47, 607, 609,

619, 647 Curl, James Stevens, 104, 614 Cushing, Maureen, 283 Cutter, Fred, 487

Daggett, Luann M., 651 Dahl, Julia, 653 Dance of Life, The (Munch), 18 Danforth, John C., 631 Danforth, Loring M., 602 Daniel (Hebrew prophet), 535 Dante Alighieri, 539, 540 Danto, Bruce L., 655, 658 Darby, Elisabeth, 613 Dark Elegy (Lowenstein), 18, 19 Davenport, Donna S., 445

des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 679des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 679 2/21/14 4:05 PM2/21/14 4:05 PM

Final PDF to printer

680

Donnelly, Sinéad, 577, 668 D’Onofrio, Carol, 625 Donovan, Marilee Ivar, 624 Dooley, Delores M., 578, 668 Dougherty, Charles J., 230–231,

630 Douglas, Jack D., 656 Dougy Center for Grieving

Children and Their Families (Ore.), 407

Dow, Harold, 660 Doyle, Brian, 660 Dresser, Rebecca, 629 Drug Enforcement Administration

(DEA), 228, 282, 285 Drury, Neville, 613 Du Bois, W. E. B., 551 Duneier, Mitchell, 661 Durkheim, Emile, 453, 455,

456, 653 Durlak, Joseph A., 669 Duro, Paul, 607 Dustin, Christopher, 47 Duszynski, K., 642 Dvorchak, Robert, 615 Dylan, Bob, 532

Eady, Cornelius, 199, 422 Earhart, H. Byron, 616 Earle, Craig C., 625 Earls, Felton, 658 Early, Kevin E., 466, 654 Ebrahim, Shanil, 616 Edgley, Charles, 638 Eggener, Keith, 339 Egnew, Thomas, 669 Ehrenberg, Rachel, 606 Eichenberg, Fritz, 20, 603, 614 Einmal Jenseits und Züruck: Ein

Koffer für die Letzte Reise (Beyond and Back: A Case for the Last Journey), 576, 577

Eisenberg, Jon, 629 Eisenberg, Mickey, 626 Eisenbruch, M., 618 Elbert, Samuel H., 618 Elbert-Avila, Katja I., 615 Elgee, Neil J., 604 Eliason, Grafton T., 47 Eliot, Gil, 658 Eliott, Jaklin, 633 Elliott, John R., 637 Ellis, Carolyn, 350, 641 Ellis, Peter Berresford, 617 Ellis, Tina A., 615 Ellsworth, Judy, 265 Elmer, Stacy, 607 Elwyn, Todd S., 623 Emerson, Ralph Waldo, 251 Emmons, Robert A., 611 Engel, George L., 363, 643

Engels, Phillip, 576 Erickson, Frederick, 610, 612 Erikson, Erik H., 55–56, 57, 58,

60, 62, 65, 415, 609, 610, 648 Erikson, Kai, 173 Erwin, Kathleen, 466, 654 Espejo, Roman, 619 Esposito, John L., 542, 663 Estrada, Fred, 245 Etlin, Richard A., 613 Etzioni, Amitai, 636 Evans, Glen, 485, 653, 654,

655, 656 Evans, Suzanne, 663 Evans-Wentz, W. Y., 550, 664 Everett, Holly, 638

Fabiola (Roman widow and hospice founder), 191

Facebook (online social network), 42, 300

Fadiman, Anne, 634 Fagerlin, Angela, 630, 631 Fahlander, Fredrik, 137 Falk, William, 180 Fancher, Erik H., 605 Farber, Annalu, 669 Farber, Stu, 589, 669 Farberow, Norman L., 451, 481,

487, 653, 654, 655, 656 Farrell, James J., 606 Faust, Drew Gilin, 669 Federal Trade Commission

(FTC), 303, 637. See also Funeral Rule (FTC)

Feifel, Herman, 27–28, 29, 32, 266, 562, 583, 584, 604, 605, 606, 632, 666, 667, 668, 669

Feldman, Fred, 566 Ferranti, Jeffrey, 630 Ferrell, Betty Rolling, 633, 635 Fessenden, Ford, 633 Fetters, Michael D., 623 Field, David, 626 Field, Marilyn J., 211, 415, 631,

646, 647, 648 Fife, Betsy L., 633 Filipovic, Zlata, 388, 646 Finding Our Way: Living and Dying in

America (newspaper series), 583 Fine, Perry G., 635 Fingerman, Karen L., 651 Finkler, Kaja, 634 Fins, Joseph J., 629 Firth, Raymond, 324, 639 Fiscella, Kevin, 633 Fischoff, Baruch, 494, 657 Fishman, Jessica, 625 Five Wishes (advance directive),

237, 238 Fleishman, Alan R., 232, 233, 630

Davidson, Glen W., 614, 650 Davidson, Hilda Ellis, 617 Davidson, L., 655 Davies, Betty, 360, 397, 624, 626,

633, 643, 647, 648 Davies, Douglas J., 339, 639 Davis, Anne J., 630 Davis, Dena S., 231, 630 Dawson, Pam, 651 De Martino, Ernesto, 13 Dean, Patrick Vernon, 31, 605 Deandrea, S., 635 Death with Dignity Act (Ore.),

227, 228 “Debbie” (pseudonymous

patient), 229 DeBlaise, Colleen, 631 Deeken, Alfons, 579, 668 Defoe, Daniel, 489 DeFrain, John, 136, 429, 618,

650, 651 DeGroot, Jocelyn M., 607 DeHart, Dana D., 503, 658 Delk, Wayne, 306 dell’Arca, Niccoli, 343 Deloria, Vine, Jr., 614 Dembosky, April, 626 Dembour, Marie-Bénédicte,

400, 647 DeParle, Nancy-Ann Min, 625 Department of Veterans Affairs

(U.S.), 328 Des Pres, Terrence, 603, 644 DeSantis, Lydia, 647 Descartes, René, 158 DeSpelder, Lynne Ann, 87, 601,

606, 611, 623, 636, 640, 644, 646, 647, 649, 660, 667, 668

Deveau, Eleanor J., 646 DeVita, Michael A., 621 Deyo, Richard A., 622 Diagnostic and Statistical Manual

of Mental Disorders (DSM-5), 361, 362

Diana, Princess of Wales, 202, 359 Dies Irae (Day of Wrath), 13 DiGirolamo, Vincent, 606 Dillon, Wilton S., 513, 659 Dinan, John, 629 Ditto, Peter H., 629, 630 Divine Comedy (Dante), 540 Dixon-Woods, Mary, 415, 609 Dōgen ( Japanese Zen Buddhist

teacher), 547, 548, 664 Dogra, T. D., 658 Doka, Kenneth J., 62, 183, 264,

266, 293, 367, 368, 374, 415, 606, 609, 610, 611, 618, 619, 623, 625, 631, 632, 644, 645, 650, 656, 657

Dolan, Susan, 256, 292, 631

des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 680des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 680 2/21/14 4:05 PM2/21/14 4:05 PM

Final PDF to printer

681

Fleming, Stephen J., 78, 354, 380, 611, 612, 642, 643, 646

Fletcher, John C., 218, 628 Folkman, Susan, 632, 633 Foltyn, Jacque Lynn, 601 Fonseca, Luciana Mascarenhas,

34, 606 Fontana, Andrea, 625, 658 Food and Drug Administration

(FDA), 282 Fook, Jan, 80, 611 Forrest, Linda M., 651 Fortes, Meyer, 615 Foster, Zelda, 239–240, 631, 669 Foundation of Thanatology,

The, 33, 606 Fowler, Kathleen, 641 Fox, Ken, 625 Fox, Renee C., 621 Frances, Doris, 639 Francis, Linda, 604 Frank, Arthur W., 181, 263, 623,

632, 636 Frankfort, Henri, 662 Franklin, Michael, 603 Franz, Marie-Louise von,

562, 666 Fredrick, Jerome F., 643 Freeark, Robert, 201 Freedland, Kenneth E., 633 Freeman, Alma Williams, 637 Freeman, Harold P., 625 Fremantle, Francesca, 664 Freud, Sigmund, 32, 347,

456, 640 Fricke, Charles A., 639 Fried, Jacob, 668 Friedman, Matthew J., 657 Friend, David, 519, 601, 660 Fries, James F., 652 Fristad, Mary A., 648 Fritsch, Julie, 382, 646 Frøen, Frederik, 650 Froggatt, Katherine, 624 Fryer, John E., 606 Fulton, Robert L., 8, 31, 33, 584,

601, 644, 669 Fundación Omega, 579 Fundación Vida por Amor a

Ellos, 579 Funeral Rule (FTC), 303,

313–314, 315, 316 –317, 318, 319, 321, 637

Furman, Erna, 647 Furman, Robert A., 647 Furth, Gregg M., 647

Gallup, George, Jr., 666 Gamino, Louis A., 378, 405, 621,

642, 643, 645, 648, 656 Garbarino, James, 388, 646, 659

Garces-Foley, Kathleen, 330, 566, 639

Garciagodoy, Juanita, 616 Garfi eld, Charles A., 562, 666 Gariety, Patrick C., 635 Garrett, Erin, 610 Garrett, Laurie, 661 Garro, Linda C., 283, 635 Gaslini Children’s Hospital

(Genova), 401 Gatch, Milton McC., 539, 662 Gateway Pet Cemetery (Calif.), 80 Geary, Patrick J., 613 Geddes, Gordon E., 663 Gelfand, Donald E., 256 Gelman, Susan A., 609 Geneva Convention, 518 Gentles, Ian, 613 George Mark Children’s House

(hospice), 403 Gerbner, George, 8, 601 Gergen, Kenneth J., 645 Gergen, Mary A., 645 Gervais, Karen G., 161, 620 Ghalib, Mirza (Persian poet), 542 Giddens, Anthony, 45, 490,

608, 656 Gielen, Uwe P., 664 Gifford, Eugenie Anne, 629 Gilbert, Kathleen R., 47, 351, 607,

610, 619, 641, 651 Gilbert, Richard B., 256, 631 Gilbert, Sandra M., 382, 617 Gill, A. A., 613 Gillick, Muriel R., 626 Gilmore, Mikal, 662 Gioia, Ted, 13, 602 Girardi, Paolo, 654 Gladwell, Malcolm, 657 Glare, Paul, 625 Glaser, Barney G., 33, 263, 264,

632, 635, 636 Glass, J. Conrad, Jr., 655 Glaze, Anita J., 613 Glick, Ira O., 642 Goldberg, Ivan K., 644 Goldenberg, Jamie L., 604 Goldfi ne, Andrew M., 629 Golding, R. E., 656 Goldman, Ari L., 645 Goldsby, Richard, 661 Goldstein, Allan L., 643 Goldwasser, Michael A., 637 GÖle, Nilüfer, 660 Golin, Carol E., 628 Gonzalez, Alberto, 228 González, Rafael Jesús, 616 Gonzalez v. Oregon, 228 Gonzalez-Crussi, Frank, 106, 614 Good, Mary-Jo Del Vecchio, 633 Goodheart, Carol D., 415

Goodman, Kenneth, 629 Goodman, Linda, 646 Goodman, Norman, 610, 612,

618, 665 Goodwin, Michele, 173 Goody, Jack, 615, 639 Goodyear-Smith, Felicity, 623 Gordon, Elisa J., 621 Gorer, Geoffrey, 32, 606 Gospel at Colonus (musical), 565 Goss, Robert E., 382, 583, 603,

641, 664, 668 Gotay, Carolyn C., 618 Gould, M. S., 655 Goya, Francisco José de, 20 Graham, James A., 610 Granqvist, Anna, 647 Gray, Alistair, 622 Grayling, A. C., 501 Great East Japan Earthquake,

494, 495, 497 Great Sichuan Earthquake, 495 Greeley, Andrew M., 665, 666 Green, Harry L., 642 Green, Judith Strupp, 616 Green, Lawrence W., 652 Green, Michael D., 614 Green, Morris, 649 Green, Ronald M., 630 Greenberg, Bradley, 637 Greenberg, Gary, 620 Greenberg, Jeff, 604, 605, 660 Greenblatt, Stephen, 663 Greenlaw, Jane, 227, 629, 630 Greenleigh, John, 616 Greer, David S., 624 Greer, Steven, 632, 633 Greider, William, 657 Greyson, Bruce, 665, 666 Gribbin, Sally, 639 Grider, Sylvia, 311, 638 Griffi n, Jasper, 662 Griffi ths, John, 257 Grifi ths, Maya, 608, 609 Grimes, Ronald L., 137, 664, 667,

668, 669 Grisez, Germain, 630 Grof, Stanislav, 564, 565, 666, 667 Grollman, Earl A., 225, 662 Groopman, Jerome, 184, 204, 626 Gross, Esther, 641 Grotenhermen, Franjo, 634 Groves, Betsy McAlister, 658 Grumbach, Kevin, 622 Gudmundsdottir, Maria, 633 Guerro, Brenda Moretta, 636 Guglielmo, Connie, 621 Gunderman, Richard B., 187 Gupta, Leila, 646 Gust-Brey, Karyn, 653 Gyulay, Jo-Eileen, 648

des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 681des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 681 2/21/14 4:05 PM2/21/14 4:05 PM

Final PDF to printer

682

Habenstein, Robert W., 321, 636, 637

Haddad, Yvonne Yazbeck, 567, 663 Hadden, Jeffrey K., 282, 635 Hadler, Norman M., 445 Haertig, E. W., 618, 640, 645,

662, 666 Hagens, Gunther von, 44 Hahn, Robert A., 619 Haithman, Diane, 607 Hak, Tony, 623 Hakuin ( Japanese Zen Buddhist

teacher), 548, 664 Hale, Leslie Williams, 649 Halevy, A., 628 Halfe, Louise B., 614 Halifax, Joan, 564, 565, 666, 667 Hall, Christopher, 636 Hall, David L., 636 Hall, Mary N., 23, 604 Hall, Nicholas R., 643 Hall, Stephen S., 669 Hamel, Ron, 629 Hamilton, Lou Ann, 649 Handy, E. S. Craighill, 613, 618,

640, 662, 666 Haney, C. Allen, 607 Hansson, Robert O., 360, 383,

445, 642, 643, 646 Harakas, Stanley Samuel, 663 Haraldsson, Erlendur, 560, 666 Harder, Ben, 612 Hardt, Vincent, 640 Harmer, Ruth M., 307 Harris, Daniel, 603 Harris, Darcy L., 376, 383, 619,

645, 668 Harris, Mark, 339 Harris, Morag B., 627 Harris, Murray J., 662 Harrison, Robert Pogue, 137, 618 Harrison, Tyler R., 621 Harrold, Joan, 293 Hart, Onno van der, 640 Hartley, Shirley F., 644 Hartocollis, Anemona, 633 Hartwig, Clayton, 451 Harvard Medical School Ad Hoc

Committee to Examine the Defi nition of Brain Death, 159–160, 163

Harvey, Alynn Day, 602 Hase Temple ( Japan), 427, 428 Hauiser, Joshua, 622 Hawkins, Yasmin, 635 Hawton Keith, 487 Hayes, Christopher I., 616 Hayslip, Bert, Jr., 604, 619, 652 Hazell, LaVone V., 116, 615 Health Care Financing

Administration, 194

“Hearse Song” (The worms crawl in), 72

Heath, Amy Olwen, 650 Heaven’s Gate (Millenarian

group), 455 Hébert-Collins, Sheila, 611 Heeringen, Kees van, 487 Hefl in-Wells, Neil, 606 Heim, Albert, 559, 666 Heinlein, Robert, 595, 670 Heinz, Walter R., 610 Helen House (hospice

program), 403 Help, Understanding, and Group

Support for Hawaii’s Seriously Ill Children and Their Families (HUGS), 407, 648

Hemlock Society, 227 Henderson, Angelo B., 639 Henderson, Kristin, 515, 659 Hendin, Herbert, 630, 655 Hendricks, C. Davis, 626 Hendricks, Jon, 626 Heney, David, 415, 609 Henman, Linda D., 604 Hennessy, Brian, 657 Henslin, James M., 652 Herlihy, David, 614 Herodotus (Greek historian), 306 Heron Melonie, 669 Herzfeld, Michael, 602 Heyman, Kathleen M., 607 Hickman, Susan E., 623 Hiedtke, Lorraine, 602 Higgins, William G., 493 Highwater, Jamake, 614 Higo, Masa, 607 Hildebrand, Jennifer, 615, 636 Hill, Tiffany, 648 Hinton, John, 33 Hippocrates (Greek physician and

father of medicine), 221 Hiroshi, Kawahito, 656 Hirsch, Edward, 602, 603 Hitchens, Christopher, 277, 293 Hjelmeland, Heidi, 653 Ho, Andy Hau Yan, 125, 272,

617, 633 Ho, Samuel, 668 Hockey, Jenny, 636 Hodge, Felicia Schanche, 621 Hodgson, Ann F. de Jong, 603 Hoffman, Albert, 564 Hoffman, Frederick J., 603 Hogan, Nancy S., 642, 647 Holbein, Hans, 105 Holcomb, Justin S., 639 Holden, Constance, 625 Holland, Jason M., 643 Holleran, Reneé Semonin, 631 Hollins, Sheila, 375, 645

Holloway, Margaret, 637 Holmes, Julia, 651 Holocaust Museum (D.C.), 516 Holst-Warhaft, Gail, 602, 603, 659 Holt, Kathleen, 633 Holtkamp, Sue, 173 Homant, Robert J., 653 Homer (Greek epic poet), 537 Hooyman, Nancy R., 383 Hope, R. A., 633, 651 Horacek, Bruce J., 644 Horgan, John, 515, 659 Hospice Hawaii, 403 Hospice MariaTeresa Chiantore

Seràgnoli (Bologna), 190 Hospice of Frederick County

(Md.), 407 Hospice of Marin (Calif.), 192 Hospice of New Haven (Conn.),

192 Houseman, Clare A., 607 Hout, Michael, 665, 666 Howarth, Glennys, 46, 173, 606,

608, 637, 645 Howell, Doris A., 669 Howell, Milton H., 590, 669 Hoy, William G., 298, 326, 339,

637, 639 Hoyert, Donna L., 607, 652 Hoyt, William T., 377, 645 Huffman, L. A., 109 Hughes, Anne, 633 Hultkrantz, Åke, 110, 111, 614 Hume, Janice, 638 Hunt, G. Haunani, 618 Hunt, Linda M., 612 Hurd, Russell C., 647 Hutton, Ronald, 617 Huyler, Frank, 626 Hyland, Liam, 638, 642

I Ching (book of changes), 543 Ice-T, 388, 502, 646, 658 Ilse, Sherokee, 646 Indian Ocean Tsunami, 498 Ingles, Thelma, 624 Insel, Paul M., 178, 277, 490, 622,

632, 633, 634, 650, 651, 652, 656 Institute of Medicine, 387, 399,

402, 469 International Work Group on

Death, Dying, and Bereavement (IWG), 23, 33, 192, 385, 566, 604, 625, 643, 646, 657, 658, 667, 668

Iranzo, Vega, 635 Irwin, H. J., 665 Iserson, Kenneth V., 315, 322, 339,

626, 638 Ishikawa, Sara, 669 Italie, Leanne, 607

des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 682des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 682 2/21/14 4:05 PM2/21/14 4:05 PM

Final PDF to printer

683

Jordan, John R., 581, 642, 645, 668

Joseph (leader of the Nez Percé people), 110, 614

Journal of the Plague Year, A (Defoe), 489

Joy, Janet E., 634 Juergensmeyer, Mark, 522, 660 Junge, Maxine Borowsky, 22, 603

Kaanoi, Momi, 618 Kadvany, John, 494, 657 Kagawa-Singer, Marjorie, 636 Kaiser, Chris, 619 Kaiser Permanente, 196 Kalb, Claudia, 609 Kalich, DeAnn, 606 Kalish, Richard A., 33, 616 Kallenberg, Kjell, 635 Kalu, Ogbu U., 615 Kameny, Rebecca R., 647 Kamm, Phyllis, 651 Kammen, Michael, 324, 639 Kanahele, George Hu’eu Sanford,

133, 602, 618 Kantor, Elizabeth, 617 Kapleau, Philip, 664 Kaplowitz, Stan A., 623 Karakatsanis, K. G., 620 Kass, Leon R., 256, 631, 652 Kast, Eric, 564 Kastenbaum, Beatrice, 606 Kastenbaum, Robert J., 26, 27, 29,

31, 46, 59, 139, 140, 151, 173, 516, 525, 562, 580, 588, 591, 601, 604, 605, 606, 608, 609, 618, 619, 620, 622, 624, 626, 635, 648, 656, 658, 659, 661, 666, 668, 669

Kato, Shuichi, 653 Katrina (hurricane), 80, 392, 496,

498, 500 Kaufert, Joseph M., 612 Kauffman, Jeffrey, 529, 605,

640, 662 Kaufman, Kenneth R., 611 Kaufman, Nathaniel D., 611 Kaufman, Sharon R., 211, 219,

255, 628, 631, 669 Kaut, Kevin P., 632 Kavanaugh, Robert E., 43, 607 Kawabata, Yasunari, 293 Kawano, Satsuki, 617 Keen, Sam, 515, 605, 658, 659 Keene, Donald, 569, 608, 617, 667 Keene, Jennifer Reid, 625, 658 Keister, Douglas, 639 Keleman, Stanley, 342 Kellaher, Leonie, 639 Kellehear, Allan, 8, 47, 80, 95,

127, 137, 160, 161, 163, 198, 291,

293, 581, 582, 597, 601, 611, 617, 620, 624, 626, 627, 636, 652, 668, 669

Keller, Jacqueline, 612 Kellerman, Arthur L., 626 Kelley, Patricia, 632 Kelly, John D., 350, 641 Kelly, Madelyn, 415, 647 Kelly, Patricia Fernández, 616 Kendall, Marilyn, 635 Kendrick, Kristi, 655 Kenkō, Yoshida ( Japanese

Buddhist monk), 591, 608, 669 Kennedy, Daniel B., 653 Kenyon, Brenda L., 608 Kernberg, Paulina F., 473, 655 Kevorkian, Jack, 228, 629 Khazzoom, Loolwa, 660 Kidwell, Clara Sue, 614 Killilea, Alfred G., 585, 669 Kimura, Rihito, 622 King, Noel Q., 615 King, Martin Luther, Sr., 433 Kinsley, David R., 664 Kirk & Nice (funeral home), 316 Kirsch, Patrick Vinton, 618 Klass, Dennis, 349, 350, 378, 382,

515, 583, 603, 616, 640, 641, 645, 649, 650, 659, 664, 668

Kleinman, Arthur, 280, 634 Klenow, Daniel J., 628, 665, 666 Kletti, Roy, 559, 666 Kliman, Gilbert, 610 Kloeppel, Darlene A., 375, 645 Knight, Damon, 595, 669 Knott, J. Eugene, 669 Koerner, Brendan I., 665 Koëter, Gerard, 623 Kollwitz, Käthe, 340, 423, 461 Konishi, Emiko, 630 Koocher, Gerald P., 59, 62, 63–64,

66, 609 Korte, Alvin O., 618 Koshes, Ronald J., 644, 656 Koudounaris, Paul, 92, 137,

612, 613 Kracher, Alfred, 611 Krakauer, Eric L., 625 Kramer, Betty J., 383 Kramer, Jennifer, 625 Kravolec, Peter D., 624 Krieger, Lisa M., 630 Krishna (Hindu deity), 544 Kristjanson, Linda J., 627 Krizek, Bob, 640 Krupat, Edward, 604 Kubasak, Michael, 331 Kübler-Ross, Elisabeth, 33, 185,

186, 192, 264–265, 266, 393, 584, 624, 632

Kudo, Timothy, 659

Iverson, Bruce A., 638 Izuhara, Misa, 631

Jackman, Mary R., 658 Jackson, Charles O., 613 Jackson, E. M., 663, 665 Jackson, Edgar N., 32, 303, 643 Jackson, Kenneth T., 613 Jackson, Marni, 635 Jacobs, Madeline, 181, 219, 224,

622, 628, 629, 631 Jaffe, Greg, 654 Jain, S. Lochlann, 632 Jalland, Patricia, 613 Jambunathan, Jaya, 616 James. Nicky, 626 Jamison, Kay Redfi eld, 448,

652, 653 Janes, Dominic, 636 Janssens, Rien M. J. P. A., 624 Jaramillo, Isa Fonnegra de,

579, 668 Jay, Meg, 58, 609 Jellema, Kate, 617 Jenkins, Philip, 660 Jennett, Bryan, 629 Jennings, Bruce, 625, 657 Jensen, Maxine Dowd, 440 Jesus (central fi gure of

Christianity), 98, 102, 106, 120, 538

Job (Hebrew hero), 534, 535 Jobes, David A., 654 Jobs, Steve, 6, 168, 601 Johansson, Jens, 566 Johnny Got His Gun (Trumbo),

507–508, 509 Johnson, Catherine, 637 Johnson, Celeste M., 392, 647 Johnson, Edward C., 638 Johnson, Gene, 659 Johnson, James Weldon, 541 Johnson, Joy, 650 Johnson, Kimberly S., 615 Johnson, Marilyn, 47, 601 Johnson, S. M., 623 Johnson, S. Marvin, 650 Johnson, Vanessa M. P., 622 Joiner, Thomas, 419, 471, 487,

653, 654, 655 Joint United Nations Programme

on HIV/AIDS, 661 Jones, Hawk, 651 Jones, Jim, 455 Jones, Kara L. C., 651 Jones, Prudence, 617 Jong, Erica, 580 Jonsen, Albert R., 163, 620, 622,

627, 629, 661 Joralemon, Donald, 628 Jordan, Cora, 256

des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 683des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 683 2/21/14 4:05 PM2/21/14 4:05 PM

Final PDF to printer

684

Kumar, Updesh, 487 Kurtz, M. E., 623 Kurutz, Steve, 639 Kutner, Louis, 234 Kutscher, Austin H., 644

Lack, Sylvia, 192 Laderman, Gary, 637 Laerdal, Asmund, 107 LaFleur, William R., 621, 650 Lagnado, Lucette, 625, 638 LaGrand, Lou, 333, 639 Lakin, Josh, 628 Lamentation (dell’Arca), 343 Lamers, Elizabeth P., 73, 610 Lamers, William M., Jr., 192, 195,

331, 603, 625, 626, 627, 640 Lamers, William M., Sr., 321, 334,

636, 637, 640 Lamerton, Richard, 220 Lancaster, Jeffrey, 647 Landis, Daniel, 637 Langer, Lawrence L., 603, 644 Lankgewiesche, William, 660 Lantos, John D., 146, 215, 619,

622, 627 Laquere, Walter, 529, 660 Larson, Dale G., 377, 645 Lasaga, Jose I., 654 Lattanzi-Licht, Marcia, 624, 636 Lauerman, John, 621 Laungani, Pittu, 612, 664 Lawuyi, Olatunde Bayo, 116, 615 Lazarus, Richard S., 633 Le Goff, Jacques, 539, 663 Le Guenno, Bernard, 527, 661 Leaman, Oliver, 606 Leash, R. Moroni, 204, 206,

626, 627 Leder, Drew, 658 Lee, Catherine A., 618, 640, 645,

662, 666 Lee, Kang, 608 Leenaars, Antoon A., 483, 655, 656 Lees, Shirley, 667 Lefcourt, Yvonne K., 618 Legacy.com (memorial Web site),

309, 638 Leichty, Daniel, 47 Leliaert, Richard M., 367, 644 Lenin, Vladimir, 315 Lenius, Oscar, 613 Lennings, C. J., 655 Leon, Irving G., 428, 650 Leondari, Angeliki, 646 León-Portilla, Miguel, 616 Leshner, Paula, 625 Lester, David, 453, 604, 653,

655, 665 Letterman, John (Maj., U.S.

Army), 202

Levine, Carol, 626, 662 Levine, Sol, 652 Levine, Stephen, 110, 209, 614 Levinson, Dan, 633 Leviton, Daniel, 523, 605, 661 Levy, Daniel, 608 Levy, David A., 608 Lewin, Terry, 636 Lewis, C. S., 33 Lewis, Oscar, 347 Liechty, Daniel, 605 Lifton, Robert Jay, 644, 653, 658,

659, 665 Limkin, Raphael, 516 Lin, Maya, 22 Lindahl, Carl, 657 Lindbergh, Charles, 590, 669 Lindemann, Erich, 32, 348, 641 Lindstrøm, Christine, 641 Lingle, John H., 644 Linn-Gust, Michelle, 79, 611 Lipsenthal, Lee, 262, 632 Litman, Robert, 451 Little Red Riding Hood, 73–74 Little Spotted Horse, David, 254 Lizardi, D., 656 Lizza, John P., 620 Lock, Margaret, 166, 621 LoDagaa (ethnic group in

northern Ghana), 114–116, 124 Lofl and, Lyn H., 350, 641 Lomnitz, Claudio, 137, 616 Lon Po Po (Granny Wolf), 74 Lonetto, Richard, 611 Long, J. Bruce, 663 Long, Shawn D., 621 Long, Susan Orpett, 173,

619, 664 Lonigan, Paul R., 617 Loomes, Graham, 627 Lopata, Helena Z., 651 Lopez, Faye, 648 Lord, Janice Harris, 626, 656 Lord Vivian B., 653 Lorius, Cassandra, 632 Los Angeles Suicide Prevention

Center, 481 Loven, Jennifer, 654 Low, Clarinda Mac, 635 Lowenstein, Suse, 18, 19, 23, 603 Lucie-Smith, Edward, 410 Lule, Jack, 7, 601 Lundberg, George D., 147, 179,

619, 622 Lundgren, Burden S., 607 Lundsgaarde, Henry, 151, 619, 620 Luoma, Jason B., 655 Luquis, Raffy R., 614, 615, 618 Lurie, Nicole, 607 Lurker, Manfred, 662 Lutkins, S. G., 643

Lynch, Thomas, 298, 313, 339, 425, 638

Lynn, Joanne, 293, 651 Lyons, Michelle, 608 Lyons, Thomas, 291, 636

Maaka, Margaret J., 618 MacArthur, Douglas, 470, 654 MacCulloch, J. A., 617 MacDougall, Duncan, 620 Macer, Darryl, 622 MacGregor, Geddes, 662 Mackay, James, 639 Mackenbach, Johan P., 106, 614 Macleod, James Lachlan, 658 Madan, T. N., 663 Mahābhārata (Sanskrit epic), 546 Mahoney, John J., 503, 624 Mahoney, John M., 658 Mahoney, Julia D., 621 Make-A-Wish Foundation,

408, 648 Malcom, Nancy L., 648 Malkinson, Ruth, 640, 642, 646 Maltoni, M., 629 Mancinelli, Iginia, 653, 654 Mandal, Manas K., 487 Mandelbaum, David G., 615 Mann, J. John, 654 Marchi, Regina M., 137, 616 Marcus, Morton, 592, 593 Marcus Aurelius, 554, 665 Marcusen, Eric, 644 Margolick, David, 602 Margolin, Malcolm, 111, 614 Margos, Dorothy, 646 Maria Yellow Horse Brave

Heart, 108 Marine Comfort Quilts, 22 Marino, Cesare, 652 Maris, Ronald W., 448, 654 Maroney-Galin, Catherine, 624 Marris, Peter, 417, 649 Marshall, Gordon, 612 Martens, Andy, 605 Martens, Nola, 626 Martin, F. David, 605, 651 Martin, Gus, 529, 658 Martin, Regis, 601, 663 Martin, Terry L., 367, 368, 606,

644, 648 Martinez, Ricardo, 626 Martinson, Ida M., 403, 648, 669 Marvin, Carolyn, 611 Maryland Institute for Emergency

Services, 201–202 Massachusetts General Hospice,

196 Massimo, Luisa M., 647 Mastora, Adelais, 646 Matheson, Jennifer L., 657

des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 684des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 684 2/21/14 4:05 PM2/21/14 4:05 PM

Final PDF to printer

685

Mathiesen, T. J., 602 Matsumoto, Michihiro, 622 Maurice, John, 657 May, Jacque H., 655, 656 Mbiti, John S., 615 McBrien, Richard P., 662, 663 McCahill, Laurence, 633 McCarthy, Ellen P., 625 McCartney, James J., 629, 630 McClean-Rice, Nicholas, 665 McCleneghan, J. Sean, 601 McCorkle, Ruth, 635 McCormick, Richard A., 630 McCoy, Shannon K., 604 McCoyd, Judith L. M., 415, 643 McCrae, Robert R., 633 McCubbin, Marilyn, 650 McCullough, Michael E., 611 McCutcheon, Kelly A., 78,

611, 612 McDermott, John F., Jr., 134, 618 McDowell, Charles P., 644, 656 McDowell, Eugene E., 655, 656 McDowell, Robert, 602, 603 McGee, Marsha, 602 McGinn, Colin, 602 McGoldrick, Monica, 642 McGrath, Alister E., 566, 663 McGreevy, Andrew M., 603 McGregor, Joan L., 621 McGuane, Thomas, 28, 604 McInerny, Fran, 602 McKenzie, Lynda, 627 McKissock, Diane, 579 McKissock, Malcolm, 579 McLauchlan, C. A. J., 626 McLeish, Kenneth, 553, 613, 665 McLeod, Beverly, 657 McPherson, James M., 660 McVeigh, Timothy, 523 Meagher, David K., 597, 621, 645,

651, 657 Meehan, Maude, 444, 484 Meier, Diane E., 624 Meijburg, Herman H. van der

Kloot, 630 Meisel, Alan, 627 Mellor, Philip A., 601, 607, 613 Menninger, Karl, 454 Merboth, Marcia K., 635 Mercer, Mary Beth, 621 Merchant, Raina M., 607 Merck Manual of Diagnosis and

Therapy, 188 Mercy, James A., 655 Mesler, Mark A., 610 Messinger, Thane Josef, 629 Messner, Reinhold, 656 Meyer, John C., 604 Miles, Steven H., 630 Millen, Leverett, 650

Miller, Galen W., 624 Miller, Laurence, 627 Miller, Patricia H., 66, 87, 609, 610 Millman, Robert B., 666 Millot, Bernard, 653 Mineau, Geraldine P., 651 Miniño, Arialdi M., 606 Minkow, Christine, 642 Mirken, Bruce, 635 Mishara, Brian L., 655 Mitchell, Donald D. Kilolani, 618,

666 Mitford, Jessica, 307, 637 Mizuno, Jitaro, 631, 636 Moja, L., 635 Mokuau, Noreen, 618 Monahian, Kathleen, 604 Monk, Linda R., 620 Montanari, M., 635 Moody, Raymond A., Jr., 555, 561,

665, 666 Moore, Calvin Conzelus, 604 Moore, Joan, 616 Moos, Nancy L., 353, 642 Mor, Vincent, 622, 624 Morel, Eve, 611 Morewitz, Stephen J., 658 Morgan, John, 666 Morgan, Oliver, 657 Morgan, Susan E., 621 Morioka, Masahiro, 622 Morley, John, 613 Morning Star Center, 407 Morris, David B., 635 Morris, John N., 626 Morrison, R. Sean, 624 Morrow, Chad E., 654 Morse, Dan, 638 Morse, Janice M., 638, 642 Moscati, Sabatino, 617 Moser, Richard P., 605 Moskowitz, Judith Tedlie, 632 Moss, Miriam S., 421, 649 Moss, Sidney Z., 421, 649 Mothers Against Drunk Driving

(MADD), 369, 435, 594 Moules, Nancy J., 608 Mount, Balfour M., 176, 185,

623, 624 Mount Auburn Cemetery

(Mass.), 104 Mount Pelée (Martinique), 498 Mount St. Helens (Wash.), 498 Mowery, Robyn L., 623 Muhammad (Arab prophet and

founder of Islam), 542 Munch, Edvard, 18, xxi Munkar (Islamic spiritual being),

543 Murray, Colleen I., 610 Murray, Judith A., 642

Murray, Scott A., 635 Mynatt, Blair Sumner, 623

Nabe, Clyde M., 667 Naboulsi, Mohamed A., 605 Nadeau, Janice Winchester, 353, 642 Nagy, Maria H., 54–55, 609 Naito, Ayumi, 655 Nakamura, Hajime, 616 Nakir (Islamic spiritual being), 543 Names Project AIDS Memorial

Quilt, 20–21, 23 Naomi, Shono, 658 National Association for Loss and

Grief (NALAG), 578–579 National Cancer Institute, 408 National Center for

Complementary and Alternative Medicine (NCCAM), 634

National Conference of Commissions on Uniform State Law, 166

National Council on Aging, 442 National Funeral Directors

Association (NFDA), 304–305, 313, 314

National Hospice and Palliative Care Organization (NHPCO), 188, 194

National Organ Transplant Act, 167, 168

National Police Agency of Japan, 657

National Safety Council, 601 Native American Grave Protection

and Repatriation Act, 110, 324 Natural Death Act (Calif.),

234, 630 Navy (U.S.), 451, 452 Neal, Arthur G., 668 Neimeyer, Robert A., 28, 29, 42,

360, 379, 383, 604, 605, 607, 642, 643, 645, 656, 668

Nelson, Roxanne, 634 Neophytou, Georgina, 639 Ness, M. Ernest, 602 Neugarten, Bernice L., 442, 652 New Melleray Abbey, 318 The New York Times, 521 Newman, Andrew, 648 Newton, Huey, 7 Nichols, Elaine, 137, 637 Nick Snow Children’s Hospice and

Palliative Care Act (Calif.), 403 Nickman, Steven, 350, 641, 647 Nikhilananda (founder of

Ramakrishna-Vivekananda Center), 544, 546

No One Dies Alone (palliative care program), 198

des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 685des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 685 2/21/14 4:05 PM2/21/14 4:05 PM

Final PDF to printer

686

Noppe, Illene Cupit, 47, 607, 609, 619, 647

Noppe, Lloyd D., 609, 647 Nordyke, Eleanor C., 618 Norman, Connie, 621 Normand, Claude, 635 Norris, Fran H., 657 Novack, D. H., 628 Novak, Marian Faye, 513, 659 Noviello, Susan B., 644 Noy, Chaim, 641 Noyes, Deborah, 619, 637 Noyes, Russell, Jr., 559, 633,

636, 666 Nugus, Danny, 654 Nurok, Michael, 626

O’Brien, John M., 651 O’Carroll, Patrick W., 656 Ochs, Donovan J., 602 O’Connell, Laurence J., 622 Odenwald, Sten, 670 Odiah, Chuck, 653 Oestigaard, Terje, 137 Ogloff, James R. P., 653 Ohnuki-Tierney, Emiko, 622 O’Hógáin, Dáithé, 617 Okamuira, Jonathan Y., 618 Oken, Donald, 628 Old Age Assistance Act, 200 Oliver, Ian, 633 Olshansky, S. Jay, 607 Olson, David H., 136, 618 Olson, Eric, 658 Olson, Karin L., 632 Olson, Patrick, 527 Oltjenbruns, Kevin Ann, 627, 646 O’Neil, John D., 612 O’Neill, Kathleen, 642 Ono, Sokyo, 616 Operation Gold Star Flag, 22 Operation Homemade Quilts, 22 Opfer, John E., 609 Opie, Iona, 610 Opie, Peter, 610 Opoku, Kofi Asare, 113, 615 Oppenheimer, Stephen, 363 Ordenstein, Anna, 618 Ordenstein, Ken, 618 Organ Procurement and

Transplantation Network (OPTN), 167

Organ Transplant Law ( Japan), 171

Ornstein, Peter A., 608 O’Rourke, Kevin, 630 Osis, Karlis, 560, 666 Osnos, Evan, 657 Ostaseki, Frank, 198, 626 Osterweis, Marion, 649

Osuna, Patricia, 616 Otto, Randy K., 653 Overmyer, Daniel L., 616 Owen, Greg, 8, 584, 601, 644, 669

Pacholski, Richard A., 602, 603, 661

Palazzolo, Joe, 619 Palermo, George B., 619, 658 Paletti, Robin, 63, 609 Palliative Care Project, 196 Palmer, Craig T., 613, 615 Paludi, Michele A., 610 Pan American fl ight 103, 18 Pan American Health

Organization, 657 Panek, Paul E., 652 Papa, Anthony, 642 Papadatou, Danai, 209, 627,

633, 647 Papadoupolos, Irene, 667 Parents of Murdered Children

(POMC), 435, 594 Parikh, Sara J. Tedrick, 649 Paris, J., 630 Parke, Ross D., 608 Parker, Dorothy, 478 Parkes, Colin Murray, 192, 348,

353, 363, 383, 517, 553, 632, 641, 642, 643, 651, 659, 660, 665

Parsons, Talcott, 28, 33, 289, 604, 636

Partners HealthCare (Mass.), 196 Passalacqua, Rudolfo, 634 Patient Self-Determination Act

(PSDA), 238 Patrick, Julie Hicks, 652 Pattison, E. Mansell, 632 Paul (Christian apostle and

missionary), 539 Paul, Barbara J., 536 Paulos, John Allen, 607 Paxton, Frederick S., 613 Payne, Richard, 194, 625 Paz, Octavio, 118, 616 Peale, Charles Willson, 18 Pearson, Jane L., 655 Pearson, Mike Parker, 137,

613, 636 Peck, Dennis L., 606, 656 Pellegrino, Edmund D., 623 Pennick, Nigel, 617 Peppers, Larry G., 650 Perdue, Theda, 614 Pére Lachaise Cemetery

(Paris), 104 Peretz, David, 644 Pérez, Miguel A., 614, 615, 618 Perlmutter, Steven B., 280, 281,

629, 634

Perrow, Charles, 497, 657 Person, Judi Lund, 626, 630 Peter Bent Brigham Hospital

(Mass.), 165, 196 Peterson, Jane W., 652 Pfeffer, Cynthia R., 655 Pfeiffer, Angela M., 656 Pfi ster, Oskar, 559, 666 Pfost, Karen S., 643 Phan, Peter C., 663 Phillips, Julie A., 655 Phillips, Michael M., 603 Phillips, Russell S., 628 Phipps, William E., 624 Physician Orders for Life-

Sustaining Treatment (POLST), 235, 236, 241

Piaget, Jean, 56, 57–58, 59, 61, 63, 609

Piedmont, Ralph L., 664 Pierce, Sandra Girton, 624 Pihlström, Sami, 601 Pike, Martha V., 603 Pine, Vanderlyn R., 296, 605,

636, 638 Pinsdorf, Marion K., 328, 639 Pittman, John, 661 Planchon, Lynn A., 611, 612 Plath, David W., 82, 612 Plath, Sylvia, 468 Plato (Greek philosopher), 538 Platt, Colin, 614 Plopper, Bruce L., 602 Plum, Fred, 629 Poceski, Mario, 663 Poppi, Cesare, 639 “Portraits of Grief,” 521 Posada, José Guadalupe, 20,

105, 118 Potts, Michael, 666 Powell, F. C., 656 Poythress, Norman, 653 Prado, C. G., 628, 654 Prepeliczay, Susanna, 667 Presbyterian Synod of

Phiiladelphia, 253 President’s Commission for the

Study of Ethical Problems in Medicine and Biomedical and Behavioral Research, 162, 163, 216, 221, 620, 627

President’s Council on Bioethics, 154, 441, 631

Preston, Fredrica A., 635 Preston, Richard J., 614 Preston, Sarah C., 614 Prettyman, Nathalie, 611 Price, Paul, 660 Pridonoff, John A., 227, 629 Prigerson, Holly G., 360, 383, 643

des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 686des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 686 2/21/14 4:05 PM2/21/14 4:05 PM

Final PDF to printer

687

Prior, Lindsay, 604, 606 Progetto Revivere (Italy), 578 Program in Placebo Studies and

the Therapeutic Encounter (Harvard), 280

Project COPE, 501 Promessa (ecological burial

company), 331 Prothero, Stephen, 638 Prull, Richard W., 669 Pryor, Juan Camilo Algarra, 579 Puckle, Bertram, 306 Pukui, Mary Kawena, 559, 613,

618, 640, 645, 662, 666 Purnell, Larry D., 614,

615, 616 Pütz-Roth (funeral home), 337,

338, 576 Pyszcznski, Tom, 604, 605, 660 Pythagoras (Greek philosopher

and mathematician), 537

Queen of Heaven Mausoleum (Ill.), 325

Quill, Timothy E., 227, 627, 629, 630

Quinlan, Karen Anne, 222 Qur’an (central religious text of

Islam), 542, 543

Rachel Weeping (Peale), 18 Rådestad, Ingela, 650 Radin, Paul, 614 Rady, Mohamed Y., 621 Raine, Susan, 654 Rainer, Jackson P., 242, 631 Ramazani, Jahan, 16, 603 Ramsey, Boniface, 538, 662 Randall, Brad, 619 Rando, Therese A., 268, 346, 347,

350, 359–360, 445, 633, 640, 641, 643, 644

Range, Lillian M., 529, 605, 662 Raphael, Beverly, 436, 642,

650, 651 Rappe, Paula T., 604 Raudenbush, Stephen W., 658 Rawski, Evelyn S., 617 Ray, Barbara, 610 Ray, Roger, 627 Reader, Ian, 616 Reardon, Frank, 630 Recer, Paul, 659, 661 Redmond, Lula M., 372, 606,

644, 658 Reece, Robert D., 638 Reed, Kit, 595, 670 Reed, Susan E., 655 Rees, W. D., 643 Reeves, Nancy C., 640

Regale Funeral Store (London), 319

Rehmeyer, J., 650 Reich, Michael R., 653 Reid, Cynthia L., 638 Reid, Jon K., 638 Reinhardt, John E., 615 Reiser, Stanley Joel, 211, 623 Rembrandt van Rijn, 20 Renzenbrink, Irene, 211 Requarth, Margo, 647 Resch, Nancy, 649 Reynolds, David K., 33, 616,

634, 669 Reynolds, Francoise M., 644 Reynolds, Vernon, 302, 322, 551,

637, 638, 664 Rhine, Charles D., 638 Riches, David, 613 Riches, Gordon, 651 Richmond, Jillian, 623 Riedlinger, June R., 666 Riedlinger, Thomas J., 666 Riemer, Jeffrey W., 653 Rieser, John J., 608 Ring, Kenneth, 556, 665 Ritter, R. Hal, Jr., 378, 405, 621,

643, 645, 648, 656 Robbins, Margaret, 621 Rober, Peter, 206, 627 Roberts, D. S., 663 Roberts, Pamela, 309, 638 Robinson, Edwin Arlington, 458 Robinson, H. Wheeler, 535, 662 Robinson, Paul J., 354, 642, 643 Robinson, Vera M., 604 “Rockabye Baby” (lullaby), 75 Röcke, Christina, 610 Rodde, Jillian, 621 Roediger, David R., 615 Rohrlich, Ted, 619 Roll, Samuel, 650 Rolling Thunder (Cherokee

shaman), 158 Ronco, C., 620, 621 Roos, Susan, 650 Ropp, Leland, 658 Rösch-Rhomberg, Inge, 617 Rosenbaum, Ernest H., 293, 623 Rosenbaum, Isadora, 293 Rosenberg, Charles E., 176 –177,

525, 622, 632, 661 Rosenberg, Jay F., 444, 620, 652 Rosenberg, Jerome, 656 Rosenblatt, Paul C., 206, 424, 445,

516, 627, 643, 649, 659 Rosenfeld, Alvin H., 603 Rosielle, Drew, 229 Ross, Cheri Barton, 81, 611, 612 Roter, Debra, 604

Roth, Fritz, 576, 640, 668 Roth, Randolph, 529 Roth, Walton T., 178, 277, 490,

622, 632, 633, 634, 650, 651, 652, 656

Rothberg, Joseph M., 644, 656 Rothenberg, Richard, 528, 661 Rothman, Barbara Katz,

649, 650 Rousseau, P., 629 Rubin, Nissan, 646 Rubin, Simon Shimson, 352, 353,

640, 642, 646, 663 Rubinstein, Donald H., 655 Rubinstein, Robert, 649 Ruby, Jay, 650 Ruehlmann, William, 603 Ruskin, Cindy, 603 Russac, R. J., 641 Russell, Bertrand, 532, 662 Rustøen, Tone, 633 Rususci Anne (CPR manikin), 107 Ruth, Susan L., 654 Rutherford, Ward, 617 Ryndes, True, 625

Sabom, Michael B., 666 Sadler, H. Harrison, 631 Safer, Peter, 107 Sala, Fabio, 604 Salinas, Robert C., 606, 612, 614 Salisbury, Howard G., 659 Samaritans (telephone support

program), 408, 481 Samet, Elisabeth D., 603 Sampson, Robert J., 658 Samuel (Hebrew judge and

prophet), 535 San Diego Hospice (Calif.), 194 San Francisco Columbarium

(Calif.), 330 San Francisco General Hospital,

201 Sancton, Thomas A., 626 Sanders, Catherine M., 649, 669 Sanders, Jimy M., 618 Sandor, Richard S., 183, 623 Sandy Hook Elementary School

(Conn.), 503 Santino, Jack, 617 Sapolsky, Robert M., 640 Sarre, Philip, 657 Sasaki, Hiroki, 623 Saul (Hebrew king), 535 Saunders, Cicely, 33, 191, 192,

584, 625 Savage, Judith A., 431, 650 Sayer, Chloē, 616 Schacter, Sherry R., 606 Schapiro, Renie, 173

des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 687des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 687 2/21/14 4:05 PM2/21/14 4:05 PM

Final PDF to printer

688

Scheffl er, Samuel, 566 Scheper-Hughes, Nancy, 170, 612,

621 Schiavo, Michael, 224 Schiavo, Terri, 224 Schiff, Brian, 641 Schiff, Harriett Sarnoff, 649 Schiff, Nicholas D., 629 Schilder, Paul, 54, 609 Schim, Stephanie Myers, 617 Schindler, Ruben, 645 Schnebly, Stephen, 650 Schneider, Alan L., 614 Schneider, Carl E., 631 Schneider, John, 381, 646 Schneiderman, Lawrence J., 634 Schoenberg, Bernard, 644 Schoenborn, Charlotte A., 607 Schoenhoff, Doris M., 634, 670 Schorsch, Anita, 603 Schotzinger, Kathleen A., 639 Schreiber, Brad, 619 Schudson, Michael, 660 Schulman, Jerome L., 433, 650 Schumacher, Karen L., 635 Schuon, Frithjof, 542, 663 Schuster, Janice Lynch, 293 Schut, Henk, 351, 362, 383, 607,

642, 643, 645, 646 Schuurman, Donna, 394, 449,

647, 648 Schwartz, Catherine, 657 Schwartz, Eric C., 657 Schwartz, Harvey J., 659 Sciorra, Joseph, 638 Scott, Janet Lee, 617 Seale, Clive F., 87, 622 Seattle (leader of Suquamish

people), 109 Sedney, Mary Anne, 351, 611, 641 Seelye, Katherine Q., 639 Segal, Alan F., 566 Selekman, Janice, 129, 617 Self-Portrait with Dr. Arrieta (Goya),

20 Selsky, Andrew, 654 Senate (Vt.), 227 Serdahely, William J., 558, 665 Servaty-Seib, Heather, 409, 418,

643, 648, 649 Settersten, Richard A., Jr., 68, 438,

610, 651 Seward, Jack, 653 Sewell, Kenneth W., 642 Shafi , Mohammad, 653 Shain, Benjamin N., 655 Shaoyuan, Wanyan, 617 Shapiro, Ester R., 604 Sharkey, John, 617 Sharlet, Jeff, 625 Shaw, Richard, 20

Shay, Jonathan, 511, 512, 659 Sheets-Johnstone, Maxine, 605 Sheikh, Aziz, 635 Sheler, Jeffery L., 662, 665, 666 Shemie, Sam D., 620 Shepherd, Lois, 629 Sherwood, Sylvia, 626 Sheskin, Arlene, 644 Shewman, D. Alan, 154, 620 Shibata Hospital ( Japan), 279 Shibuichi, Daiki, 603 Shilling, Chris, 41, 601, 607, 613 Shilts, Randy, 661 Shiraev, Eric B., 608 Shiun Jizo Temple ( Japan), 427 Shiva (Hindu deity of destruction

and regeneration), 545 Shneidman, Edwin S., 141, 268,

418, 448, 449, 450, 451, 457–458, 464, 481, 487, 589, 597, 619, 633, 649, 652, 653, 654, 655, 656, 669

Shumway, Norman, 164 Shupe, Anson, 282, 635 Shushan, Gregory, 566 Siddhartha Gautama (Indian

philosopher and founder of Buddhism), 547, 550

Siegel, Karolynn, 647 Siggins, Lorraine, 640 Silberman, Lou H., 662 Silvera, Janmarie, 293, 636 Silverman, Morton M., 656 Silverman, Phyllis R., 293, 350,

362, 375, 377, 393, 415, 439, 445, 641, 643, 645, 646, 647, 648, 651, 668, 669

Silverman, Sam, 457, 654 Silverstein, Murray, 669 Sim, Stuart, 607 Simak, Clifford, 595, 670 Siminoff, Laura A., 621 Simmons, Gene, 583 Simon, William, 607 Simonds, Wendy, 649, 650 Sinclair, Christian, 631 Sinha, Gunjan, 661 Sisson, Paul, 625 Sisti, Dominic A., 629 Skala, Judith A., 633 Sklar, Fred, 644 Slann, Martin, 518, 660 Slaughter, Virginia, 608, 609 Sloan, Susan Lynn, 624 Slomka, J., 630 Smart, Laura S., 649, 650, 651 Smart, Ninian, 613 Smiley, David, 656 Smith, Alexander K., 625 Smith, Anne M., 607 Smith, Harold Ivan, 649

Smith, Huston, 663 Smith, Jane Idelman, 567, 663 Smith, Ken R., 651 Smith, M. Brewster, 66, 610 Smith, Neal, 624 Smith, Nicola, 613 Smith, Robert J., 616, 644 Smith, Sharon Hines, 649 Smith, Thomas J., 623 Smithsonian Institution, 22 Snyder, Gary, 595, 670 Sobers, Deiann, 578 Social Security Act, 199–200 Socrates (Greek philosopher),

457, 532, 538 Sofka, Carla J., 23, 47, 309, 604,

607, 619, 638, 669 Sokan ( Japanese poet), 127 Sokefeld, Martin, 612 Solomon, Fredric, 649 Solomon, Robert, 31 Solomon, Sheldon, 604,

605, 660 Somerfi eld, Mark R., 633 Sommerville, C. John, 613 Sorrows of Young Werther, The

(Goethe), 466 –467 Sossou, M. A., 645 Sozzi, Marina, 45, 608 Specter, Michael, 634 Speece, Mark W., 51, 52–53,

81–82, 608, 612 Spencer, A. J., 662 Spench, Carol, 624 Spickard, Paul, 618 Spiro, Howard M., 622 Spring Grove Cemetery

(Cincinnati), 104 St. Anthony’s Hospital (Denver),

202 St. Christopher’s Hospice

(England), 191–192 St. Croix, Stephen, 490 St. Luke’s Hospice (New York),

192 Stacciarini, Jeanne-Marie R., 667 Stacks, James R., 627 Stafford, Peter, 667 Stanford University Hospital

(Calif.), 198 Stannard, David E., 43, 607,

613, 663 Starlight Children’s Foundation,

408, 648 State Department (U.S.), 518 Staub, Ervin, 659 Stead, Eugene A., Jr., 623 Steadman, Lyle B., 613, 615 Steighner, Nina S., 641 Steinbeck, John, 241 Steinbrook, Robert, 621

des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 688des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 688 2/21/14 4:05 PM2/21/14 4:05 PM

Final PDF to printer

689

Steinhauser, Karen E., 631 Stengel, Erwin, 654 Stephenson, Michael T., 621 Stevens, Dennis J., 619 Stevens, Michael J., 643 Stevenson, Ian, 665 Stewart, Alan E., 626, 656 Stillion, Judith M., 438, 447, 606,

644, 647, 651, 652, 655, 656 Stimpson, Catherine R., 619 Stoddard, Sandol, 624, 625 Stokes, Shelley, 612 Stone, Jacqueline I., 567 Strack, Steven, 667 Strauss, Anselm L., 33, 263, 264,

632, 635, 636 Strickland, Albert Lee, 87, 602,

603, 606, 611, 614, 623, 636, 640, 644, 647, 649, 658, 667

Stroebe, Margaret S., 348, 351, 360, 362, 363, 365, 379, 384, 445, 607, 641, 642, 643, 644, 645, 646, 668

Stroebe, Wolfgang, 365, 383, 642, 644, 645, 668

Stryker, Jeff, 661 Study to Understand Prognoses

and Preferences for Outcomes and Risks of Treatment (SUPPORT), 219, 238, 628

Sturken, Marita, 660 Suárez, Constancio S., 118 Sudnow, David, 206, 298, 637 Sugimoto, John D., 627 Suicide of Lucretia, The

(Rembrandt), 20 Sullivan, Louis W., 625 Sumpter, Helen K., 642 Sunshine Foundation, 408, 648 Supreme Court (Fla.), 224 Supreme Court (Mo.), 222 Supreme Court (N.J.), 222 Supreme Court (U.S.), 222–223,

226, 227, 228, 240 Svensson, Peter, 637 Swain, Helen L., 60, 609 Swazey, Judith P., 621 Swift, Susan, 502, 658 Swofford, Anthony, 659 Sznaider, Natan, 608

Taff, Mark L., 655, 658 Tafoya, Terry, 640 Takeuchi, K., 668 Talarico, Ernest F., Jr., 619 Talbot, Kay, 649, 650 Tamm, Maare E., 647 Tanabe, George J., Jr., 664 Tanaka, Daisuke, 127, 617 Tang, Siew Tzuh, 635 Tankink, Marian, 646

Tanner, Ralph, 302, 322, 551, 637, 638, 664, 669

Tanyi, Ruth A., 664 Tapper, Jake, 529 Tasker, Fred, 656 Tasma, David, 191 Tatar, Maria, 610 Tatarelli, Roberto, 654 Tate, Frederic B., 602 Taub, Deborah J., 649 Taylor, Mark C., 597 Taylor, Richard P., 567 Tecca, Martha, 626 Tedeshi, Richard G., 645 Tejada-Vera, Betzaida, 652, 669 Templer, Donald I., 612, 635 Ten Have, Henk A. M. J., 624 Teno, Joan M., 188, 622, 624 Teresa (Albanian religious in

India), 584 Teresi, Dick, 669 Terheggen, Maaike, 645 Testoni, Ines, 34, 606 Tetsuo, Yamaori, 616, 617 Thanatos (Greco-Roman

personifi cation of death), 6 Tharoor, Shashi, 523, 660, 661 The, Anne-Mei, 623 Thich Quang Duc (Buddhist

monk), 454 Thiselton, Anthony C., 540, 663 Thomas, Diane M., 636 Thomas, L. Eugene, 293 Thomasma, David C., 623 Thompson, Charles C., II, 653 Thompson, Hunter S., 332 Thompson, Neil, 657 Thompson, Randall C., 632 Thomson, Graeme, 14, 47, 602 Thornton, Gordon F., 383 Thorson, James A., 23–24, 604,

656, 668 Thucydides (Greek historian and

general), 537 Tibetan Book of the Dead, 550 Tilling, Robert I., 657 Timmer, Ashley, 660 Timmermans, Stefan, 143, 170,

619, 621, 653 Tōhoku earthquake, 494, 495, 497 Tomer, Adrian, 47 Toombs, S. Kay, 262, 632 Towers, Anna, 627 Toynbee, Arnold, 507, 510,

658, 659 Tragedy Assistance Program for

Survivors (T.A.P.S.), 380, 646 Trau, Jane Mary, 630 Travis, J., 661 Triangle Shirtwaist Company

(N.Y.), 496

Trotter, Robert T., II, 634 Trumbo, Dalton, 507, 509, 658 Trungpa, Chögyam, 550, 664 Truog, R. D., 620 Tsanakas, J. N., 620 Tsuda, Tsukada, 623 Tucci, Amy S., 293, 415 Tulsky, Fredric N., 619 Tulsky, James A., 615 Tuman, Joseph S., 660 Turner, James, 665 Turner, Ronny E., 638 Turvey, C. L., 655 Twin Towers (N.Y.), 519, 520, 521 Twycross, Alisoni, 635 Tyson, Ann Scott, 654

Ueda, Makoto, 636 Umberson, Debra, 445, 515,

649, 659 Umphrey, Laura R., 649 Uniform Anatomical Gift Act,

144, 166 Uniform Determination of Death

Act, 162 United Nations Population Fund,

658 United Network for Organ

Sharing (UNOS), 167 United States Military Academy

(West Point), 18 Unknown Serviceman of the

Vietnam Era, 308 Unnithan, N. Prabhia, 619 USS Iowa, 451 Utz, Rebecca L., 439, 651

Vacco v. Quill, 226 Vachon, Mary L. S., 669 Valadez, Jorge, 121, 616 Valentine, Christine, 127, 383, 617 Van Brunt, David, 604 Van Den Bout, Jan, 645 Van Der Geest, Sjaak, 615 Van Der Houwen, Karolijne,

607, 645 Van Dongen, Carol J., 371, 644 Van Gemert, Andre, 638 Van Wormer, Katherine, 653 VanderBos, Gary R., 652 Varah, Chad, 481 Vardaman, James M., Jr., 650 Varga, Mary Alice, 609 Varnedoe, Kirk, 603 Vastag, Brian, 661 Veatch, Robert M., 155, 157, 160,

161, 620, 623 Velie, Alan, 614 Venies, Paolo, 633 Vergara, José, 613 Verghese, Abraham, 632

des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 689des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 689 2/21/14 4:05 PM2/21/14 4:05 PM

Final PDF to printer

690

Verheijde, Joseph L., 621 Vernon, Glenn M., 150, 509,

619, 659 Verrengia, Joseph B., 619 Veterans Administration,

254, 512 Vicchio, Stephen J., 662,

663, 666 Vico, Giambattista, 92, 613 Victoria (queen of Great Britain,

1837–1901), 99 Vietnam Veterans Memorial, 22,

23, 513, 514 Vincent, Barry, 597 Virgin de Guadalupe (Marian

apparition and patron saint of Mexico), 120

Vizzard, Audrey, 256, 292, 631 Vovelle, Michael, 613 Vuure, D. van, 637

Wada, Jurō, 170 Wagner, Barry M., 654 Wal, Gerrit van der, 623 Walco, Gary A., 648 Wald, Elijah, 602 Wald, Florence, 192 Walker, Andrea C., 614, 648 Walker, Barbara A., 665 Walking Skeleton (Shaw), 20 Wallace, Deborah, 528, 661 Wallace, Rodrick, 528, 661 Wallace, Samuel E., 644 Wallenstein, S., 655 Walls, Jerry L., 539, 567, 663 Walmart, 318 Walsh, Froma, 642 Walter, Carolyn Ambler, 415, 643 Walter, Mariko Namba, 567 Walter, Tony, 42, 351, 601,

607, 641 Walters, Derek, 617 Walton, Douglas N., 620 Ward, Jesmyn, 499 Warren, Carol, 613 Washington v. Glucksberg, 226 Wass, Hannelore, 10, 34, 68, 353,

602, 606, 610, 642, 669 Watkins, Glenn, 602 Watson, James L., 617 Watson, Patricia J., 657 Watson, Stanley J., 634 Watterson, Barbara, 662 Watts, Jonathan S., 293, 664 Waugh, Evelyn, 307 Weaver, Hilary N., 610, 614,

615, 618 Webster, Judi, 627 Wechsler, David, 609 Wechsler, Paul, 54

Weeks, Duane O., 637 Weeks, Jane C., 634 Weinberg, Matt, 257 Weinberger-Thomas,

Catherine, 653 Weinfeld, Irwin J., 650 Weir, Robert F., 603 Weisman, Avery D., 28, 33, 181,

264, 267, 589, 604, 612, 632, 633, 653, 669

Weisner, Thomas S., 612 Weiss, Hali J., 639 Weiss, Robert S., 642, 651 Weissman, David E., 627 Welch, Alfred T., 663 Wendt, William, 523, 661 Wenger, Neil S., 628 Werth, James L., Jr., 257, 629, 635 Wertheimer, Alison, 656 Wertheimer, Michael D., 623 Wessel, Morris A., 611 Wessels, Anne B., 643 West, Candace, 183, 623 West Point (U.S. Military

Academy), 18 Weyers, Heleen, 257 Wheeler, H. Brownell, 623 White, E. B., 489, 656 White, Margot L., 218, 628 Whitehouse, Kaja, 242, 631 Whitmarsh, Andrew, 22–23, 603 Whitsett, Stan F., 647 Wickersham, Joan, 479, 484,

487, 656 Wicks, Mona Newsome, 622 Widdison, Harold A., 659 Widowed Persons Service (WPS),

439–440 Wiener, Lori S., 648 Wieseltier, Leon, 662 Wiezman, Savine Gross, 651 Wijdicks, Eelco F. M., 620 Wikan, Unni, 365, 644 Wiklund, Ingela, 633 Wilcox, Sara, 651 Wilkinson, Charles, 137, 614 Williams, Melissa Johnson, 638 Williamson, John B., 604 Wilson, Charles Reagan, 15,

602, 637 Wilson, Chris, 652 Wilson, Ward, 509, 658 Wiman, Christian, 271 Windling, Terri, 610 Winn, Peter A. S., 606, 612, 614 Winnick, Terri A., 634 Winokuer, Howard R., 376, 383,

645 Winslade, John, 602 Winston, Carole A., 625

Wirzba, Norman, 26, 604 Wittkowski, Joachim, 605 Wiztum, Eliezer, 640, 642, 646 Wolfelt, Alan, 337, 640 Wolfenstein, Martha, 610 Wong, Edward, 657 Wong, Paul T. P., 47 Wong, Steven A., 654 Wood, Trish, 529, 659 Wooden, Wayne S., 618 Woodlawn Cemetery (N.Y.), 104 Woodruff, Bob, 659 Woodruff, Lee, 513, 659 Worden, J. William, 346,

350, 377, 640, 641, 645, 646, 647, 648

World Campaign for the Protection of Victims of War, 659

World Health Organization, 187, 525, 661

World of Warcraft (online game), 528

World Trade Center (N.Y.), 519, 520, 521

Woznick, Leigh A., 415 Wrenn, Robert L., 633 Wright, Susan M., 624, 626 Wulff, David M., 667 Wunn, Ina, 612

Xu, Jiaquan, 607, 652

Yahweh (Hebrew deity), 534 Yalom, Irving D., 47 Yalom, Marilyn, 339, 639 Yamada, Yoko, 610 Yang, Shu Ching, 612 Yasien-Esmael, Hend, 663 Yim, Susan, 618 Yorba, Tomás Antonio, 246 –247 Yoshiharu, Tomatsu, 293 Yoshihito, Takada, 650 Yoshishige, Jon, 619 Young, Benjamin B. C., 618 Young, Bridget, 415, 609 Young, Ed, 611 Young, J. Z., 301, 637 Young, Jerome, 653 Young, Thomas J., 653 Youngelson-Neal, Helen, 668 Younger, Stephen M., 524, 661 Youngner, Stuart J., 173 Youngs, George A., 628

Zahan, Dominique, 113, 615 Zahn-Waxler, Carolyn, 608 ZAK A (Zihui Korbanot Ason;

Israeli disaster recovery organization), 521

des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 690des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 690 2/21/14 4:05 PM2/21/14 4:05 PM

Final PDF to printer

691

Zaleski, Carol, 541, 555, 662, 663, 665, 666

Zamarripa, Cecelia A., 616 Zamperetti, N., 620, 621 Zarri, Daniela A., 647 Zelizer, Barbie, 660 Zen Hospice Project, 198, 292

Ziegler, Jesse H., 639 Ziegler, Joanna E., 47 Zillmann, Dorf, 602 Zimmerman, Larry W., 614 Ziner, Andrew S., 46, 608 Ziony, Ruth Kramer, 418 Zizioulas, John D., 662

Zoroaster (Persian religious teacher), 322

Zoucha, Rich, 616 Zucker, Robert, 412, 431, 609, 648 Zuckerman, Phil, 664 Zumbo, Gaetano Giulio, 20 Zylicz, Zbigniew, 624

des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 691des35465_nidx_677-692.indd 691 2/21/14 4:05 PM2/21/14 4:05 PM

Final PDF to printer

This page intentionally left blank

693

Abortion, 424, 426 –428 Accidents, 204, 418, 490–491.

See also Injuries Acquired immunodefi ciency

syndrome (AIDS), 525–527, 528, 594

Active dying, 288–289 Acute care, 176 Acute grief, 356 –357 Adjuvant therapy, 274 Adolescence, 62–64

bereavement, 392, 399 life-threatening illness,

399–400, 404 suicide, 462, 472–475 treatment decisions, 405–406 violence, 388, 502

Adoption loss, 425 Adulthood, 64–66

bereavement, 417, 420–440 older, 199–201 suicide, 470

Advance directive, 116 –117, 225, 233–241

African Americans, 116 –117, 392, 421, 445

hospice and, 194–195 suicide and, 466

African cultures, 96, 112–116, 375 Aftercare (funeral), 305 Afterlife, 531–532. See also

Nonempirical ideas in African culture, 113 in Asian culture, 124, 125,

543–550 in Celtic culture, 130, 131 in Christianity, 538–542 in Greek culture, 536 –538 in Islam, 542–543 in Jewish culture, 534–536, 538 in Native American culture,

108, 111 near-death experiences,

554–562 organ donation and, 168 psychedelic experience and,

564–565 secular concepts, 552–554 in traditional cultures,

532–534 Aging, 440–445 Allowing to die, 225 Altar de muertos, 120 Altruistic suicide, 447, 454 Alzheimer’s disease, 287, 441 Ambiguous loss, 370

Ambivalence, 367 in suicide, 456 –457, 481

“American way of death,” 136 Anatomical theater, 106 Ancestors, 48, 97, 98, 109–110,

112–113, 121, 123, 124, 125, 126 –127, 130, 424, 558–559, 618n141

Animate/inanimate distinction, 55 Anniversary reaction (grief), 358 Announcement of death,

298–300. See also Notifi cation of death

Anomie (suicide), 455 Anticipatory grief, 370–371 Appropriate death, 91, 589. See

also Good death Arab culture, 132 Art therapy. See Spontaneous

drawings Artes moriendi (art of dying), 106 Artifi cial nutrition and hydration,

222, 224, 231 Ashes, 326 Asian culture, 122–129. See also

Chinese culture; Japanese culture

Assimilation, 56 Assisted death, 226 –228 Assisted living facility, 200 Assumptive world, 344, 349, 399 Attachment theory, 347, 360 Attempted suicide, 449,

462–463 Attitudes toward death, 5, 6,

43–44, 46, 103, 105–106, 108, 465

in African culture, 112–113 in Asian culture, 123–124, 125 in Celtic culture, 131 in Mexican culture, 118 in Native American culture,

110–111 in Western culture, 98–99

Autonomy, 214–215, 399 organ donation and, 168

Autopsy, 143, 144–147 psychological, 141, 451–452

Awareness contexts, 263–264

Balinese culture, 48, 97, 320, 575 Bardo (“gap”), 550 Benefi cence, 215 Bequest, 242 Bereavement, 341–343. See also

Grief; Mourning

adulthood and, 417, 420–440 children and, 391–399 college students and, 418 mortality of, 362–363 older adults and, 441 as opportunity for growth,

380–382 parental, 423–435 social support in, 301–302 spousal, 436 –440 symbols of, 300, 302

Bereavement burnout, 373 Bibliotherapy, 409 Biological understanding of

death, 53, 55, 154 Biology of suicide, 458, 459 Biopsy, 274, 276 Black Death, 105, 489 Body disposition, 34–35, 313,

321–328, 329, 330, 331–332 Bonds between living and dead.

See Continuing bonds Brain death, 154, 159–160, 161,

162, 163, 165 in Japan, 170–172

Breaking bad news, 183 Bridge programs (palliative

care), 196 Broken heart phenomenon, 363 Buddhism, 123, 125, 127, 322,

547–550 Burial, 102–104, 132, 321, 322,

324 –326. See also Grave goods

early human, 92, 93, 613n15 environmental impact of, 332 scaffold, 91, 109

Butsudan (family altar), 125, 126

Cadaveric spasm, 154 Cadavers, 146, 169

public exhibition of, 44 Calavera (skeletons or skulls), 118 Cancer, 260, 261, 273–275,

275–286, 287, 592, 594 Capital punishment, 150–151 Cardiac death, 165, 220,

272–273 Cardiopulmonary resuscitation

(CPR), 107, 204, 210, 219–220, 221, 235, 240

Caregiver-patient relationship, 174, 177, 181–185, 187, 271, 287, 402, 566

Casket, 35, 317–318, 320, 330, 332 Causality, 52

Subject Index

des35465_sidx_693-708.indd 693des35465_sidx_693-708.indd 693 2/21/14 4:16 PM2/21/14 4:16 PM

Final PDF to printer

694

Cause of death, 8, 37–38, 97, 115, 141, 581. See also Origin-of- death myths

investigation of, 143–144, 146 traditional cultures and, 95–96

Cellular death, 154 Celtic culture, 129–132 Cemeteries, 102, 104, 120, 125,

324, 326, 329, 350, 549 pet, 80

Central vs. peripheral relationship, 367

Certifi cation of death, 140–141, 142

Chain suicide, 475 Charnel house, 102–103 Chemotherapy, 274, 277 Child, death of, 370, 416,

423–435 Childbearing loss, 424–432 Children

bereavement and, 385, 391–399

communication with, 400, 406 –407, 409–415

funerals and, 34–35 in Hawaiian culture, 133 life-threatening illness and,

406 –407 social support for, 407–409 suicide and, 471–472 television programming for, 9 treatment decisions and,

405–406 understanding of death,

53–62 as victims of violence, 502 violence, 520

Chinese culture, 124–125, 127–128, 134, 329, 384, 460, 543–544, 569

Ch’ing Ming (Chinese festival), 128–129

Christianity, 98, 100, 102, 118–119, 127, 191, 322, 538–542, 553

Chronic illness, 440 Chronic pain, 283 Chronic suicide, 464 Civil War (U.S.), 660n110 Clergy, 305 Clinical death, 154 Closed awareness, 263 Closure, 379 Cluster suicides, 474. See also

Copycat suicide Codicil, 243, 247 Coffi n, 331, 335–336, 543 Cognitive transformations

(developmental), 56 –58, 59, 61–62, 63–64

College students and death, 418–420, 460, 462

Columbarium, 313 Coma, 203, 222, 223, 274 Commemoration. See

Memorialization Companion animal death. See Pet

death Compassion fatigue, 207–209 Compassionate cities, 210,

581–584 Complementary and alternative

therapies, 277–282 Complicated mourning, 359–362,

378, 388, 393 Compression of morbidity, 442 Condolence cards, 10, 140 Confucianism, 544 Congregate housing, 200 Consciousness, states of, 223. See

also Near-death experiences; Psychedelic experience of death

Continuing bonds, 337, 346, 348–350, 352

in Asian culture, 124, 125, 127 in Celtic culture, 130, 131 Internet and, 42 in traditional cultures, 97–98

Continuing care community, 200–201

Convalescent care, 176 Coping potency, 269, 271 Coping strategies, 263–271,

289–292, 302, 347–354, 401–402

Copycat suicide, 466 –467, 471, 474

Coroner, 141, 143–144, 169 Cosmopolitan society, 44–45 Creativity and grief, 381–382 Cremation, 123, 310, 313, 318, 319,

321, 322, 326 –328, 530 Critical incident stress

management, 207 Cry for help (suicide), 449,

461–463 Cryomation, 326 Cryonics, 323, 333 Crypt, 321, 325 Cultural competence, 90, 572–574 Cultural diversity, 89, 91, 112,

117, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136, 137, 182, 280, 334, 438, 453, 572–573

Cultural lag, 46 Culture, 170–172, 365, 438,

466 –467 defi nition of, 89

Curanderismo, 280 Cyberfunerals, 309, 337

Dance of death, 104–106 musical expressions of, 13 in visual arts, 18

Danger-of-death narratives, 12 Danse macabre (dance of death),

13, 18, 104–106 Day of the Dead, 88, 106, 118–122,

130, 136 Death anxiety, 27–29. See also

Terror management Death café, 46 Death certifi cate, 140–141 Death competence, 378 Death dreams, 562–564 Death education, 31–34, 570,

571, 572, 587, 596. See also Thanatology

Death investigator, 143, 450. See also Coroner; Psychological autopsy

Death knell, 34, 35, 100 Death masks, 106 –107, 136 Death notice, 6 –7, 299, 313 Death penalty, 150–151 Death rates, 35–37. See also Cause

of death; Life expectancy Death rattle, 289 Death row, 151 Death songs, 110 Death studies, history of,

32–34 Death system, 139–140, 172–173 Deathbed promises, 376 Deathbed scene, 4, 34,

100–102 Deathbed visions, 560 Deathwatch, 177, 296 Defense mechanisms, 268,

559, 561 Defi nition of death, 40, 151–163 Dementia, 287, 441 Demographics, 34 Depression, 265, 343, 362, 388,

458–459, 470, 475 Descansos (roadside memorials),

310–311 Día de los Muertos. See Day of the

Dead Diagnosis, 182–185, 216 –217, 274 Digital afterlife, 43 Dignity, 272 Directed donation, 167 Directive mourning therapy, 333 Dirge, 13, 131 Disaster, 372–373, 494–501 Discussing death with children,

409–415 Disenfranchised grief, 373–375 Disposition of the body. See Body

disposition “Do no harm,” 215

des35465_sidx_693-708.indd 694des35465_sidx_693-708.indd 694 2/21/14 4:16 PM2/21/14 4:16 PM

Final PDF to printer

695

Do not resuscitate (DNR), 219–220, 235, 240

Double effect, 227, 229 Druids, 130 Dual process model of coping,

351–352 Durable power of attorney for

health care, 237 Dyadic nature of suicide, 456 Dying persons, 185–198, 289–292.

See also Compassionate cities Islam and, 543 Tibetan Buddhism and, 550

Dysfunctional grief. See Complicated mourning

Early adulthood, 418, 450, 462, 491

Economics, health care, 178–180 Effi gy, 104 Egalitarian obits, 7 Egyptian culture, 531 Elder care, 199–201 Elderly. See Older adults Elegy, 16 –17, 131 Embalming, 315–317, 638n55 Emergency care, 201–204,

240–241 Emergency personnel, 32, 201,

202, 203, 207, 208, 241 Emerging adulthood, 64, 418 Emerging disease, 524–525,

527–529 End-of-life care, 181, 185–198 End-of-life choices, 213–214,

216, 217, 221–223, 230–231, 255–256. See also Advance directive; Estate

Entombment, 313, 321, 325, 328 Epidemic, 524 Epidemiologic transition, 38 Epitaph, 16, 310 Equivocal death, 450 Eros and Thanatos, 26 Eschatology, 553 Estate, 241–248, 250. See also

Insurance; Probate; Wills Ethical will, 245 Ethnocentrism, 90 Ethnomedicine, 280 Eulogy, 16, 330 Euphemism, 10–12, 307 Euthanasia, 225, 229–230,

630n50 Executor, 243, 248–249 Existential questions, 26,

420, 553 Extraordinary measures, 231

Fading away, 185 Fairy tales, 73–75

Familicide, 150, 505 Fatalistic suicide, 456 Fear of the dead, 92, 109, 111,

125, 321 Fêng-shui (art of divination),

124–125, 329 Fetal death. See Abortion;

Miscarriage; Stillbirth Fijian culture, 93 Filial piety, 122 Filipino culture, 122, 123, 124 Five stages (model of coping),

265–266, 393 Forensic pathology, 143 Friend death, 420 Funeral director, 304, 305,

307, 330 in African American

communities, 303 Funeral home, 304, 305, 315 Funeral meal, 296, 337–338, 373 Funerals, 295–296, 297, 311–313,

321, 330, 334–335, 549 among African Americans,

116, 117 among LoDagaa of Ghana,

114–116 attitudes toward, 303, 304, 306 children and, 69, 70–71, 77, 81 costs, 313–315, 317, 318–319 criticisms of, 306 –307 in Hawaiian culture, 135 history of, 304–305 jazz, 13, 297–298 music in, 296 –298, 331 paraphernalia, 304 psychosocial aspects of,

298–302 recent developments in,

309–309–310, 330–331, 334–335, 337

regulations, 303–304 Taoist, 134

Futile treatment, 221

Gay and lesbian suicide, 466 Gender differences, 28, 365,

367–368, 449, 470 Genocide, 516 –517 Geographic mobility, 38–40 Geriatrics, 441 Gerontology, 199 Gift exchange, 172. See also Organ

donation Globalization, 25, 42, 44, 45,

89, 581 Golden hour, 203 Good death, 587–591

Buddhist view of, 548–549 Grave goods, 92, 111, 130, 302.